adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015
DESCRIPTION
Marzo 2016TRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
![Page 2: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
AdobePhotoshopCC2015release
AlbertoSeveso
CLASSROOMINABOOK®TheofficialtrainingworkbookfromAdobe
AndrewFaulkner&ConradChavez
![Page 3: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
Adobe®Photoshop®CCClassroominaBook®(2015release)
©2016AdobeSystemsIncorporatedanditslicensors.Allrightsreserved.
Ifthisguideisdistributedwithsoftwarethatincludesanenduseragreement,thisguide,aswellasthesoftwaredescribedinit,isfurnishedunderlicenseandmaybeusedorcopiedonlyinaccordancewiththetermsofsuchlicense.Exceptaspermittedbyanysuchlicense,nopartofthisguidemaybereproduced,storedinaretrievalsystem,ortransmitted,inanyformorbyanymeans,electronic,mechanical,recording,orotherwise,withoutthepriorwrittenpermissionofAdobeSystemsIncorporated.Pleasenotethatthecontentinthisguideisprotectedundercopyrightlawevenifitisnotdistributedwithsoftwarethatincludesanenduserlicenseagreement.
Thecontentofthisguideisfurnishedforinformationaluseonly,issubjecttochangewithoutnotice,andshouldnotbeconstruedasacommitmentbyAdobeSystemsIncorporated.AdobeSystemsIncorporatedassumesnoresponsibilityorliabilityforanyerrorsorinaccuraciesthatmayappearintheinformationalcontentcontainedinthisguide.
Pleaserememberthatexistingartworkorimagesthatyoumaywanttoincludeinyourprojectmaybeprotectedundercopyrightlaw.Theunauthorizedincorporationofsuchmaterialintoyournewworkcouldbeaviolationoftherightsofthecopyrightowner.Pleasebesuretoobtainanypermissionrequiredfromthecopyrightowner.
Anyreferencestocompanynamesinsamplefilesarefordemonstrationpurposesonlyandarenotintendedtorefertoanyactualorganization.
Adobe,theAdobelogo,Acrobat,theAdobePDFlogo,AfterEffects,Behance,ClassroominaBook,CreativeSuite,Flash,Illustrator,InDesign,Lightroom,Photoshop,PostScript,andPremiereareeitherregisteredtrademarksortrademarksofAdobeSystemsIncorporatedintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.
Apple,MacOS,Macintosh,andQuickTimearetrademarksofApple,registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.Microsoft,andWindowsareeitherregisteredtrademarksortrademarksofMicrosoftCorporationintheU.S.and/orothercountries.Allothertrademarksarethepropertyoftheirrespectiveowners.
AdobeSystemsIncorporated,345ParkAvenue,SanJose,California95110-2704,USA
NoticetoU.S.GovernmentEndUsers.TheSoftwareandDocumentationare“CommercialItems,”asthattermisdefinedat48C.F.R.§2.101,consistingof“CommercialComputerSoftware”and“CommercialComputerSoftwareDocumentation,”assuchtermsareusedin48C.F.R.§12.212or48C.F.R.§227.7202,asapplicable.Consistentwith48C.F.R.§12.212or48C.F.R.§§227.7202-1through227.7202-4,asapplicable,theCommercialComputerSoftwareandCommercialComputerSoftwareDocumentationarebeinglicensedtoU.S.Governmentendusers(a)onlyasCommercialItemsand(b)withonlythoserightsasaregrantedtoallotherenduserspursuanttothetermsandconditionsherein.Unpublished-rightsreservedunderthecopyrightlawsoftheUnitedStates.AdobeSystemsIncorporated,345ParkAvenue,SanJose,CA95110-2704,USA.ForU.S.GovernmentEndUsers,Adobeagreestocomplywithallapplicableequalopportunitylawsincluding,ifappropriate,theprovisionsofExecutiveOrder11246,asamended,Section402oftheVietnamEraVeterans
![Page 4: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
ReadjustmentAssistanceActof1974(38USC4212),andSection503oftheRehabilitationActof1973,asamended,andtheregulationsat41CFRParts60-1through60-60,60-250,and60-741.Theaffirmativeactionclauseandregulationscontainedintheprecedingsentenceshallbeincorporatedbyreference.
AdobePressbooksarepublishedbyPeachpit,adivisionofPearsonEducationlocatedinSanFrancisco,California.ForthelatestonAdobePressbooks,gotowww.adobepress.com.Toreporterrors,pleasesendanotetoerrata@peachpit.com.Forinformationongettingpermissionforreprintsandexcerpts,[email protected].
PrintedandboundintheUnitedStatesofAmerica
ISBN-13:978-0-134-30813-5
ISBN-10:0-134-30813-1
988654321
![Page 5: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
HowtoGetYourLessonFiles
Thankyouforpurchasingthisdigitalversionof:
AdobePhotoshopCCClassroominaBook®(2015release)
Inordertoworkthroughtheprojectsinthisbook,youwillneedtodownloadthelessonfilesfrompeachpit.com.Eachdownloadlinkgivesyouthefilesforasinglelesson.Youalsohavetheoptionofdownloadingtheentiresetoflessonfilesasasingleverylargefile.
Toaccessthesefiles,followthestepsbelow:
1.OnaMacorPC,gotowww.peachpit.com/redeemandenterthiscode:
4AB0466F379B
2.IfyoudonothaveaPeachpit.comaccount,youwillbepromptedtocreateone.
3.ThedownloadablefileswillbelistedunderLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpage(seeimagebelow;yourlistoffilesmaylookalittledifferent.)
4.Clickthelessonfilelinkstodownloadthemtoyourcomputer.
Ifyouareunabletolocatethefilesforthistitlebyfollowingthestepsabove,pleaseemailask@peachpit.comandsupplythecodefromstepone.Ourcustomerservicerepresentativeswillassistyouassoonaspossible.
WhattodowiththeLessonfilesonceyou’vedownloadedthemThefilesarecompressedintoZiparchivestospeedupdownloadtimeandtoprotectthecontentsfromdamageduringtransfer.Youmustuncompress(or“unzip”)thefilestorestorethemtotheiroriginalsizeandformatbeforeyouusethemwiththebook.ModernMacandWindowssystemsaresetuptoopenZiparchivesbysimplydouble-clicking.
Afterunzippingthefiles,createanewfoldernamed“Lessons”inaconvenientlocationonyourcomputer.
•Ifyou’rerunningWindows,right-clickandchooseNew>Folder.Thenenterthenewnameforyourfolder.
![Page 6: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
•Ifyou’reusingMacOS,intheFinder,chooseFile>NewFolder.Typethenewnameanddragthefoldertothelocationyouwanttouse.
DragtheunzippedLessonsfolders(Lesson01,Lesson02,etc.)toyournew“Lessons”folder.Whenyoubegineachlesson,navigatetothefolderwiththatlessonnumbertoaccessalltheassetsyouneedtocompletethelesson.
Important!Thelessonfilesareprovidedsolelyforyourpersonaluse.Youarenotauthorizedtousethesefilescommercially,ortopublishordistributetheminanyformwithoutwrittenpermissionfromAdobeSystems.
![Page 7: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
Contents
GETTINGSTARTED
AboutClassroominaBook
What’snewinthisedition
Prerequisites
InstallingAdobePhotoshopandAdobeBridge
StartingAdobePhotoshop
AccessingtheClassroominaBookfiles
Restoringdefaultpreferences
Additionalresources
AdobeAuthorizedTrainingCenters
1GETTINGTOKNOWTHEWORKAREA
StartingtoworkinAdobePhotoshop
Usingthetools
Samplingacolor
Workingwithtoolsandtoolproperties
UndoingactionsinPhotoshop
Moreaboutpanelsandpanellocations
FindingresourcesforusingPhotoshop
Reviewquestionsandanswers
2BASICPHOTOCORRECTIONS
Strategyforretouching
Resolutionandimagesize
OpeningafilewithAdobeBridge
StraighteningandcroppingtheimageinPhotoshop
Adjustingthecolorandtone
UsingtheSpotHealingBrushtool
Applyingacontent-awarepatch
RepairingareaswiththeCloneStamptool
Sharpeningtheimage
Reviewquestionsandanswers
![Page 8: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
3WORKINGWITHSELECTIONS
Aboutselectingandselectiontools
Gettingstarted
UsingtheQuickSelectiontool
Movingaselectedarea
Manipulatingselections
UsingtheMagicWandtool
Selectingwiththelassotools
Rotatingaselection
SelectingwiththeMagneticLassotool
Selectingfromacenterpoint
Resizingandcopyingaselection
Croppinganimage
Reviewquestionsandanswers
4LAYERBASICS
Aboutlayers
Gettingstarted
UsingtheLayerspanel
Rearranginglayers
Applyingagradienttoalayer
Applyingalayerstyle
Addinganadjustmentlayer
Updatinglayereffects
Addingaborder
Flatteningandsavingfiles
Reviewquestionsandanswers
5QUICKFIXES
Gettingstarted
Improvingasnapshot
Blurringabackground
Creatingapanorama
Correctingimagedistortion
![Page 9: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
Addingdepthoffield
MovingobjectswiththeContent-AwareMovetool
Adjustingperspectiveinanimage
Reviewquestionsandanswers
6MASKSANDCHANNELS
Workingwithmasksandchannels
Gettingstarted
Creatingamask
Refiningamask
Creatingaquickmask
ManipulatinganimagewithPuppetWarp
Workingwithchannels
Reviewquestionsandanswers
7TYPOGRAPHICDESIGN
Abouttype
Gettingstarted
Creatingaclippingmaskfromtype
Creatingtypeonapath
Warpingpointtype
Designingparagraphsoftype
Addingaroundedrectangle
Addingverticaltext
Reviewquestionsandanswers
8VECTORDRAWINGTECHNIQUES
Aboutbitmapimagesandvectorgraphics
AboutpathsandthePentool
Gettingstarted
DrawingwiththePentool
Workingwithdefinedcustomshapes
ImportingaSmartObject
Addingcoloranddepthtoashapeusinglayerstyles
Reviewquestionsandanswers
![Page 10: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
9ADVANCEDCOMPOSITING
Gettingstarted
Arranginglayers
UsingSmartFilters
Paintingalayer
Addingabackground
UsingtheHistoryPaneltoundotasks
Upscalingalow-resolutionimage
Reviewquestionsandanswers
10PAINTINGWITHTHEMIXERBRUSH
AbouttheMixerBrush
Gettingstarted
Selectingbrushsettings
Mixingcolors
Creatingacustombrushpreset
Mixingcolorswithaphotograph
Reviewquestionsandanswers
11EDITINGVIDEO
Gettingstarted
AbouttheTimelinepanel
Creatinganewvideoproject
Animatingtextwithkeyframes
Creatingeffects
Addingtransitions
Addingaudio
Mutingunwantedaudio
Renderingvideo
Reviewquestionsandanswers
12WORKINGWITHCAMERARAW
Gettingstarted
Aboutcamerarawfiles
ProcessingfilesinCameraRaw
![Page 11: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
Applyingadvancedcolorcorrection
Reviewquestionsandanswers
13PREPARINGFILESFORTHEWEB
Gettingstarted
Usinglayergroupstocreatebuttongraphics
Automatingamultisteptask
SavingassetswithAdobeGenerator
Reviewquestionsandanswers
14PRODUCINGANDPRINTINGCONSISTENTCOLOR
Preparingfilesforprinting
Gettingstarted
Performinga“zoomtest”
Identifyingout-of-gamutcolors
Adjustinganimage
ConvertinganimagetoCMYK
Aboutcolormanagement
Specifyingcolor-managementsettings
Proofinganimage
SavingtheimageasaCMYKEPSfile
PrintingaCMYKimagefromPhotoshop
Reviewquestionsandanswers
15PRINTING3DFILES
Gettingstarted
Understandingthe3Denvironment
Positioning3Delements
Printinga3Dfile
Reviewquestionsandanswers
APPENDICES
INDEX
![Page 12: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
GettingStarted
Adobe®Photoshop®CC,thebenchmarkfordigitalimagingexcellence,providesstrongperformance,powerfulimageeditingfeatures,andanintuitiveinterface.AdobeCameraRaw,includedwithPhotoshopCC,offersflexibilityandcontrolasyouworkwithrawimagesaswellasTIFFandJPEGimages.PhotoshopCCgivesyouthedigital-editingtoolsyouneedtotransformimagesmoreeasilythaneverbefore.
AboutClassroominaBookAdobePhotoshopCCClassroominaBook®(2015release)ispartoftheofficialtrainingseriesforAdobegraphicsandpublishingsoftware,developedwiththesupportofAdobeproductexperts.Thelessonsaredesignedtoletyoulearnatyourownpace.Ifyou’renewtoAdobePhotoshop,you’lllearnthefundamentalconceptsandfeaturesyou’llneedtomastertheprogram.Andifyou’vebeenusingAdobePhotoshopforawhile,you’llfindthatClassroominaBookteachesmanyadvancedfeatures,includingtipsandtechniquesforusingthelatestversionoftheapplicationandpreparingimagesfortheweb.
Althougheachlessonprovidesstep-by-stepinstructionsforcreatingaspecificproject,there’sroomforexplorationandexperimentation.Youcanfollowthebookfromstarttofinish,ordoonlythelessonsthatmatchyourinterestsandneeds.Eachlessonconcludeswithareviewsectionsummarizingwhatyou’vecovered.
What’snewinthiseditionThiseditioncoversnewfeaturesinAdobePhotoshopCC,suchasCreativeCloudlibrarieswithLinkedSmartObjectsforeasilyreusingdesignassetsandsharingthemwithyourteam;usingtheenhancedContentAwareMovetooltoinstantlymodifyduplicatedcontent;usingmultipleartboardstodesignscreensmoreefficientlyforarangeofdisplaysizesacrossdesktopandmobiledevices.Inaddition,theselessonsintroduceyoutoAdobeDevicePreviewtotestmobiledesignsonactualhardware,usingnewworkflowstogenerateoptimizedwebandmobileassets,easierwaystofindtherightfontforyourproject,howtouploadyourworktoshareonyourBehanceportfolio,andmore.
Thiseditionisalsochock-fullofextrainformationonPhotoshopfeaturesandhowtoworkeffectivelywiththisrobustapplication.You’lllearnbestpracticesfororganizing,managing,andshowcasingyourphotos,aswellashowtooptimizeimagesfortheweb.Andthroughoutthisedition,lookfortipsandtechniquesfromoneofAdobe’sownexperts,PhotoshopevangelistJulieanneKost.
PrerequisitesBeforeyoubegintouseAdobePhotoshopCCClassroominaBook(2015release),youshouldhaveaworkingknowledgeofyourcomputeranditsoperatingsystem.Makesurethatyouknowhowtousethemouseandstandardmenusandcommands,andalsohowtoopen,save,andclosefiles.Ifyouneedtoreviewthesetechniques,seethedocumentationincludedwithyourMicrosoft®Windows®orApple®Mac®OSXsystem.
![Page 13: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
Tocompletethelessonsinthisbook,you’llneedtohavebothAdobePhotoshopCC(2015release)andAdobeBridgeCCinstalled.
InstallingAdobePhotoshopandAdobeBridgeBeforeyoubeginusingAdobePhotoshopCCClassroominaBook(2015release),makesurethatyoursystemissetupcorrectlyandthatyou’veinstalledtherequiredsoftwareandhardware.YoumustlicensetheAdobePhotoshopCCsoftwareseparately.Forsystemrequirementsandcompleteinstructionsoninstallingthesoftware,visitwww.adobe.com/support.NotethatsomePhotoshopCCfeatures,includingall3Dfeatures,requireavideocardthatsupportsOpenGL2.0andthathasatleast512MBofdedicatedVRAM.
ManyofthelessonsinthisbookuseAdobeBridge.PhotoshopandBridgeuseseparateinstallers.YoumustinstalltheseapplicationsfromAdobeCreativeCloud(creative.adobe.com)ontoyourharddisk.Followtheonscreeninstructions.
StartingAdobePhotoshopYoustartPhotoshopjustasyoudomostsoftwareapplications.
TostartAdobePhotoshopinWindows:ChooseStart>AllPrograms>AdobePhotoshopCC.
TostartAdobePhotoshopinMacOS:OpentheApplications/AdobePhotoshopCCfolder,anddouble-clicktheAdobePhotoshopprogramicon.
AccessingtheClassroominaBookfilesInordertoworkthroughtheprojectsinthisbook,youwillneedtodownloadthelessonfilesfrompeachpit.com.Youcandownloadthefilesforindividuallessons,ordownloadthemallinasinglefile.
IfyoupurchasedaneBookfrompeachpit.comoradobepress.com,thefileswillautomaticallyappearonyourAccountpage,undertheLesson&UpdateFilestab.
IfyoupurchasedaneBookfromadifferentvendororaprintbook,usetheuniquecodeinthisbooktogainaccesstothelessonfiles.
ToaccesstheClassroominaBookfiles,dothefollowing:
1.Onadesktoporlaptopcomputer,gotowww.peachpit.com/redeem,andenterthecodefoundatthebackofyourbook.
2.IfyoudonothaveaPeachpit.comaccount,createonewhenyou’repromptedtodoso.
3.ThedownloadablefileswillbelistedundertheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpage.Justlogintoaccessyourfilesanytimeasmanytimesasyouneed;thecodeneedstoberedeemedonlyonce.
4.Clickthelessonfilelinkstodownloadthemtoyourcomputer.
5.Createanewfolderonyourharddisk,andnameitLessons.Then,dragthelesson
![Page 14: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
filesyoudownloadedintotheLessonsfolderonyourharddisk.
Note
Asyoucompleteeachlesson,youwillpreservethestartfiles.Incaseyouoverwritethem,youcanrestoretheoriginalfilesbydownloadingthecorrespondinglessonfilesfromyourAccountpageatpeachpit.com.
WebEditionThisbookcomeswithafreeWebEditionthatprovidesmanybenefits.YourWebEditioncanbeaccessedfromanydevicewithaconnectiontotheInternetanditcontains:
•Thecompletetextofthebook
•Hoursofinstructionalvideokeyedtothetext
•Interactivequizzes
Inaddition,theWebEditionwillbeupdatedwhenAdobeaddssignificantfeatureupdatesbetweenmajorCreativeCloudreleases.Toaccommodatethechanges,sectionsoftheonlinebookwillbeupdatedornewsectionswillbeadded.
AccessingtheFreeWebEditionYourpurchaseofthisClassroominaBookinanyformatincludesaccesstothecorrespondingWebEdition.TheWebEditioncontainsthecompletetextofthebookaugmentedwithhoursofvideoandinteractivequizzes.
Note
RegisteringtoaccesstheWebEditiondoesnotautomaticallyprovideaccesstoyourlessonfiles,andviceversa.Youmustfollowtheinstructionsforeachtoclaimthefullbenefitsofyourpurchase.
Ifyoupurchasedyourbookthroughanyotherchannel,itmustberegistered:
1.Gotowww.peachpit.com/register.
2.Signinorcreateanewaccount.
3.EnterISBN:9780134308135.
4.Answerthequestionsasproofofpurchase.
5.TheWebEditionwillappearundertheDigitalPurchasestabonyourAccountpage.ClicktheLaunchlinktoaccesstheproduct.
![Page 15: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
RestoringdefaultpreferencesThepreferencesfilestoresinformationaboutpanelandcommandsettings.EachtimeyouquitAdobePhotoshop,thepositionsofthepanelsandcertaincommandsettingsarerecordedinthepreferencesfile.AnyselectionsyoumakeinthePreferencesdialogboxarealsosavedinthepreferencesfile.
Toensurethatwhatyouseeonscreenmatchestheimagesandinstructionsinthisbook,youshouldrestorethedefaultpreferencesasyoubegineachlesson.Ifyouprefertopreserveyourpreferences,beawarethatthetools,panels,andothersettingsinPhotoshopCCmaynotmatchthosedescribedinthisbook.
Ifyouhavecustomizedyourcolorsettings,usethefollowingproceduretosavethemasapresetbeforeyoustartworkinthisbook.Whenyouwanttorestoreyourcolorsettings,youcansimplyselectthepresetyoucreated.
Tosaveyourcurrentcolorsettings1.StartAdobePhotoshop.
2.ChooseEdit>ColorSettings.
3.NotewhatisselectedintheSettingsmenu:
•IfitisanythingotherthanCustom,writedownthenameofthesettingsfile,andclickOKtoclosethedialogbox.Youdonotneedtoperformsteps4–6ofthisprocedure.
•IfCustomisselectedintheSettingsmenu,clickSave(notOK).
TheSavedialogboxopens.ThedefaultlocationistheSettingsfolder,whichiswhereyouwanttosaveyourfile.Thedefaultfileextensionis.csf(colorsettingsfile).
4.IntheFileNamefield(Windows)orSaveAsfield(MacOS),typeadescriptivenameforyourcolorsettings,preservingthe.csffileextension.ThenclickSave.
5.IntheColorSettingsCommentdialogbox,typeanydescriptivetextthatwillhelpyouidentifythecolorsettingslater,suchasthedate,specificsettings,oryourworkgroup.
6.ClickOKtoclosetheColorSettingsCommentdialogbox,andagaintoclosetheColorSettingsdialogbox.
Torestoreyourcolorsettings1.StartAdobePhotoshop.
2.ChooseEdit>ColorSettings.
3.FromtheSettingsmenuintheColorSettingsdialogbox,choosethesettingsfileyounotedorsavedinthepreviousprocedure,andclickOK.
![Page 16: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
AdditionalresourcesAdobePhotoshopCCClassroominaBook(2015release)isnotmeanttoreplacedocumentationthatcomeswiththeprogramortobeacomprehensivereferenceforeveryfeature.Onlythecommandsandoptionsusedinthelessonsareexplainedinthisbook.Forcomprehensiveinformationaboutprogramfeaturesandtutorials,refertotheseresources:
AdobePhotoshopHelpandSupport:helpx.adobe.com/photoshop.htmliswhereyoucanfindandbrowseHelpandSupportcontentonAdobe.com.
AdobeForums:forums.adobe.comletsyoutapintopeer-to-peerdiscussions,questions,andanswersonAdobeproducts.
AdobePhotoshopCCproducthomepage:adobe.com/products/photoshop
AdobeAdd-ons:creative.adobe.com/addonsisacentralresourceforfindingtools,services,extensions,codesamples,andmoretosupplementandextendyourAdobeproducts.
Resourcesforeducators:adobe.com/educationandedex.adobe.comofferatreasuretroveofinformationforinstructorswhoteachclassesonAdobesoftware.Findsolutionsforeducationatalllevels,includingfreecurriculathatuseanintegratedapproachtoteachingAdobesoftwareandcanbeusedtopreparefortheAdobeCertifiedAssociateexams.
AdobeAuthorizedTrainingCentersAdobeAuthorizedTrainingCentersofferinstructor-ledcoursesandtrainingonAdobeproducts.
AdirectoryofAATCsisavailableattraining.adobe.com/trainingpartners.
![Page 17: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
1.GettingtoKnowtheWorkArea
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•OpenimagefilesinAdobePhotoshop.
•SelectandusetoolsintheToolspanel.
•Setoptionsforaselectedtoolusingtheoptionsbar.
•Usevariousmethodstozoomintoandoutfromanimage.
•Select,rearrange,andusepanels.
•Choosecommandsinpanelandcontextmenus.
•Openanduseapanelinthepaneldock.
•Undoactionstocorrectmistakesortomakedifferentchoices.
Thislessonwilltakeaboutanhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson01projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.
Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 18: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
PROJECT:BIRTHDAYCARDDESIGN
AsyouworkwithAdobePhotoshop,you’lldiscoverthatyoucanoftenaccomplishthesametaskinseveralways.Tomakethebestuseoftheextensiveeditingcapabilitiesin
Photoshop,youmustfirstlearntonavigatetheworkarea.
StartingtoworkinAdobePhotoshopTheAdobePhotoshopworkareaincludesmenus,toolbars,andpanelsthatgiveyouquickaccesstoavarietyoftoolsandoptionsforeditingandaddingelementstoyourimage.Youcanalsoaddcommandsandfilterstothemenusbyinstallingthird-partysoftwareknownasplug-ins.
InPhotoshop,youprimarilyworkwithbitmapped,digitizedimages(thatis,continuous-toneimagesthathavebeenconvertedintoaseriesofsmallsquares,orpictureelements,calledpixels).Youcanalsoworkwithvectorgraphics,whicharedrawingsmadeofsmoothlinesthatretaintheircrispnesswhenscaled.YoucancreateoriginalartworkinPhotoshop,oryoucanimportimagesfrommanysources,suchas:
•Photographsfromadigitalcameraormobilephone
•Stockphotography
•Scansofphotographs,transparencies,negatives,graphics,orotherdocuments
•Capturedvideoimages
•Artworkcreatedindrawingprograms
![Page 19: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
StartingPhotoshopandopeningafileTobegin,you’llstartAdobePhotoshopandresetthedefaultpreferences.
1.Double-clicktheAdobePhotoshopicononyourtaskbar(Windows)ordock(MacOS),andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)toresetthedefaultsettings.
Ifyoudon’tseethePhotoshopiconinyourtaskbarordock,chooseStart>AllPrograms>AdobePhotoshopCC(Windows)orlookintheApplicationsfolder(MacOS).
2.Whenprompted,clickYestoconfirmthatyouwanttodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
Note
Typically,youwon’tneedtoresetdefaultswhenyou’reworkingonyourownprojects.However,you’llresetthepreferencesbeforeworkingonmostlessonsinthisbooktoensurethatwhatyouseeonscreenmatchesthedescriptionsinthelessons.Formoreinformation,see“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.
ThePhotoshopworkareaappearsasshowninthefollowingillustration.
![Page 20: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
A.MenubarB.OptionsbarC.Toolspanel
D.WorkspacesmenuE.Panels
OnMacOS,theapplicationframekeepstheimage,panels,andmenubartogether.
Note
ThisillustrationshowstheMacOSversionofPhotoshop.ThearrangementissimilaronWindows,butoperatingsystemstylesmayvary.
ThedefaultworkspaceinPhotoshopconsistsofthemenubarandoptionsbaratthetopofthescreen,theToolspanelontheleft,andseveralopenpanelsinthepaneldockontheright.Whenyouhavedocumentsopen,oneormoreimagewindowsalsoappear,andyoucandisplaythematthesametimeusingthetabbedinterface.ThePhotoshopuserinterfaceisverysimilartotheoneinAdobeIllustrator®,AdobeInDesign®,andAdobeFlashProfessional®—solearninghowtousethetoolsandpanelsinoneapplicationmeansthatyou’llbefamiliarwiththemwhenyouworkintheothers.
ThereisonemaindifferencebetweenthePhotoshopworkareaonWindowsandthatonMacOS:WindowsalwayspresentsPhotoshopinacontainedwindow.OnMacOS,youcanchoosewhethertoworkwithanapplicationframe,whichcontainsthePhotoshopapplication’swindowsandpanelswithinaframethatisdistinctfromotherapplicationsyoumayhaveopen;onlythemenubarisoutsidetheapplicationframe.Theapplicationframeisenabledbydefault;todisabletheapplicationframe,chooseWindow>ApplicationFrame.
![Page 21: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
3.ChooseFile>Open,andnavigatetotheLessons/Lesson01folderthatyoucopiedtoyourharddrivefromthepeachpit.comwebsite.(Ifyouhaven’tdownloadedthefiles,see“AccessingtheClassroominaBookfiles”onpage3.)
4.Selectthe01End.psdfile,andclickOpen.ClickOKifyouseetheEmbeddedProfileMismatchdialogbox.
The01End.psdfileopensinitsownwindow,calledtheimagewindow.Theendfilesinthisbookshowyouwhatyouarecreatingineachproject.Inthisproject,you’llcreateabirthdaycard.
5.ChooseFile>Close,orclicktheclosebutton(thexnexttothefilename)onthetitlebaroftheimagewindow.(DonotclosePhotoshop.)
UsingthetoolsPhotoshopprovidesanintegratedsetoftoolsforproducingsophisticatedgraphicsforprint,web,andmobileviewing.WecouldeasilyfilltheentirebookwithdetailsonthewealthofPhotoshoptoolsandtoolconfigurations.Whilethatwouldcertainlybeausefulreference,it’snotthegoalofthisbook.Instead,you’llstartgainingexperiencebyconfiguringandusingafewtoolsonasampleproject.Everylessonwillintroduceyoutomoretoolsandwaystousethem.Bythetimeyoufinishallthelessonsinthisbook,you’llhaveasolidfoundationforfurtherexplorationsofthePhotoshoptoolset.
![Page 22: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
SelectingandusingatoolfromtheToolspanelTheToolspanelisthelong,narrowpanelonthefarleftsideoftheworkarea.Itcontainsselectiontools,paintingandeditingtools,foreground-andbackground-colorselectionboxes,andviewingtools.
Note
ForacompletelistofthetoolsintheToolspanel,seetheAppendix,“Toolspaneloverview.”
You’llstartbyusingtheZoomtool,whichalsoappearsinmanyotherAdobeapplications,includingIllustrator,InDesign,andAcrobat.
1.ChooseFile>Open,navigatetotheLessons/Lesson01folder,anddouble-clickthe01Start.psdfiletoopenit.
The01Start.psdfilecontainsthebackgroundimageandaribbongraphicthatyou’llusetocreatethebirthdaycardthatyouviewedintheendfile.
2.ClickthedoublearrowsjustabovetheToolspaneltotoggletoadouble-columnview.Clickthedoublearrowsagaintoreturntoasingle-columnToolspanelanduseyourscreenspacemoreefficiently.
![Page 23: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
3.Examinethestatusbaratthebottomoftheworkarea(Windows)orimagewindow(MacOS),andnoticethepercentagethatappearsonthefarleft.Thisrepresentsthecurrentenlargementviewoftheimage,orzoomlevel.
4.MovethepointerovertheToolspanel,andhoveritoverthemagnifying-glassiconuntilatooltipappears.Thetooltipdisplaysthetool’sname(Zoomtool)andkeyboardshortcut(Z).
5.ClicktheZoomtoolicon( )intheToolspanel,orpressZtoselectit.
6.Movethepointerovertheimagewindow.Thepointernowlookslikeatinymagnifyingglasswithaplussigninthecenteroftheglass( ).
7.Clickanywhereintheimagewindow.
![Page 24: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
Theimageenlargestoapresetpercentagelevel,whichreplacesthepreviousvalueinthestatusbar.Ifyouclickagain,thezoomadvancestothenextpresetlevel,uptoamaximumof3200%.
8.HolddowntheAltkey(Windows)orOptionkey(MacOS)sothattheZoomtoolpointerappearswithaminussigninthecenterofthemagnifyingglass( ),andthenclickanywhereintheimage.ThenreleasetheAltorOptionkey.
Nowtheviewzoomsouttoalowerpresetmagnification,sothatyoucanseemoreoftheimage,butinlessdetail.
9.IfScrubbyZoomisselectedintheoptionsbar,clickanywhereontheimageanddragtheZoomtooltotheright.Theimageenlarges.DragtheZoomtooltothelefttozoomout.
WhenScrubbyZoomisselected,youcandragtheZoomtoolacrosstheimagetozoominandout.
Note
Youcanuseothermethodstozoominandout.Forexample,whentheZoomtoolisselected,youcanselecttheZoomInorZoomOutmodeontheoptionsbar.YoucanchooseView>ZoomInorView>ZoomOut.Or,youcantypeanewpercentageinthestatusbarandpressEnterorReturn.
10.DeselectScrubbyZoomintheoptionsbarifit’sselected.Then,usingtheZoomtool,dragarectangletoenclosepartoftheroseblossom.
Theimageenlargessothattheareayouenclosedinyourrectanglenowfillstheentireimagewindow.
11.ClickFitScreenintheoptionsbartoseetheentireimageagain.
![Page 25: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
YouhaveusedtheZoomtoolinfourdifferentwaystochangethemagnificationintheimagewindow:clicking,holdingdownakeyboardmodifierwhileclicking,draggingtozoominandout,anddraggingtodefineamagnificationarea.ManyoftheothertoolsintheToolspanelcanbeusedwithkeyboardcombinationsandoptionsaswell.You’llhaveopportunitiestousethesetechniquesasyouworkthroughthelessonsinthisbook.
ZoomingandscrollingwiththeNavigatorpanel
TheNavigatorpanelisanotherspeedywaytomakelargechangesinthezoomlevel,especiallywhentheexactpercentageofmagnificationisunimportant.It’salsoagreatwaytoscrollaroundinanimage,becausethethumbnailshowsyouexactlywhatpartoftheimageappearsintheimagewindow.ToopentheNavigatorpanel,chooseWindow>Navigator.
ThesliderundertheimagethumbnailintheNavigatorpanelenlargestheimagewhenyoudragtotheright(towardthelargemountainicon)andreducesitwhenyoudragtotheleft.
Theredrectangularoutlinerepresentstheareaoftheimagethatappearsintheimagewindow.Whenyouzoominfarenoughthattheimagewindowshowsonlypartoftheimage,youcandragtheredoutlinearoundthethumbnailareatoseeotherareasoftheimage.Thisisalsoanexcellentwaytoverifywhichpartofanimageyou’reworkingonwhenyouworkatveryhighzoomlevels.
BrighteninganimageOneofthemostcommoneditsyou’relikelytomakeistobrightenanimagetakenwithadigitalcameraorphone.You’llbrightenthisimagebychangingitsbrightnessandcontrastvalues.
![Page 26: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
1.IntheLayerspanel,ontherightsideoftheworkspace,makesuretheRoselayerisselected.
2.IntheAdjustmentspanel,whichisabovetheLayerspanelinthepaneldock,clicktheBrightness/ContrasticontoaddaBrightness/Contrastadjustmentlayer.ThePropertiespanelopens,displayingtheBrightness/Contrastsettings.
3.InthePropertiespanel,movetheBrightnesssliderto98andtheContrastsliderto18.
Theimageoftherosebrightens.
Intheselessons,we’llofteninstructyoutoenterspecificnumbersinpanelsanddialogboxestoachieveparticulareffects.Whenyou’reworkingonyourownprojects,experimentwithdifferentvaluestoseehowtheyaffectyourimage.Thereisnorightorwrongsetting;thevaluesyoushouldusedependontheresultsyouwant.
4.IntheLayerspanel,examinetheBrightness/Contrastadjustmentlayer.
Adjustmentlayersletyoumakechangestoyourimage,suchasadjustingthebrightnessoftherose,withoutaffectingtheactualpixels.Becauseyou’veusedanadjustmentlayer,youcanalwaysreturntotheoriginalimagebyhidingordeletingtheadjustmentlayer—andyoucanedittheadjustmentlayeratanytime.You’lluseadjustmentlayersinseverallessonsinthisbook.
LayeringisoneofthefundamentalandmostpowerfulfeaturesinPhotoshop.Photoshop
![Page 27: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
includesmanykindsoflayers,someofwhichcontainimages,text,orsolidcolors,andothersthatsimplyinteractwithlayersbelowthem.You’lllearnmoreaboutlayersinLesson4,“LayerBasics,”andthroughoutthebook.
5.ClickthedoublearrowsatthetopofthePropertiespaneltocloseit.
6.ChooseFile>SaveAs,namethefile01Working.psd,andclickOKorSave.
7.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
Savingthefilewithadifferentnameensuresthattheoriginalfile(01Start.psd)remainsunchanged.Thatway,youcanreturntoitifyouwanttostartover.
You’vejustcompletedyourfirsttaskinPhotoshop.Yourimageisbrightandpunchyandreadyforabirthdaycard.
SamplingacolorBydefault,theforegroundcolorinPhotoshopisblackandthebackgroundcoloriswhite.Youcanchangetheforegroundandbackgroundcolorsinseveralways.OnewayistousetheEyedroppertooltosampleacolorfromtheimage.You’llusetheEyedroppertooltosampletheblueofoneribbonsothatyoucanmatchthatcolorwhenyoucreateanotherribbon.
First,you’llneedtodisplaytheRibbonslayersoyoucanseethecoloryouwanttosample.
1.IntheLayerspanel,clicktheVisibilitycolumnfortheRibbonslayertomakethelayervisible.Whenalayerisvisible,aneyeicon( )appearsinthatcolumn.
Aribbonwith“HappyBirthday”writtenonitappearsintheimagewindow.
2.SelecttheRibbonslayerintheLayerspanelsothatit’stheactivelayer.
3.SelecttheEyedroppertool( )intheToolspanel.
4.ClicktheblueareaintheHappyBirthdayribbontosampleabluecolor.
![Page 28: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
TheforegroundcolorchangesintheToolspanelandtheColorpanel.Anythingyoudrawwillbethiscoloruntilyouchangetheforegroundcoloragain.
WorkingwithtoolsandtoolpropertiesWhenyouselectedtheZoomtoolinthepreviousexercise,yousawthattheoptionsbarprovidedwaysforyoutochangetheviewofthecurrentimagewindow.Nowyou’lllearnmoreaboutsettingtoolpropertiesusingcontextmenus,theoptionsbar,panels,andpanelmenus.You’lluseallofthesemethodsasyouworkwithtoolstoaddthesecondribbontoyourbirthdaycard.
UsingcontextmenusContextmenusareshortmenusthatcontaincommandsandoptionsappropriatetospecificelementsintheworkarea.Theyaresometimesreferredtoas“right-click”or“shortcut”menus.Usually,thecommandsonacontextmenuarealsoavailableinsomeotherareaoftheuserinterface,butusingthecontextmenucansavetime.
1.SelecttheZoomtool( ),andzoominsoyoucanclearlyseethelowerthirdofthecard.
2.SelecttheRectangularMarqueetool( )intheToolspanel.
TheRectangularMarqueetoolselectsrectangularareas.You’lllearnmoreaboutselectiontoolsinLesson3,“WorkingwithSelections.”
3.DragtheRectangularMarqueetooltocreateaselectionabout1/2inchtalland2incheswide,endingattherightedgeofthecard.(Seetheillustrationbelow.)Asyoudragthetool,Photoshopdisplaysthewidthandheightoftheselectedarea.It’sokayifthesizeofyourselectionisalittledifferentfromours.
![Page 29: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
Selectionareasareshownbymovingdottedlines,sometimesreferredtoasmarchingants.
4.SelecttheBrushtool( )intheToolspanel.
5.Intheimagewindow,right-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS)anywhereintheimagetoopentheBrushtoolcontextmenu.
Contextmenusvarywiththeircontext,ofcourse,sowhatappearscanbeamenuofcommandsorapanel-likesetofoptions,whichiswhathappensinthiscase.
6.Selectthefirstbrush(SoftRound),andchangethesizeto65pixels.
7.Clickanywhereoutsidetheselectiontoclosethepanel.
8.Dragthecursoracrosstheselectedareauntilit’sfullypaintedblue.Don’tworryaboutstayingwithintheselection;youcan’taffectanythingoutsidetheselectionasyoupaint.
Note
Clickinganywhereintheworkareaclosesthecontextmenu.
9.Whenthebariscoloredin,chooseSelect>Deselectsothatnothingisselected.
![Page 30: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
Theselectionisgone,butthebluebarremains.
SelectingandusingahiddentoolPhotoshophasmanytoolsyoucanusetoeditimagefiles,butyouwillprobablyworkwithonlyafewofthematatime.TheToolspanelarrangessomeofthetoolsingroups,withonlyonetoolshownforeachgroup.Theothertoolsinthegrouparehiddenbehindthattool.You’llusethePolygonalLassotooltoremoveatriangularnotchfromthecolorbarsothatitmatchestheribbonatthetopofthecard.
Asmalltriangleinthelowerrightcornerofabuttonisyourcluethatothertoolsareavailablebuthiddenunderthattool.
1.PositionthepointeroverthethirdtoolfromthetopintheToolspaneluntilthetooltipappears.ThetooltipidentifiestheLassotool( ),withthekeyboardshortcutL.SelecttheLassotool.
2.SelectthePolygonalLassotool( ),whichishiddenbehindtheLassotool,usingoneofthefollowingmethods:
•PressandholdthemousebuttonovertheLassotooltoopenthepop-uplistofhiddentools,andselectthePolygonalLassotool.
•Alt-click(Windows)orOption-click(MacOS)thetoolbuttonintheToolspaneltocyclethroughthehiddenlassotoolsuntilthePolygonalLassotoolisselected.
•PressShift+L,whichcyclesbetweentheLasso,PolygonalLasso,andMagneticLassotoolstools.
WiththeLassotool,youcandrawfree-formselections;thePolygonalLassotoolmakesiteasiertodrawstraight-edgedsectionsofaselectionborder.You’lllearnmoreaboutselectiontools,makingselections,andadjustingtheselectioncontentsinLesson3,“WorkingwithSelections.”
3.Movethepointerovertheleftedgeofthebluecolorbarthatyoujustpainted.Clickjusttotheleftoftheupperleftcornerofthebartostartyourselection.Youshouldbeginyourselectionjustoutsidethecoloredarea.
![Page 31: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
4.Movethecursortotherightabout1/4inch,andclickabouthalfwaybetweenthetopandbottomofthebar.You’recreatingthefirstsideofthetriangle.Itdoesn’tneedtobeperfect.
5.Clickjusttotheleftofthebottomleftcornerofthebartocreatethesecondsideofthetriangle.
6.Clickthepointwhereyoustartedtofinishthetriangle.
7.PresstheDeletekeyonyourkeyboardtodeletetheselectedareafromthecoloredbar,creatinganotchforyourribbon.
8.ChooseSelect>Deselecttodeselecttheareayoudeleted.
Theribbonisready.Nowyoucanaddanametoyourbirthdaycard.
SettingtoolpropertiesintheoptionsbarNextyou’llusetheoptionsbartoselectthetextpropertiesandthentotypethename.
1.IntheToolspanel,selecttheHorizontalTypetool( ).
ThebuttonsandmenusintheoptionsbarnowrelatetotheTypetool.
2.Intheoptionsbar,selectafontyoulikefromthefirstpop-upmenu.(WeusedMinionProItalic,butyoucanuseanotherfontifyouprefer.)
3.Specify32ptforthefontsize.
![Page 32: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
Youcanspecify32pointsbytypingdirectlyinthefont-sizetextboxandpressingEnterorReturn,orbyscrubbingthefont-sizemenulabel.Youcanalsochooseastandardfontsizefromthefont-sizepop-upmenu.
4.Clickonceanywhereontheleftsideofthecoloredbar,andtypeElaine.Oryoucantypeadifferentname,ifyoulike.Don’tworryifthetextisn’tpositionedwell;you’llcorrectthatlater.
Thetextisthesamecolorasthebaryoutypediton.You’llfixthatnext.
Tip
Youcanplacethepointeroverthelabelsofmostnumericsettingsinthetooloptionsbar,inpanels,andindialogboxesinPhotoshoptodisplaya“scrubbyslider.”Draggingthepointing-fingerslidertotherightincreasesthevalue;draggingtotheleftdecreasesthevalue.Alt-dragging(Windows)orOption-dragging(MacOS)changesthevaluesinsmallerincrements;Shift-draggingchangestheminlargerincrements.
![Page 33: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
UsingpanelsandpanelmenusThetextcoloristhesameastheForegroundColorswatchintheToolspanel,whichisthebluecoloryouusedtopaintthebar.You’llselectthetextandchooseanothercolorfromtheSwatchespanel.
1.MakesuretheHorizontalTypetool( )isselectedintheToolspanel.
2.DragtheHorizontalTypetoolacrossthetexttoselectthefullname.
3.ClicktheSwatchestabtobringthatpanelforward,ifit’snotalreadyvisible.
4.Selectanylight-coloredswatch.(Wechosepastelyellow.)
Note
Whenyoumovethepointerovertheswatches,ittemporarilychangesintoaneyedropper.Setthetipoftheeyedropperontheswatchyouwant,andclicktoselectit.
Thecoloryouselectappearsinthreeplaces:astheForegroundColorintheToolspanel,inthetextcolorswatchintheoptionsbar,andinthetextyouselectedintheimagewindow.
5.SelectanothertoolintheToolspanel,suchastheMovetool( ),todeselectthetextsothatyoucanseethetextcolor.
That’showeasyitistoselectacolor,althoughthereareothermethodsinPhotoshop.
![Page 34: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
However,you’lluseaspecificcolorforthisprojectsothatitmatchesthetextintheotherribbon.It’seasiertofinditifyouchangetheSwatchespaneldisplay.
6.Clickthemenubutton( )ontheSwatchespaneltoopenthepanelmenu,andchooseSmallList.
7.SelecttheTypetoolandreselectthetext,asyoudidinsteps1and2.
8.IntheSwatchespanel,scrollabouthalfwaydownthelisttofindtheLightYellowOrangeswatch,andthenselectit.
9.SelecttheMovetool( )againtodeselectthetext.
Nowthetextappearsintheorangecolor.
Note
Don’tselecttheMovetoolusingtheVkeyboardshortcut,becauseyou’reintext-entrymode.TypingVwilladdthelettertoyourtextintheimagewindow.
UndoingactionsinPhotoshopInaperfectworld,you’dnevermakeamistake.You’dneverclickthewrongobject.You’dalwayscorrectlyanticipatehowspecificactionswouldbringyourdesignideastolifeexactlyasyouimaginedthem.You’dneverhavetobacktrack.
Fortherealworld,Photoshopgivesyouthepowertostepbackandundoactionssothat
![Page 35: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
youcantryotheroptions.Youcanexperimentfreely,knowingthatyoucanreversetheprocess.
Note
TheUndocommandisn’tavailableifyou’vealreadysavedyourchanges.However,youcanstillusetheStepBackwardcommandandtheHistorypanel(coveredinLesson9),aslongasyouhaven’tclosedtheprojectsinceyoumadethechanges.
EvenbeginningcomputerusersquicklycometoappreciatethefamiliarUndocommand.You’lluseittomovebackonestep,andthenstepfurtherbackward.Inthiscase,you’llgobacktothelightcolorthatyouoriginallychoseforthename.
1.ChooseEdit>UndoEditTypeLayer,orpressCtrl+Z(Windows)orCommand+Z(MacOS)toundoyourlastaction.
Thenamereturnstoitspreviouscolor.
2.ChooseEdit>RedoEditTypeLayer,orpressCtrl+Z(Windows)orCommand+Z(MacOS)toreapplytheorangecolortothename.
TheUndocommandinPhotoshopreversesonlyonestep.Thisisapracticality,becausePhotoshopfilescanbeverylarge,andmaintainingmultipleUndostepscantieupalotofmemory,whichtendstodegradeperformance.IfyoupressCtrl+ZorCommand+Zagain,Photoshoprestoresthestepyouremovedinitially.
However,youcanoftenusetheStepBackwardandStepForwardcommands(intheEditmenu)tomovethroughmultiplesteps.
3.Oncethenameisbacktothecoloryou’dlikeittobe,usetheMovetooltodragthenamesoit’scenteredinthebluebar.
4.Savethefile.Yourbirthdaycardisdone!
![Page 36: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
MoreaboutpanelsandpanellocationsPhotoshoppanelsarepowerfulandvaried.Rarelywouldyouneedtoseeallpanelssimultaneously.That’swhythey’reinpanelgroups,andwhythedefaultconfigurationsleavemanypanelsunopened.
ThecompletelistofpanelsappearsintheWindowmenu.Checkmarksappearnexttothenamesofthepanelsthatareopenandactiveintheirpanelgroups.YoucanopenaclosedpanelorcloseanopenonebyselectingthepanelnameintheWindowmenu.
Youcanhideallpanelsatonce—includingtheoptionsbarandToolspanel—bypressingtheTabkey.Toreopenthem,pressTabagain.
Note
Whenpanelsarehidden,athin,semitransparentstripisvisibleattheedgeofthedocument.Hoveringthepointeroverthestripdisplaysitscontents.
YoualreadyusedpanelsinthepaneldockwhenyouusedtheLayersandSwatchespanels.Youcandragpanelstoorfromthepaneldock.Thisisconvenientforbulkypanelsoronesthatyouuseonlyoccasionallybutwanttokeephandy.
Youcanarrangepanelsinotherways,aswell:
•Tomoveanentirepanelgroup,dragthetitlebartoanotherlocationintheworkarea.
•Tomoveapaneltoanothergroup,dragthepaneltabintothatpanelgroupsothatabluehighlightappearsinsidethegroup,andthenreleasethemousebutton.
![Page 37: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
•Todockapanelorpanelgroup,dragthetitlebarorpaneltabontothetopofthedock.
•Toundockapanelorpanelgroupsothatitbecomesafloatingpanelorpanelgroup,dragitstitlebarorpaneltabawayfromthedock.
ExpandingandcollapsingpanelsYoucanresizepanelstousescreenspacemoreefficientlyandtoseefewerormorepaneloptions,eitherbydraggingorclickingtotogglebetweenpresetsizes:
•Tocollapseopenpanelstoicons,clickthedoublearrowinthetitlebarofthedockorpanelgroup.Toexpandapanel,clickitsiconorthedoublearrow.
![Page 38: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
•Tochangetheheightofapanel,dragitslowerrightcorner.
•Tochangethewidthofthedock,positionthepointerontheleftedgeofthedockuntilitbecomesadouble-headedarrow,andthendragtothelefttowidenthedock,ortotherighttonarrowit.
•Toresizeafloatingpanel,movethepointerovertheright,left,orbottomedgeofthepaneluntilitbecomesadouble-headedarrow,andthendragtheedgeinorout.Youcanalsopullthelowerrightcornerinorout.
Note
Youcancollapse,butnotresize,theCharacterandParagraphpanels.
•Tocollapseapanelgroupsothatonlythedockheaderbarandtabsarevisible,double-clickapaneltaborpaneltitlebar.Double-clickagaintorestoreittotheexpandedview.Youcanopenthepanelmenuevenwhenthepaneliscollapsed.
Noticethatthetabsforthepanelsinthepanelgroupandthebuttonforthepanelmenuremainvisibleafteryoucollapseapanel.
SpecialnotesabouttheToolspanelandoptionsbarTheToolspanelandtheoptionsbarsharesomecharacteristicswithotherpanels:
![Page 39: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
•YoucandragtheToolspanelbyitstitlebartoadifferentlocationintheworkarea.Youcanmovetheoptionsbartoanotherlocationbydraggingthegrabbaratthefarleftendofthepanel.
•YoucanhidetheToolspanelandoptionsbar.
However,somepanelfeaturesarenotavailableordon’tapplytotheToolspaneloroptionsbar:
•YoucannotgrouptheToolspaneloroptionsbarwithotherpanels.
•YoucannotresizetheToolspaneloroptionsbar.
•YoucannotstacktheToolspaneloroptionsbarinthepaneldock.
•TheToolspanelandoptionsbardonothavepanelmenus.
FindingresourcesforusingPhotoshopThefollowingresourcescanhelpyoutakeyourexplorationsevenfurther,answerquestionsyouhave,andhelpyouresolveanyissuesyouencounterasyouworkonyourownprojects:
AdobePhotoshopHelpandSupport:https://helpx.adobe.com/photoshop.htmliswhereyoucanfindandbrowseHelpandSupportcontentonAdobe.com.
AdobeCreativeCloudLearn&Support:https://helpx.adobe.com/support.htmlprovidesinspiration,keytechniques,cross-productworkflows,andupdatesonnewfeatures.
AdobeForums:https://forums.adobe.com/welcomeletsyoutapintopeer-to-peerdiscussions,questions,andanswersonAdobeproducts.
Changinginterfacesettings
Bydefault,thepanels,dialogboxes,andbackgroundinPhotoshoparedark.YoucanlightentheinterfaceormakeotherchangesinthePhotoshopPreferencesdialogbox:
1.ChooseEdit>Preferences>Interface(Windows)orPhotoshopCC>Preferences>Interface(MacOS).
2.Selectadifferentcolortheme,ormakeotherchanges.
Whenyouselectadifferenttheme,youcanseethechangesimmediately.Youcanalsoselectspecificcolorsfordifferentscreenmodesandchangeotherinterfacesettingsinthisdialogbox.
![Page 40: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
3.Whenyou’resatisfiedwiththechanges,clickOK.
Reviewquestions1.DescribetwotypesofimagesyoucanopeninPhotoshop.
2.HowdoyouselecttoolsinPhotoshop?
3.Describetwowaystozoomintooroutfromanimage.
4.WhataretwowaystogetmoreinformationaboutPhotoshop?
Reviewanswers1.Youcanscanaphotograph,transparency,negative,orgraphicintotheprogram;captureadigitalvideoimage;orimportartworkcreatedinadrawingprogram.Youcanalsoimportdigitalphotos.
2.ToselectatoolinPhotoshop,clickitsiconintheToolspanel,orpressthetool’skeyboardshortcut.Aselectedtoolremainsactiveuntilyouselectadifferenttool.Toselectahiddentool,eitheruseakeyboardshortcuttotogglethroughthetools,orclickandholdthetoolintheToolspaneltoopenapop-upmenuofthehiddentools.
![Page 41: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
3.ChoosecommandsfromtheViewmenutozoominonoroutfromanimage,ortofititonscreen,orusethezoomtoolsandclickordragoveranimagetoenlargeorreducetheview.YoucanalsousekeyboardshortcutsortheNavigatorpaneltocontrolthedisplayofanimage.
4.ThePhotoshopHelpsystemincludesfullinformationaboutPhotoshopfeaturespluskeyboardshortcuts,task-basedtopics,andillustrations.CreativeCloudLearnprovidesinspiration,keytechniques,cross-productworkflows,andupdatesonnewfeatures.
![Page 42: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
2.BasicPhotoCorrections
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Understandimageresolutionandsize.
•ViewandaccessfilesinAdobeBridge.
•Straightenandcropanimage.
•Adjustthetonalrangeofanimage.
•UsetheSpotHealingBrushtooltorepairpartofanimage.
•Usethecontent-awarePatchtooltoremoveorreplaceobjects.
•UsetheCloneStamptooltotouchupareas.
•Removedigitalartifactsfromanimage.
•ApplytheSmartSharpenfiltertofinishretouchingphotos.
Thislessonwilltakeaboutanhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson02projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 43: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
PROJECT:VINTAGEPHOTOGRAPHRESTORATION
Photoshopincludesavarietyoftoolsandcommandsforimprovingthequalityofaphotographicimage.Thislessonstepsyouthroughtheprocessofacquiring,resizing,
andretouchingavintagephotograph.
StrategyforretouchingHowmuchretouchingyoudodependsontheimageyou’reworkingonandyourgoalsforit.Formanyimages,youmayneedonlytochangetheresolution,lightentheimage,orrepairaminorblemish.Forothers,youmayneedtoperformseveraltasksandemploymoreadvancedfilters.
Note
Inthislesson,youretouchanimageusingonlyPhotoshop.Forotherimages,itmaybemoreefficienttoworkinAdobeCameraRaw,whichisinstalledwithPhotoshop.You’lllearnaboutthetoolsCameraRawhastoofferinLesson12,“WorkingwithCameraRaw.”
![Page 44: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
OrganizinganefficientsequenceoftasksMostretouchingproceduresfollowthesegeneralsteps,thoughnoteverytaskmaybenecessaryforallprojects:
•Duplicatingtheoriginalimageorscan;workinginacopyoftheimagefilemakesiteasytorecovertheoriginallaterifnecessary
•Ensuringthattheresolutionisappropriateforthewayyou’llusetheimage
•Croppingtheimagetoitsfinalsizeandorientation
•Removinganycolorcasts
•Adjustingtheoverallcontrastortonalrangeoftheimage
•Repairingflawsinscansofdamagedphotographs(suchasrips,dust,orstains)
•Adjustingthecolorandtoneinspecificpartsoftheimagetobringouthighlights,midtones,shadows,anddesaturatedcolors
•Sharpeningtheoverallfocusoftheimage
Theorderofthetasksmayvarydependingontheproject,thoughyoushouldalwaysstartbyduplicatingtheimageandadjustingitsresolution.Likewise,sharpeningshouldusuallybeyourfinalstep.Fortheothertasks,consideryourprojectandplanaccordingly,sothattheresultsofoneprocessdonotcauseunintendedchangestootheraspectsoftheimage,makingitnecessaryforyoutoredosomeofyourwork.
AdjustingyourprocessfordifferentintendedusesTheretouchingtechniquesyouapplytoanimagedependinpartonhowyou’llusetheimage.Whetheranimageisintendedforblack-and-whitepublicationonnewsprintorforfull-coloronlinedistributionaffectseverythingfromtheresolutionoftheinitialscantothetypeoftonalrangeandcolorcorrectionthattheimagerequires.PhotoshopsupportstheCMYKcolormodeforpreparinganimagetobeprintedusingprocesscolors,aswellasRGBandothercolormodesforwebandmobileauthoring.
ResolutionandimagesizeThefirststepinretouchingaphotographinPhotoshopistomakesurethattheimagehasanappropriateresolution.Thetermresolutionreferstothenumberofsmallsquares,knownaspixels,thatdescribeanimageandestablishitsdetail.Resolutionisdeterminedbypixeldimensions,orthenumberofpixelsalongthewidthandheightofanimage.
![Page 45: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
Pixelsinaphotographicimage
Note
Todeterminethenecessaryimageresolutionforaphotographyouplantoprint,followthecomputer-graphicsruleofthumbforcolororgrayscaleimagesintendedforprintonlargecommercialprinters:Scanataresolution1.5to2timesthescreenfrequencyusedbytheprinter.Forexample,iftheimagewillbeprintedusingascreenfrequencyof133lpi,scantheimageat200ppi(133×1.5).
Incomputergraphics,therearedifferenttypesofresolution:
Thenumberofpixelsperunitoflengthinanimageiscalledtheimageresolution,usuallymeasuredinpixelsperinch(ppi).Animagewithahighresolutionhasmorepixels(andthereforealargerfilesize)thananimageofthesamedimensionswithalowresolution.ImagesinPhotoshopcanvaryfromhighresolution(300ppiorhigher)tolowresolution(72ppior96ppi).
Note
It’simportanttounderstandwhat“100%view”meanswhenyouworkonscreen.At100%,oneimagepixel=onemonitorpixel.Unlesstheresolutionofyourimageisexactlythesameastheresolutionofthemonitor,theimagesize(ininches,forexample)onscreenmaybelargerorsmallerthantheimagesizewillbewhenprinted.
Thenumberofpixelsperunitoflengthonamonitoristhemonitorresolution,alsousuallymeasuredinpixelsperinch(ppi).Imagepixelsaretranslateddirectlyintomonitorpixels.InPhotoshop,iftheimageresolutionishigherthanthemonitorresolution,theimageappearslargeronscreenthanitsspecifiedprintdimensions.Forexample,whenyoudisplaya1×1-inch,144-ppiimageona72-ppimonitor,theimagefillsa2×2-inchareaofthescreen.
![Page 46: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
Thenumberofinkdotsperinch(dpi)producedbyaplatesetterorlaserprinteristheprinter,oroutput,resolution.Higherresolutionimagesoutputtohigherresolutionprintersgenerallyproducethebestquality.Theappropriateresolutionforaprintedimageisdeterminedbothbytheprinterresolutionandbythescreenfrequency,orlinesperinch(lpi),ofthehalftonescreensusedtoreproduceimages.
Keepinmindthatthehighertheimageresolution,thelargerthefilesize,andthelongerthefilewilltaketoprintortodownloadfromtheweb.
Formoreinformationonresolutionandimagesize,seePhotoshopHelp.
OpeningafilewithAdobeBridgeInthisbook,you’llworkwithdifferentstartfilesineachlesson.Youmaymakecopiesofthesefilesandsavethemunderdifferentnamesorlocations,oryoumayworkfromtheoriginalstartfilesandthendownloadthemfromthepeachpit.comwebsiteagainifyouwantafreshstart.
Inthislesson,you’llretouchascanofadamagedanddiscoloredvintagephotographsoitcanbesharedorprinted.Thefinalimagesizewillbe7×7inches.
InLesson1,youusedtheOpencommandtoopenafile.You’llstartthislessonbycomparingtheoriginalscantothefinishedimageinAdobeBridge,avisualfilebrowserthathelpstaketheguessworkoutoffindingtheimagefilethatyouneed.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)toresetthedefaultsettings.
Note
IfBridgeisn’tinstalled,you’llneedtoinstallitfromAdobeCreativeCloud.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
2.Whenprompted,clickYestoconfirmthatyouwanttodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
![Page 47: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.Ifyou’repromptedtoenablethePhotoshopextensioninBridge,clickOK.
AdobeBridgeopens,displayingacollectionofpanels,menus,andbuttons.
4.SelecttheFolderstabintheupperleftcorner,andthenbrowsetotheLessonsfolderyoudownloadedontoyourharddisk,sothatthelesssonsintheLessonsfolderappearintheContentpanel.
5.WiththeLessonsfolderstillselectedintheFolderspanel,chooseFile>AddToFavorites.
Addingfiles,folders,applicationicons,andotherassetsthatyouuseoftentotheFavoritespanelletsyouaccessthemquickly.
6.SelecttheFavoritestabtoopenthepanel,andclicktheLessonsfoldertoopenit.Then,intheContentpanel,double-clicktheLesson02folder.
ThumbnailpreviewsofthefoldercontentsappearintheContentpanel.
7.Comparethe02Start.tifand02End.psdfiles.ToenlargethethumbnailsintheContentpanel,dragthethumbnailslideratthebottomoftheBridgewindowtotheright.
Inthe02Start.tiffile,noticethattheimageiscrooked,thecolorsarerelativelydull,andtheimagehasagreencolorcastandadistractingcrease.You’llfixalloftheseproblemsinthislesson,andafewothers.You’llstartbycroppingandstraighteningtheimage.
8.Double-clickthe02Start.tifthumbnailtoopenthefileinPhotoshop.ClickOKifyouseetheEmbeddedProfileMismatchdialogbox.
9.InPhotoshop,chooseFile>SaveAs.ChoosePhotoshopfromtheFormatmenu,andnamethefile02Working.psd.ThenclickSave.
![Page 48: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
StraighteningandcroppingtheimageinPhotoshopYou’llusetheCroptooltostraighten,trim,andscalethephotograph.YoucanuseeithertheCroptoolortheCropcommandtocropanimage.Bydefault,croppingdeletesthecroppedpixels.
1.IntheToolspanel,selecttheCroptool( ).
Tip
DeselecttheDeleteCroppedPixelsoptionifyouwanttocropnondestructively,sothatyoucanrevisethecroplater.
Crophandlesappear,andacroppingshieldcoverstheareaoutsidethecroppingselection.
2.Intheoptionsbar,chooseWxHxResolutionfromthePresetAspectRatiomenu.(Ratioisthedefaultvalue.)
3.Intheoptionsbar,type7inforthewidth,7infortheheight,and200px/infortheresolution.Acropgridappears.
First,you’llstraightentheimage.
![Page 49: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
4.ClickStraightenintheoptionsbar.ThepointerchangestotheStraightentool.
5.Clickatthetopcornerofthephoto,pressthemousebuttonasyoudragastraightlineacrossthetopedgeofthephoto,andthenrelease.
Photoshopstraightenstheimage,sothatthelineyoudrewisparallelwiththetopoftheimagearea.Youdrewalineacrossthetopofthephoto,butanylinethatdefineseithertheverticalorhorizontalaxisoftheimagewillwork.
Now,you’lltrimthewhiteborderandscaletheimage.
6.Dragthecornersofthecropgridinwardtothecornersofthephotoitselftocropoutthewhiteborder.Ifyouneedtoadjustthepositionofthephoto,clickanddragitwithinthecropgrid.
Tip
YoucanchooseImage>Trimtodiscardaborderareaaroundtheedgeoftheimage,basedontransparencyoredgecolor.
7.PressEnterorReturntoacceptthecrop.
Theimageisnowcropped,andthecroppedimagefillstheimagewindow,straightened,sized,andpositionedaccordingtoyourspecifications.
![Page 50: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
Tip
Toquicklystraightenaphotoandcropoutthescannedbackground,chooseFile>Automate>CropAndStraightenPhotos.
8.Toseetheimagedimensions,chooseDocumentDimensionsfromthepop-upmenuatthebottomoftheapplicationwindow.
9.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourwork.ClickOKifyouseethePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
AdjustingthecolorandtoneYou’lluseCurvesandLevelsadjustmentlayerstoremovethecolorcastandadjustthecolorandtoneintheimage.Don’tlettheCurvesorLevelsoptionsintimidateyou.You’llworkwiththemmoreinlaterlessons;fornow,you’lltakeadvantageoftheirtoolstoquicklybrightenandadjustthetoneoftheimage.
1.ClickCurvesintheAdjustmentspaneltoaddaCurvesadjustmentlayer.
2.SelecttheWhitePointtoolontheleftsideofthePropertiespanel.
Specifyingawhitepointchangesallthecolorsintheimage.ThewhitepointisthecolorthatPhotoshopdefinesaspurewhite,anditadjustsallothercolorsaccordingly.Tosetanaccuratewhitepoint,selectawhiteareaintheimage.
3.Clickawhitestripeonthegirl’sdress.
![Page 51: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
Thecolortoneoftheimagechangesdramatically.Youcanclickdifferentwhiteareas,suchasthechild’ssailordress,astripeonthewoman’sdress,orthegirl’ssock,toseehoweachselectionchangesthecolor.
Insomeimages,adjustingthewhitepointisenoughtoremoveacolorcastandcorrectthetoneoftheimage.Here,selectingawhitepointisagoodstart.You’lluseaLevelsadjustmentlayertofine-tunethetone.
4.ClickLevelsintheAdjustmentspaneltoaddaLevelsadjustmentlayer.
TheLevelshistograminthePropertiespaneldisplaystherangeofdarkandlightvaluesintheimage.You’lllearnmoreaboutworkingwithlevelsinlaterlessons.Rightnow,youjustneedtoknowthatthelefttrianglerepresentstheblackpoint(thepointPhotoshopdefinesasthedarkestintheimage),therighttrianglerepresentsthewhitepoint(thelightestintheimage),andthemiddletrianglerepresentsthemidtones.
5.Dragthelefttriangle(blacks)underthehistogramtotheright,wheretheblacksaremorepronounced.Ourvaluewas15.
6.Dragthemiddletrianglealittletotherighttoadjustthemidtones.Ourvaluewas.90.
Nowthatyou’veadjustedthecolor,you’llflattentheimagesoit’seasiertoworkwithwhileyoutouchitup.Flatteninganimagemergesitslayers.Afteryouflattenanimage,youcannolongereditlayersindividually,butthefileissmaller,andyoucaneasilymakechangestotheentireimageatonce.
7.ChooseLayer>FlattenImage.
![Page 52: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
TheadjustmentlayersmergewiththeBackgroundlayer.
Real-worldphotorestoration
AsownerofGawainWeaverArtConservation,GawainWeaverhasconservedandrestoredoriginalworksbyartistsrangingfromEadwardMuybridgetoManRay,andfromAnselAdamstoCindySherman.Heteachesworkshopsinternationallyaswellasonlineonthecareandidentificationofphotographs.
Findoutmoreatgawainweaver.com.
ThetoolsinPhotoshopmakerestorationofoldordamagedphotographsseemlikemagic,givingvirtuallyanyonethepowertoscan,retouch,print,andframetheirphotocollections.
However,whendealingwithworksbyfamousartists,museums,galleries,andcollectorsneedtopreserveoriginalobjectstothegreatestdegreepossibledespitedeteriorationoraccidentaldamage.Professionalartconservatorsarecalledupontocleandustandsoilingfromprintsurfaces,removediscolorationandstaining,repairtears,stabilizeprintstopreventfuturedamage,andevenpaintinmissingareasofawork.
![Page 53: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
CarletonE.Watkins,NevadaFall,700FT,YosemiteValley,CA,mammothalbumenprint,15 ”×20¾”.Thisprintwasremovedfromitsmounttoremovethe
stainsandthenremounted.
“Photographconservationisbothascienceandanart,”saysWeaver.“Wemustapplywhatweknowaboutthechemistryofthephotograph,itsmount,andanyvarnishesorothercoatingsinordertosafelyclean,preserve,andenhancetheimage.Sincewecannotquickly‘undo’astepinaconservationtreatment,wemustalwaysproceedwithgreatcautionandahealthyrespectforthefragilityofthephotographicobjectwhetherit’sa160-year-oldsaltprintofNotreDameorgelatinsilverprintofHalfDomefromthe1970s.”
ManyofthemanualtoolsofanartconservatorhaveanalogousdigitalversionsinPhotoshop:
Anartconservatormightwashaphotographtoremovethediscoloredcomponentsofthepaper,orevenuseamildbleachingprocessknownaslight-bleachingtooxidizeandremovethecoloredcomponentsofastainoroveralldiscoloration.InPhotoshop,youcanuseaCurvesadjustmentlayertoremovethecolorcastfromanimage.
Aconservatorworkingonafine-artphotographmightusespecialpaintsandfinebrushestomanually“in-paint”damagedareasofaphotograph.Likewise,youcanusetheSpotHealingBrushinPhotoshoptospotoutspecksofdustordirtonascannedimage.
AconservatormightuseJapanesepapersandwheat-starchpastetocarefullyrepairandrebuildtornpaperbeforefinalizingtherepairwith
![Page 54: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
someskillfulin-painting.InPhotoshop,youcanremoveacreaseorrepairatearinascannedimagewithafewclicksoftheClonetool.
Afixativewasappliedtotheartist’ssignaturewithasmallbrushtoprotectitwhenthemountwaswashed.
“Althoughourworkhasalwaysbeenfirstandforemostaboutthepreservationandrestorationoftheoriginalphotographicobject,thereareinstances,especiallywithfamilyphotographs,wheretheuseofPhotoshopismoreappropriate,”saysWeaver.“Moredramaticresultscanbeachievedinfarlesstime.Afterdigitizationtheoriginalprintcanbesafelystoredaway,whilethedigitalversioncanbecopiedorprintedformanyfamilymembers.Often,wefirstcleanorunfoldfamilyphotographstosafelyrevealasmuchoftheoriginalimageaspossible,andthenwerepairtheremainingdiscoloration,stains,andtearsonthecomputerafterdigitization.”
UsingtheSpotHealingBrushtoolThenexttaskistoremovethecreaseinthephoto.You’llusetheSpotHealingBrushtoerasethecrease.Whileyou’reatit,you’lluseittoaddressafewotherissues.
Note
TheHealingBrushtoolworkssimilarlytotheSpotHealingBrushtool,exceptthatitrequiresyoutosamplesourcepixelsbeforeretouchinganarea.
![Page 55: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
TheSpotHealingBrushtoolquicklyremovesblemishesandotherimperfections.Itsamplespixelsaroundtheretouchedareaandmatchesthetexture,lighting,transparency,andshadingofthesampledpixelstothepixelsbeinghealed.
TheSpotHealingBrushisexcellentforretouchingblemishesinportraits,butalsoworksnicelywhereverthere’sauniformappearanceneartheareasyouwanttoretouch.
1.Zoomintoseethecreaseclearly.
2.IntheToolspanel,selecttheSpotHealingBrushtool( ).
3.Intheoptionsbar,opentheBrushpop-uppanel,andspecifya100%hardbrushabout25pxindiameter.MakesureContent-Awareisselectedintheoptionsbar.
4.Intheimagewindow,dragtheSpotHealingBrushdownfromthetopofthecrease.Youcanprobablyrepairtheentirecreasewithfourtosixneatdownwardstrokes.Asyoudrag,thestrokeatfirstappearsblack,butwhenyoureleasethemouse,thepaintedareais“healed.”
5.Zoomintoseethewhitehairintheupperrightareaoftheimage.ThenselecttheSpotHealingBrushagain,andpaintoverthehair.
6.Zoomout,ifnecessary,toseethefullsky.ThenclicktheSpotHealingBrushwherevertherearedarkareasyouwanttoheal.
7.Saveyourworksofar.
![Page 56: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
Applyingacontent-awarepatchUsethePatchtooltoremoveunwantedelementsfromanimage.You’lluseacontent-awarepatchtoremoveanunrelatedpersonfromtherightsideofthephoto.InContent-Awaremode,thePatchtoolcreatesnearlyseamlessblendingwiththenearbycontent.
1.IntheToolspanel,selectthePatchtool( ),hiddenbeneaththeSpotHealingBrushtool( ).
2.Intheoptionsbar,chooseContent-AwarefromthePatchmenu,andmakesurethatSampleAllLayersisselected.Type4intotheStructureslider.
TheStructuremenudetermineshowcloselythepatchreflectstheexistingimagepatterns.Youcanchoosefrom1to7,with1allowingtheloosestadherencetothesourcestructureand7requiringthestrictest.
3.DragthePatchtoolaroundtheboyandhisshadow,ascloselyaspossible.Youmaywanttozoomintoseehimmoreclearly.
4.Clickwithintheareayou’vejustselected,anddragittotheleft.Photoshopdisplaysapreviewofthecontentthatwillreplacetheboy.Keepdraggingtotheleftuntilthepreviewareanolongeroverlapstheareaoccupiedbytheboy,butwithoutoverlappingthewomanorthegirlshe’sholding.Releasethemousebuttonwhenthepatchispositionedwhereyouwantit.
Theselectionchangestomatchtheareaaroundit.Theboyisgone,andwherehestoodisasectionofthebridgewallandofabuilding.
5.ChooseSelect>Deselect.
Theeffectwasprettyimpressive,butnotquiteperfect.You’lltouchuptheresultsnext.
![Page 57: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
RepairingareaswiththeCloneStamptoolTheCloneStamptoolusespixelsfromoneareaofanimagetoreplacethepixelsinanotherpartoftheimage.Usingthistool,youcannotonlyremoveunwantedobjectsfromyourimages,butyoucanalsofillinmissingareasinphotographsyouscanfromdamagedoriginals.
You’llusetheCloneStamptooltosmoothoutsomeirregularitiesintheheightofthebridgewallandthewindowsonthebuilding.
1.SelecttheCloneStamptool( )intheToolspanel,andselecta60pxbrushwith30%hardness.MakesurethattheAlignedoptionisselected.
2.MovetheCloneStamptooltoanareawherethetopofthebridgewallissmooth.That’stheareayouwanttocopytosmoothouttheareathatwaspatched.
3.Alt-click(Windows)orOption-click(MacOS)tostartsamplingthatpartoftheimage.(WhenyoupressAltorOption,thepointerappearsastargetcross-hairs.)
4.DragtheCloneStamptoolacrossthetopofthebridgewallinthepatchedareatoevenitout,andthenreleasethemousebutton.
EachtimeyouclicktheCloneStamptool,itbeginsagainwithanewsourcepoint,inthesamerelationshiptothetoolasthefirststrokeyoumade.Thatis,ifyoubeginpaintingfurtherright,itsamplesfromstonethatisfurtherrightthantheoriginalsourcepoint.That’sbecauseAlignedisselectedintheoptionsbar.DeselectAlignedifyouwanttostartfromthesamesourcepointeachtime.
5.Selectasourcepointwherethebottomofthebridgewalliseven,andthendragtheCloneStamptoolacrossthebottomofthewallwhereyoupatchedit.
![Page 58: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
6.Selectasmallerbrushsize,anddeselectAligned.Thenselectasourcepointovertherightmostwindowsinthelowestrowonthebuildingyoupatched.Clickacrosstocreateaccuratewindowsthere.
7.Repeatstep6tomakeanyadjustmentsyouwanttoapplytothelowestareaofthebuildingandthewallthatrunsinfrontofit.
8.Ifyoulike,youcanuseasmallerbrushsizetotouchupthestonesinthepatchedportionofthewall.
9.Saveyourwork.
![Page 59: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
SharpeningtheimageThelasttaskyoumightwanttodowhenretouchingaphotoistosharpentheimage.ThereareseveralwaystosharpenanimageinPhotoshop,buttheSmartSharpenfiltergivesyouthemostcontrol.Becausesharpeningcanemphasizeartifacts,you’llremovethosefirst.
1.Zoomintoabout400%toseetheboy’sshirtclearly.Thecoloreddotsyouseeareartifactsofthescanningprocess.
2.ChooseFilter>Noise>Dust&Scratches.
3.IntheDust&Scratchesdialogbox,leavethedefaultsettingswithaRadiusof1pixelandThresholdat0,andclickOK.
TheThresholdvaluedetermineshowdissimilarthepixelsshouldbebeforetheyareeliminated.TheRadiusvaluedeterminesthesizeoftheareasearchedfordissimilarpixels.Thedefaultvaluesaregreatfortinydotsofcolorliketheonesinthisimage.
Nowthattheartifactsaregone,youcansharpentheimage.
4.ChooseFilter>Sharpen>SmartSharpen.
5.IntheSmartSharpendialogbox,makesurethatPreviewisselected,soyoucanseetheeffectofsettingsyouadjustintheimagewindow.
Youcandraginsidethepreviewwindowinthedialogboxtoseedifferentpartsoftheimage,orusetheplusandminusbuttonsbelowthethumbnailtozoominandout.
6.MakesureLensBlurischosenintheRemovemenu.
YoucanchoosetoremoveLensBlur,GaussianBlur,orMotionBlurintheSmartSharpendialogbox.LensBlurprovidesfinersharpeningofdetailandreducedsharpeninghalos.GaussianBlurincreasescontrastalongtheedgesinanimage.MotionBlurreducestheeffectsofblurthatresultedfromthecameraorthesubjectmovingwhenthephotowastaken.
7.DragtheAmountslidertoabout60%tosharpentheimage.
![Page 60: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
8.DragtheRadiusslidertoabout1.5.
TheRadiusvaluedeterminesthenumberofpixelssurroundingtheedgepixelsthataffectthesharpening.Thehighertheresolution,thehighertheRadiussettingshouldusuallybe.
9.Whenyou’resatisfiedwiththeresults,clickOKtoapplytheSmartSharpenfilter.
10.ChooseFile>Save,andthenclosetheprojectfile.
Yourimageisreadytoshareorprint!
Extracredit
Convertingacolorimagetoblackandwhite
Youcangetgreatresultsconvertingacolorimagetoblackandwhite(withorwithoutatint)inPhotoshop.
1.ChooseFile>Open,andnavigatetothebike.tiffileintheLesson02folder.ClickOpen.
2.IntheAdjustmentspanel,clicktheBlack&WhitebuttontoaddaBlack&Whiteadjustmentlayer.
![Page 61: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
3.Adjustthecolorsliderstochangethesaturationofcolorchannels.Youcanalsoexperimentwithoptionsfromthepresetmenu,suchasDarkerorInfrared.Or,selectthetoolintheupperleftcorneroftheAdjustmentspanel,positionitoveranareayouwanttoadjust,anddraghorizontallytolightenordarkenthatcolorwhereveritappearsintheimage.(Wedarkenedthebikeitselfandmadethebackgroundareaslighter.)
4.Ifyouwanttocolorizetheentirephotowithasinglehue,selectTint.Then,clickthecolorswatchandselectatintcolor(weusedR=227,G=209,B=198).
Reviewquestions1.Whatdoesresolutionmean?
2.WhatdoestheCroptooldo?
3.HowcanyouadjustthetoneandcolorofanimageinPhotoshop?
4.Whattoolscanyouusetoremoveblemishesinanimage?
5.Howcanyouremovedigitalartifactssuchascoloredpixelsfromanimage?
Reviewanswers1.Thetermresolutionreferstothenumberofpixelsthatdescribeanimageandestablishitsdetail.Imageresolutionandmonitorresolutionaremeasuredinpixelsperinch(ppi).Printer,oroutput,resolutionismeasuredininkdotsperinch(dpi).
2.YoucanusetheCroptooltotrim,scale,orstraightenanimage.
3.ToadjustthetoneandcolorofanimageinPhotoshop,firstusetheWhitePointtoolinaCurvesadjustmentlayer.ThenrefinethetoneusingaLevelsadjustmentlayer.
4.TheHealingBrush,SpotHealingBrush,Patchtool,andCloneStamptoolsletyoureplaceunwantedportionsofanimagewithotherareasoftheimage.TheCloneStamptoolcopiesthesourceareaexactly;theHealingBrushandSpotHealingBrushtoolsblendtheareawiththesurroundingpixels.TheSpotHealingBrushtooldoesn’trequireasourceareaatall;it“heals”areastomatchthesurroundingpixels.
![Page 62: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
InContent-Awaremode,thePatchtoolreplacesaselectionwithcontentthatmatchesthesurroundingarea.
5.TheDust&Scratchesfilterremovesdigitalartifactsfromanimage.
![Page 63: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
3.WorkingwithSelections
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Makespecificareasofanimageactiveusingselectiontools.
•Repositionaselectionmarquee.
•Moveandduplicatethecontentsofaselection.
•Usekeyboard-mousecombinationsthatsavetimeandhandmotions.
•Deselectaselection.
•Constrainthemovementofaselectedarea.
•Adjustthepositionofaselectedareausingthearrowkeys.
•Addtoandsubtractfromaselection.
•Rotateaselection.
•Usemultipleselectiontoolstomakeacomplexselection.
Thislessonwilltakeaboutanhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson03projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 64: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
PROJECT:SHADOWBOXCOLLAGE
Learninghowtoselectareasofanimageisofprimaryimportance—youmustfirstselectwhatyouwanttoaffect.Onceyou’vemadeaselection,onlytheareawithinthe
selectioncanbeedited.
AboutselectingandselectiontoolsMakingchangestoanareawithinanimageinPhotoshopisatwo-stepprocess.Youfirstuseoneoftheselectiontoolstoselectthepartofanimageyouwanttochange.Thenyouuseanothertool,filter,orotherfeaturetomakechanges,suchasmovingtheselectedpixelstoanotherlocationorapplyingafiltertotheselectedarea.Youcanmakeselectionsbasedonsize,shape,andcolor.Whenaselectionisactive,changesyoumakeapplyonlytotheselectedarea;otherareasareunaffected.
Note
You’lllearnhowtoselectvectorareasusingthepentoolsinLesson8,“VectorDrawingTechniques.”
Thebestselectiontoolforaspecificareaoftendependsonthecharacteristicsofthatarea,suchasshapeorcolor.Therearefourprimarytypesofselections:
GeometricselectionsTheRectangularMarqueetool( )selectsarectangularareainanimage.TheEllipticalMarqueetool( ),whichishiddenbehindtheRectangularMarqueetool,selectsellipticalareas.TheSingleRowMarqueetool( )andSingleColumnMarqueetool( )selecteithera1-pixel-highrowora1-pixel-widecolumn,respectively.
![Page 65: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
FreehandselectionsTheLassotool( )tracesafreehandselectionaroundanarea.ThePolygonalLassotool( )setsanchorpointsinstraight-linesegmentsaroundanarea.TheMagneticLassotool( )workssomethinglikeacombinationoftheothertwolassotools,andgivesthebestresultswhengoodcontrastexistsbetweentheareayouwanttoselectanditssurroundings.
Edge-basedselectionsTheQuickSelectiontool( )quickly“paints”aselectionbyautomaticallyfindingandfollowingdefinededgesintheimage.
Color-basedselectionsTheMagicWandtool( )selectspartsofanimagebasedonthesimilarityinpixelcolor.Itisusefulforselectingodd-shapedareasthatshareaspecificrangeofcolors.
GettingstartedFirst,you’lllookattheimageyouwillcreateasyouexploretheselectiontoolsinPhotoshop.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestoconfirmthatyouwanttodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
4.IntheFavoritespanel,clicktheLessonsfolder.Thendouble-clicktheLesson03folderintheContentpaneltoseeitscontents.
Note
IfBridgeisn’tinstalled,you’llbepromptedtoinstallitwhenyouchooseBrowseInBridge.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
5.Studythe03End.psdfile.Movethethumbnailslidertotherightifyouwanttoseetheimageinmoredetail.
![Page 66: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
Theprojectisashadowboxthatincludesapieceofcoral,asanddollar,amussel,anautilus,andaplateofsmallshells.Thechallengeinthislessonistoarrangetheseelements,whichwerescannedtogetheronthesinglepageyouseeinthe03Start.psdfile.
6.Double-clickthe03Start.psdthumbnailtoopentheimagefileinPhotoshop.
7.ChooseFile>SaveAs,renamethefile03Working.psd,andclickSave.
Bysavinganotherversionofthestartfile,youdon’thavetoworryaboutoverwritingtheoriginal.
UsingtheQuickSelectiontoolTheQuickSelectiontoolprovidesoneoftheeasiestwaystomakeaselection.Yousimplypaintanareaofanimage,andthetoolautomaticallyfindstheedges.Youcanaddorsubtractareasoftheselectionuntilyouhaveexactlytheareayouwant.
Theimageofthesanddollarinthe03Working.psdfilehasclearlydefinededges,makingitanidealcandidatefortheQuickSelectiontool.You’llselectjustthesanddollar,notthebackgroundbehindit.
1.SelecttheZoomtoolintheToolspanel,andthenzoominsothatyoucanseethesanddollarwell.
2.SelecttheQuickSelectiontool( )intheToolspanel.
3.SelectAuto-Enhanceintheoptionsbar.
WhenAuto-Enhanceisselected,theQuickSelectiontoolcreatesbetterqualityselections,withedgesthataretruertotheobject.TheselectionprocessisalittleslowerthanusingtheQuickSelectiontoolwithoutAuto-Enhance,buttheresultsaresuperior.
4.Clickonanoff-whiteareaneartheoutsideedgeofthesanddollar.
![Page 67: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
TheQuickSelectiontoolfindsthefulledgeautomatically,selectingtheentiresanddollar.Leavetheselectionactivesothatyoucanuseitinthenextexercise.
MovingaselectedareaOnceyou’vemadeaselection,anychangesyoumakeapplyexclusivelytothepixelswithintheselection.Therestoftheimageisnotaffectedbythosechanges.
Tomovetheselectedareatoanotherpartofthecomposition,youusetheMovetool.Thisimagehasonlyonelayer,sothepixelsyoumovewillreplacethepixelsbeneaththem.Thischangeisnotpermanentuntilyoudeselectthemovedpixels,soyoucantrydifferentlocationsfortheselectionyou’removingbeforeyoumakeacommitment.
1.Ifthesanddollarisnotstillselected,repeatthepreviousexercisetoselectit.
2.Zoomoutsoyoucanseeboththeshadowboxandthesanddollar.
3.SelecttheMovetool( ).Noticethatthesanddollarremainsselected.
4.Dragtheselectedarea(thesanddollar)uptotheupperleftareaoftheframe,whichislabeled“A.”Positionitoverthesilhouetteintheframe,leavingthelowerleftpartofthesilhouetteshowingasashadow.
5.ChooseSelect>Deselect,andthenchooseFile>Save.
![Page 68: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
InPhotoshop,it’snoteasytoloseaselection.Unlessaselectiontoolisactive,clickingelsewhereintheimagewillnotdeselecttheactivearea.Todeliberatelydeselectaselection,youcanchooseSelect>Deselect,pressCtrl+D(Windows)orCommand+D(MacOS),orclickoutsidetheselectionwithanyselectiontooltostartadifferentselection.
TooltipsfromthePhotoshopevangelist
JulieanneKostisanofficialAdobePhotoshopevangelist.
Movetooltip
Ifyou’removingobjectsinamultilayerfilewiththeMovetoolandyousuddenlyneedtoselectoneofthelayers,trythis:WiththeMovetoolselected,movethepointeroveranyareaofanimage,andright-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS).Thelayersthatareunderthepointerappearinthecontextmenu.Choosetheoneyou’dliketomakeactive.
ManipulatingselectionsYoucanmoveselections,repositionthemasyoucreatethem,andevenduplicatethem.Inthissection,you’lllearnseveralwaystomanipulateselections.Mostofthesemethodsworkwithanyselection,butyou’llusethemherewiththeEllipticalMarqueetool,whichletsyouselectovalsorperfectcircles.
Oneofthemostusefulthingsyoumayfindinthissectionistheintroductionofkeyboardshortcutsthatcansaveyoutimeandarmmotions.
RepositioningaselectionmarqueewhilecreatingitSelectingovalsandcirclescanbetricky.It’snotalwaysobviouswhereyoushouldstartdragging,sosometimestheselectionwillbeoff-center,ortheratioofwidthtoheightwon’tmatchwhatyouneed.Inthisexercise,you’lllearntechniquesformanagingthoseproblems,includingtwoimportantkeyboard-mousecombinationsthatcanmakeyourPhotoshopworkmucheasier.
Asyouperformthisexercise,beverycarefultofollowthedirectionsaboutkeepingthemousebuttonorspecifickeyspressed.Ifyouaccidentallyreleasethemousebuttonatthewrongtime,simplystarttheexerciseagainfromstep1.
1.SelecttheZoomtool( ),andclicktheplateofshellsatthebottomoftheimagewindowtozoomintoatleast100%view(use200%viewiftheentireplateofshellswillstillfitintheimagewindowonyourscreen).
2.SelecttheEllipticalMarqueetool( ),hiddenundertheRectangularMarqueetool().
![Page 69: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
3.Movethepointerovertheplateofshells,anddragdiagonallyacrosstheovalplatetocreateaselection,butdonotreleasethemousebutton.It’sOKifyourselectiondoesnotmatchtheplateshapeyet.
Ifyouaccidentallyreleasethemousebutton,drawtheselectionagain.Inmostcases—includingthisone—thenewselectionreplacesthepreviousone.
4.Stillholdingdownthemousebutton,pressthespacebar,andcontinuetodragtheselection.Insteadofresizingtheselection,nowyou’removingit.Positionitsothatitmorecloselyalignswiththeplate.
5.Carefullyreleasethespacebar(butnotthemousebutton)andcontinuetodrag,tryingtomakethesizeandshapeoftheselectionmatchtheovalplateofshellsascloselyaspossible.Ifnecessary,holddownthespacebaragainanddragtomovetheselectionmarqueeintopositionaroundtheplateofshells.
Note
Youdon’thavetoincludeeverypixelintheplateofshells,buttheselectionshouldbetheshapeoftheplate,andshouldcontaintheshellscomfortably.
6.Whentheselectionborderispositionedappropriately,releasethemousebutton.
7.ChooseView>FitOnScreenorusethesliderintheNavigatorpaneltoreducethezoomviewsothatyoucanseealloftheobjectsintheimagewindow.
LeavetheEllipticalMarqueetoolandtheselectionactiveforthenextexercise.
MovingselectedpixelswithakeyboardshortcutNowyou’lluseakeyboardshortcuttomovetheselectedpixelsontotheshadowbox.TheshortcuttemporarilyswitchestheactivetooltotheMovetool,soyoudon’tneedtoselectitfromtheToolspanel.
1.Iftheplateofshellsisnotstillselected,repeatthepreviousexercisetoselectit.
2.WiththeEllipticalMarqueetool( )selectedintheToolspanel,pressCtrl(Windows)orCommand(MacOS),andmovethepointerwithintheselection.
Thepointericonnowincludesapairofscissors( )toindicatethattheselectionwillbecutfromitscurrentlocation.
3.Dragtheplateofshellsontotheareaoftheshadowboxlabeled“B.”(You’lluseanothertechniquetonudgetheovalplateintotheexactpositioninaminute.)
![Page 70: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
4.Releasethemousebutton,butdon’tdeselecttheplateofshells.
Note
YoucanreleasetheCtrlorCommandkeyafteryoustartdragging,andtheMovetoolremainsactive.Photoshoprevertstothepreviouslyselectedtoolwhenyoudeselect,whetheryouclickoutsidetheselectionorusetheDeselectcommand.
MovingaselectionwiththearrowkeysYoucanmakeminoradjustmentstothepositionofselectedpixelsbyusingthearrowkeys.Youcannudgetheselectioninincrementsofeitheronepixelortenpixels.
WhenaselectiontoolisactiveintheToolspanel,thearrowkeysnudgetheselectionborder,butnotthecontents.WhentheMovetoolisactive,thearrowkeysmoveboththeselectionborderanditscontents.
You’llusethearrowkeystonudgetheplateofshells.Beforeyoubegin,makesurethattheplateofshellsisstillselectedintheimagewindow.
1.PresstheUpArrowkey( )onyourkeyboardafewtimestomovetheovalupward.
Noticethateachtimeyoupressthearrowkey,theplateofshellsmovesonepixel.Experimentbypressingtheotherarrowkeystoseehowtheyaffecttheselection.
2.HolddowntheShiftkeyasyoupressanarrowkey.
WhenyouholddowntheShiftkey,theselectionmovestenpixelseverytimeyoupressanarrowkey.
Sometimestheborderaroundaselectedareacandistractyouasyoumakeadjustments.Youcanhidetheedgesofaselectiontemporarilywithoutactuallydeselecting,andthendisplaytheselectionborderonceyou’vecompletedtheadjustments.
3.ChooseView>Show>SelectionEdgesorView>Extras.
Eithercommandhidestheselectionborderaroundtheplateofshells.
4.Usethearrowkeystonudgetheplateofshellsuntilit’spositionedoverthe
![Page 71: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
silhouette,sothatthere’sashadowontheleftandbottomoftheplate.ThenchooseView>Show>SelectionEdgestorevealtheselectionborderagain.
5.ChooseSelect>Deselect,orpressCtrl+D(Windows)orCommand+D(MacOS).
6.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
UsingtheMagicWandtoolTheMagicWandtoolselectsallthepixelsofaparticularcolororcolorrange.It’smostusefulforselectinganareaofsimilarcolorssurroundedbyareasofverydifferentcolors.Aswithmanyoftheselectiontools,afteryoumaketheinitialselection,youcanaddorsubtractareasoftheselection.
TheToleranceoptionsetsthesensitivityoftheMagicWandtool.Thisvaluelimitsorextendstherangeofpixelsimilarity.Thedefaulttolerancevalueof32selectsthecoloryouclickplus32lighterand32darkertonesofthatcolor.Youmayneedtoadjustthetolerancelevelupordowndependingonthecolorrangesandvariationsintheimage.
Ifamulticoloredareathatyouwanttoselectissetagainstabackgroundofadifferentcolor,itcanbemucheasiertoselectthebackgroundthantheareaitself.Inthisprocedure,you’llusetheRectangularMarqueetooltoselectalargerarea,andthenusetheMagicWandtooltosubtractthebackgroundfromtheselection.
1.SelecttheRectangularMarqueetool( ),hiddenbehindtheEllipticalMarqueetool( ).
2.Dragaselectionaroundthepieceofcoral.Makesurethatyourselectionislargeenoughsothatamarginofwhiteappearsbetweenthecoralandtheedgesofthemarquee.
![Page 72: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
Atthispoint,thecoralandthewhitebackgroundareaareselected.You’llsubtractthewhiteareafromtheselectionsothatonlythecoralremainsintheselection.
3.SelecttheMagicWandtool( ),hiddenundertheQuickSelectiontool( ).
4.Intheoptionsbar,confirmthattheTolerancevalueis32.Thisvaluedeterminestherangeofcolorsthewandselects.
5.ClicktheSubtractFromSelectionbutton( )intheoptionsbar.
Aminussignappearsnexttothewandinthepointericon.Anythingyouselectnowwillbesubtractedfromtheinitialselection.
6.Clickinthewhitebackgroundareawithintheselectionmarquee.
TheMagicWandtoolselectstheentirebackground,subtractingitfromtheselection.Nowallthewhitepixelsaredeselected,leavingthecoralperfectlyselected.
7.SelecttheMovetool( ),anddragthecoraltotheareaoftheshadowboxlabeled“C,”positioningitsothatashadowappearstotheleftandbelowthecoral.
8.ChooseSelect>Deselect,andthensaveyourwork.
![Page 73: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
Softeningtheedgesofaselection
Tosmooththehardedgesofaselection,youcanapplyanti-aliasingorfeathering,orusetheRefineEdgeoption.
Anti-aliasingsmoothsthejaggededgesofaselectionbysofteningthecolortransitionbetweenedgepixelsandbackgroundpixels.Sinceonlytheedgepixelschange,nodetailislost.Anti-aliasingisusefulwhencutting,copying,andpastingselectionstocreatecompositeimages.
Anti-aliasingisavailablefortheLasso,PolygonalLasso,MagneticLasso,EllipticalMarquee,andMagicWandtools.(Selectthetooltodisplayitsoptionsintheoptionsbar.)Toapplyanti-aliasing,youmustselecttheoptionbeforemakingtheselection.Onceaselectionismade,youcannotaddanti-aliasingtoit.
Featheringblursedgesbybuildingatransitionboundarybetweentheselectionanditssurroundingpixels.Thisblurringcancausesomelossofdetailattheedgeoftheselection.
Youcandefinefeatheringforthemarqueeandlassotoolsasyouusethem,oryoucanaddfeatheringtoanexistingselection.Featheringeffectsbecomeapparentwhenyoumove,cut,orcopytheselection.
•TousetheRefineEdgeoption,firstmakeaselection,andthenclickRefineEdgeintheoptionsbartoopenitsdialogbox.YoucanusetheRefineEdgeoptiontosmooththeoutline,featherit,orcontractorexpandit.
•Touseanti-aliasing,selectalassotool,ortheEllipticalMarqueeorMagicWandtool,andselectAnti-aliasintheoptionsbar.
•Todefineafeatherededgeforaselectiontool,selectanyofthelassoormarqueetools.EnteraFeathervalueintheoptionsbar.Thisvaluedefinesthewidthofthefeatherededgeandcanrangefrom1to250pixels.
•Todefineafeatherededgeforanexistingselection,chooseSelect>Modify>Feather.EnteravaluefortheFeatherRadius,andclickOK.
SelectingwiththelassotoolsAswementionedearlier,Photoshopincludesthreelassotools:theLassotool,thePolygonalLassotool,andtheMagneticLassotool.YoucanusetheLassotooltomakeselectionsthatrequirebothfreehandandstraightlines,usingkeyboardshortcutstomovebackandforthbetweentheLassotoolandthePolygonalLassotool.You’llusetheLassotooltoselectthemussel.Ittakesabitofpracticetoalternatebetweenstraight-lineandfreehandselections—ifyoumakeamistakewhileyou’reselectingthemussel,simplydeselectandstartagain.
1.SelecttheZoomtool( ),andclickthemusseluntiltheviewenlargesto100%.Makesureyoucanseetheentiremusselinthewindow.
2.SelecttheLassotool( ).Startingatthelowerleftsectionofthemussel,drag
![Page 74: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
aroundtheroundedendofthemussel,tracingtheshapeasaccuratelyaspossible.Donotreleasethemousebutton.
3.PresstheAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)key,andthenreleasethemousebuttonsothatthelassopointerchangestothepolygonallassoshape( ).DonotreleasetheAltorOptionkey.
4.Beginclickingalongtheendofthemusseltoplaceanchorpoints,followingthecontoursofthemussel.BesuretoholddowntheAltorOptionkeythroughoutthisprocess.
Theselectionborderautomaticallystretcheslikearubberbandbetweenanchorpoints.
5.Whenyoureachthetipofthemussel,holddownthemousebuttonasyoureleasetheAltorOptionkey.Thepointeragainappearsasthelassoicon.
6.Carefullydragaroundthetipofthemussel,holdingdownthemousebutton.
7.Whenyoufinishtracingthetipandreachthelowersideofthemussel,firstpressAltorOptionagain,andthenreleasethemousebutton.ClickalongthelowersideofthemusselwiththePolygonalLassotoolasyoudidonthetop.Continuetotracethemusseluntilyouarrivebackatthestartingpointofyourselectionneartheleftendoftheimage.
8.Clickthestartingpointoftheselection,andthenreleaseAltorOption.Themusselisnowentirelyselected.Leavethemusselselectedforthenextexercise.
Note
TomakesurethattheselectionistheshapeyouwantwhenyouusetheLassotool,endtheselectionbydraggingacrossthestartingpointoftheselection.Ifyoustartandstoptheselectionatdifferentpoints,Photoshopdrawsastraightlinebetweenthestartandendpointsoftheselection.
![Page 75: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
RotatingaselectionNowyou’llrotatethemussel.
Beforeyoubegin,makesurethatthemusselisstillselected.
1.ChooseView>FitOnScreentoresizetheimagewindowtofitonyourscreen.
2.PressCtrl(Windows)orCommand(MacOS)asyoudragtheselectedmusseltothesectionoftheshadowboxlabeled“D.”
ThepointerchangestotheMovetooliconwhenyoupressCtrlorCommand.
3.ChooseEdit>Transform>Rotate.
Themusselandselectionmarqueeareenclosedinaboundingbox.
4.Movethepointeroutsidetheboundingboxsothatitbecomesacurved,double-headedarrow( ).Dragtorotatethemusseltoa90-degreeangle.YoucanverifytheangleintheRotateboxintheoptionsbar.PressEnterorReturntocommitthetransformation.
5.Ifnecessary,selecttheMovetool( )anddragtorepositionthemussel,leavingashadowtomatchtheothers.Whenyou’resatisfied,chooseSelect>Deselect.
6.ChooseFile>Save.
SelectingwiththeMagneticLassotoolYoucanusetheMagneticLassotooltomakefreehandselectionsofareaswithhigh-contrastedges.WhenyoudrawwiththeMagneticLassotool,theselectionborderautomaticallysnapstotheedgebetweenareasofcontrast.Youcanalsocontroltheselectionpathbyoccasionallyclickingthemousetoplaceanchorpointsintheselectionborder.
You’llusetheMagneticLassotooltoselectthenautilussothatyoucanmoveittotheshadowbox.
1.SelecttheZoomtool( ),andclickthenautilustozoomintoatleast100%.
2.SelecttheMagneticLassotool( ),hiddenundertheLassotool( ).
3.Clickoncealongtheleftedgeofthenautilus,andthenmovetheMagneticLassotoolalongtheedgetotraceitsoutline.
![Page 76: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
Tip
Inlow-contrastareas,youmaywanttoclicktoplaceyourownfasteningpoints.Youcanaddasmanyasyouneed.Toremovethemostrecentfasteningpoint,pressDelete,andthenmovethemousebacktotheremainingfasteningpointandcontinueselecting.
Eventhoughyou’renotholdingdownthemousebutton,thetoolsnapstotheedgeofthenautilusandautomaticallyaddsfasteningpoints.
4.Whenyoureachtheleftsideofthenautilusagain,double-clicktoreturntheMagneticLassotooltothestartingpoint,closingtheselection.OryoucanmovetheMagneticLassotooloverthestartingpointandclickonce.
5.Double-clicktheHandtool( )tofittheimageintheimagewindow.
6.SelecttheMovetool( ),anddragthenautilusontoitssilhouetteinthesectionoftheframelabeled“E,”leavingashadowbelowitandontheleftside.
7.ChooseSelect>Deselect,andthenchooseFile>Save.
![Page 77: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
SelectingfromacenterpointInsomecases,it’seasiertomakeellipticalorrectangularselectionsbydrawingaselectionfromanobject’scenterpoint.You’llusethistechniquetoselecttheheadofthescrewfortheshadowboxcorners.
1.SelecttheZoomtool( ),andzoominonthescrewtoamagnificationofabout300%.Makesurethatyoucanseetheentirescrewheadinyourimagewindow.
2.SelecttheEllipticalMarqueetool( )intheToolspanel.
3.Movethepointertotheapproximatecenterofthescrew.
4.Clickandbegindragging.Then,withoutreleasingthemousebutton,pressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)asyoucontinuedraggingtheselectiontotheouteredgeofthescrew.
Theselectioniscenteredoveritsstartingpoint.
5.Whenyouhavetheentirescrewheadselected,releasethemousebuttonfirst,andthenreleaseAltorOption(andtheShiftkeyifyouusedit).Donotdeselect,becauseyou’llusethisselectioninthenextexercise.
Tip
Toselectaperfectcircle,pressShiftasyoudrag.HolddownShiftwhiledraggingtheRectangularMarqueetooltoselectaperfectsquare.
6.Ifnecessary,repositiontheselectionborderusingoneofthemethodsyoulearnedearlier.IfyouaccidentallyreleasedtheAltorOptionkeybeforeyoureleasedthe
![Page 78: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
mousebutton,selectthescrewagain.
ResizingandcopyingaselectionNowyou’llmovethescrewtothelowerrightcornerofthewoodenshadowbox,andthenduplicateitfortheothercorners.
ResizingthecontentsofaselectionYou’llstartbymovingthescrew,butit’stoolargeforthespace.You’llneedtoresizeitaswell.
Beforeyoubegin,makesurethatthescrewisstillselected.Ifit’snot,reselectitbycompletingthepreviousexercise.
1.ChooseView>FitOnScreensothattheentireimagefitswithintheimagewindow.
2.SelecttheMovetool( )intheToolspanel.
3.Positionthepointerwithinthescrewselection.
Thepointerbecomesanarrowwithapairofscissors( ),indicatingthatdraggingtheselectionwillcutitfromitscurrentlocationandmoveittothenewlocation.
4.Dragthescrewontothelowerrightcorneroftheshadowbox.
5.ChooseEdit>Transform>Scale.Aboundingboxappearsaroundtheselection.
6.PressShiftasyoudragoneofthecornerpointsinwardtoreducethescrewtoabout40%ofitsoriginalsize,oruntilitissmallenoughtositontheshadowboxframe.ThenpressEnterorReturntocommitthechangeandremovethetransformationboundingbox.
Asyouresizetheobject,theselectionmarqueeresizes,too.PressingtheShiftkeyasyouresizetheselectionconstrainstheproportionssothatthereducedobjectisn’tdistorted.
7.UsetheMovetooltorepositionthescrewafterresizingit,sothatitiscenteredinthecorneroftheshadowboxframe.
8.Leavingthescrewselected,chooseFile>Savetosaveyourwork.
![Page 79: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
MovingandduplicatingaselectionsimultaneouslyYoucanmoveandduplicateaselectionatthesametime.You’llcopythescrewfortheotherthreecornersoftheframe.Ifthescrewisnolongerselected,reselectitnow,usingthetechniquesyoulearnedearlier.
1.WiththeMovetool( )selected,pressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)asyoupositionthepointerinsidethescrewselection.
Thepointerchanges,displayingtheusualblackarrowandanadditionalwhitearrow,whichindicatesthataduplicatewillbemadewhenyoumovetheselection.
2.ContinueholdingdowntheAltorOptionkeyasyoudragaduplicateofthescrewstraightuptothetoprightcorneroftheframe.ReleasethemousebuttonandtheAltorOptionkey,butdon’tdeselecttheduplicateimage.
3.HolddownAlt+Shift(Windows)orOption+Shift(MacOS),anddraganewcopyofthescrewstraightlefttotheupperleftcorneroftheframe.
PressingtheShiftkeyasyoumoveaselectionconstrainsthemovementhorizontallyorverticallyin45-degreeincrements.
4.Repeatstep3todragafourthscrewtothelowerleftcorneroftheframe.
5.Whenyou’resatisfiedwiththepositionofthefourthscrew,chooseSelect>Deselect,andthenchooseFile>Save.
![Page 80: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
Copyingselections
YoucanusetheMovetooltocopyselectionsasyoudragthemwithinorbetweenimages,oryoucancopyandmoveselectionsusingtheCopy,CopyMerged,Paste,andPasteIntocommands.DraggingwiththeMovetoolsavesmemory,becausetheclipboardisnotusedasitiswiththecommands.
Photoshophasseveralcopyandpastecommands:
•Copycopiestheselectedareaontheactivelayer.
•CopyMergedcreatesamergedcopyofallthevisiblelayersintheselectedarea.
•Pastepastesacutorcopiedselectionintoanotherpartoftheimageorintoanotherimageasanewlayer.
•PasteIntopastesacutorcopiedselectioninsideanotherselectioninthesameoradifferentimage.Thesourceselectionispastedontoanewlayer,andthedestinationselectionborderisconvertedintoalayermask.
Keepinmindthatwhenaselectionispastedbetweenimageswithdifferentresolutions,thepasteddataretainsitspixeldimensions.Thiscanmakethepastedportionappearoutofproportiontothenewimage.UsetheImageSizecommandtomakethesourceanddestinationimagesthesameresolutionbeforecopyingandpasting.
CroppinganimageNowthatyourcompositionisinplace,you’llcroptheimagetoafinalsize.YoucanuseeithertheCroptoolortheCropcommandtocropanimage.
1.SelecttheCroptool( ),orpressCtoswitchfromthecurrenttooltotheCroptool.Photoshopdisplaysacropboundaryaroundtheentireimage.
2.Intheoptionsbar,makesureRatioisselectedinthePresetpop-upmenuandthattherearenoratiovaluesspecified.ThenconfirmthatDeleteCroppedPixelsisselected.
WhenRatioisselectedbutnoratiovaluesarespecified,youcancroptheimagewithanyproportions.
3.Dragthecrophandlessothattheshadowboxisinthehighlightedarea,omittingthebackgroundsfromtheoriginalobjectsatthebottomoftheimage.Croptheframesothatthere’sanevenareaofwhitearoundit.
![Page 81: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
Tip
Tocropanimagewithitsoriginalproportionsintact,chooseOriginalRatiofromthePresetpop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.
4.Whenyou’resatisfiedwiththepositionofthecroparea,clicktheCommitCurrentCropOperationbutton( )intheoptionsbar.
5.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourwork.
You’veusedseveraldifferentselectiontoolstomovealltheseashellsintoplace.Theshadowboxiscomplete!
Reviewquestions1.Onceyou’vemadeaselection,whatareaoftheimagecanbeedited?
2.Howdoyouaddtoandsubtractfromaselection?
3.Howcanyoumoveaselectionwhileyou’redrawingit?
4.WhatdoestheQuickSelectiontooldo?
5.HowdoestheMagicWandtooldeterminewhichareasofanimagetoselect?Whatistolerance,andhowdoesitaffectaselection?
![Page 82: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
Reviewanswers1.Onlytheareawithinanactiveselectioncanbeedited.
2.Toaddtoaselection,clicktheAddToSelectionbuttonintheoptionsbar,andthenclicktheareayouwanttoadd.Tosubtractfromaselection,clicktheSubtractFromSelectionbuttonintheoptionsbar,andthenclicktheareayouwanttosubtract.YoucanalsoaddtoaselectionbypressingShiftasyoudragorclick;tosubtract,pressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)asyoudragorclick.
3.Torepositionaselectionwhileyou’redrawingit,continuetopressthemousebuttonasyouholddownthespacebaranddrag.
4.TheQuickSelectiontoolexpandsoutwardfromwhereyouclicktoautomaticallyfindandfollowdefinededgesintheimage.
5.TheMagicWandtoolselectsadjacentpixelsbasedontheirsimilarityincolor.TheTolerancevaluedetermineshowmanycolortonestheMagicWandtoolwillselect.Thehigherthetolerancesetting,themoretonesareselected.
![Page 83: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
4.LayerBasics
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Organizeartworkonlayers.
•Create,view,hide,andselectlayers.
•Rearrangelayerstochangethestackingorderofartwork.
•Applyblendingmodestolayers.
•Resizeandrotatelayers.
•Applyagradienttoalayer.
•Applyafiltertoalayer.
•Addtextandlayereffectstoalayer.
•Addanadjustmentlayer.
•Saveacopyofthefilewiththelayersflattened.
Thislessonwilltakelessthananhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson04projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 84: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
Pineappleandflowerphotography©ImageSource,www.imagesource.comPROJECT:TRAVELPOSTCARD
InPhotoshop,youcanisolatedifferentpartsofanimageonlayers.Eachlayercanthenbeeditedasdiscreteartwork,givingyoutremendousflexibilityasyoucomposeand
reviseanimage.
AboutlayersEveryPhotoshopfilecontainsoneormorelayers.Newfilesaregenerallycreatedwithabackgroundlayer,whichcontainsacolororanimagethatshowsthroughthetransparentareasofsubsequentlayers.Allnewlayersinanimagearetransparentuntilyouaddtextorartwork(pixelvalues).
Workingwithlayersisanalogoustoplacingportionsofadrawingonclearsheetsoffilm,suchasthoseviewedwithanoverheadprojector:Individualsheetsmaybeedited,repositioned,anddeletedwithoutaffectingtheothersheets.Whenthesheetsarestacked,theentirecompositionisvisible.
![Page 85: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
GettingstartedYou’llstartthelessonbyviewinganimageofthefinalcomposition.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
Note
IfBridgeisn’tinstalled,you’llbepromptedtoinstallit.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
4.IntheFavoritespanel,clicktheLessonsfolder.Thendouble-clicktheLesson04folderintheContentpaneltoseeitscontents.
5.Studythe04End.psdfile.Movethethumbnailslidertotherightifyouwanttoseetheimageinmoredetail.
Thislayeredcompositerepresentsapostcard.Youwillcreateitinthislessonasyoulearnhowtocreate,edit,andmanagelayers.
6.Double-clickthe04Start.psdfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
7.ChooseFile>SaveAs,renamethefile04Working.psd,andclickSave.ClickOKifyouseethePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
Savinganotherversionofthestartfilefreesyoutomakechangeswithoutworryingaboutoverwritingtheoriginal.
UsingtheLayerspanelTheLayerspanellistsallthelayersinanimage,displayingthelayernamesandthumbnailsofthecontentoneachlayer.YoucanusetheLayerspaneltohide,view,reposition,delete,rename,andmergelayers.Thelayerthumbnailsareautomaticallyupdatedasyoueditthelayers.
1.IftheLayerspanelisnotvisibleintheworkarea,chooseWindow>Layers.
TheLayerspanellistsfivelayersforthe04Working.psdfile(fromtoptobottom):Postage,HAWAII,Flower,Pineapple,andBackground.
2.SelecttheBackgroundlayertomakeitactive(ifit’snotalreadyselected).NoticethelayerthumbnailandtheiconsshownfortheBackgroundlayer:
•Thelockicon( )indicatesthatthelayerisprotected.
•Theeyeicon( )indicatesthatthelayerisvisibleintheimagewindow.Ifyouclicktheeye,theimagewindownolongerdisplaysthatlayer.
![Page 86: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
Thefirsttaskforthisprojectistoaddaphotoofthebeachtothepostcard.First,you’llopenthebeachimageinPhotoshop.
Tip
Usethecontextmenutohideorresizethelayerthumbnail.Right-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS)athumbnailintheLayerspaneltoopenthecontextmenu,andthenchooseathumbnailsize.
3.InPhotoshop,chooseFile>Open,navigatetotheLesson04folder,andthendouble-clicktheBeach.psdfiletoopenit.
TheLayerspanelchangestodisplaythelayerinformationfortheactiveBeach.psdfile.NoticethatonlyonelayerappearsintheBeach.psdimage:Layer1,notBackground.(Formoreinformation,seethesidebar“Aboutthebackgroundlayer.”)
![Page 87: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
Aboutthebackgroundlayer
Whenyoucreateanewimagewithawhiteorcoloredbackground,thebottomlayerintheLayerspanelisnamedBackground.Animagecanhaveonlyonebackgroundlayer.Youcannotchangethestackingorderofabackgroundlayer,itsblendingmode,oritsopacity.Youcan,however,convertabackgroundlayertoaregularlayer.
Whenyoucreateanewimagewithtransparentcontent,theimagedoesn’thaveabackgroundlayer.Thebottomlayerisn’tconstrainedlikethebackgroundlayer;youcanmoveitanywhereintheLayerspanel,andchangeitsopacityandblendingmode.
Toconvertabackgroundlayerintoaregularlayer:
1.Clickthelockiconnexttothelayername.
2.Renamethelayer.
Toconvertaregularlayerintoabackgroundlayer:
1.SelectalayerintheLayerspanel.
2.ChooseLayer>New>BackgroundFromLayer.
RenamingandcopyingalayerToaddcontenttoanimageandsimultaneouslycreateanewlayerforit,draganobjectorlayerfromonefileintotheimagewindowofanotherfile.WhetheryoudragfromtheimagewindowoftheoriginalfileorfromitsLayerspanel,onlytheactivelayerisreproducedinthedestinationfile.
You’lldragtheBeach.psdimageontothe04Working.psdfile.Beforeyoubegin,makesurethatboththe04Working.psdandBeach.psdfilesareopen,andthattheBeach.psdfileisselected.
First,you’llgiveLayer1amoredescriptivename.
1.IntheLayerspanel,double-clickthenameLayer1,typeBeach,andthenpressEnterorReturn.Keepthelayerselected.
2.ChooseWindow>Arrange>2-UpVertical.Photoshopdisplaysbothoftheopenimagefiles.SelecttheBeach.psdimagesothatitistheactivefile.
3.SelecttheMovetool( ),anduseittodragtheBeach.psdimageontothe04Working.psdimagewindow.
![Page 88: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
Tip
IfyouholddownShiftasyoudraganimagefromonefileintoanother,thedraggedimageautomaticallycentersitselfinthetargetimagewindow.
TheBeachlayernowappearsinthe04Working.psdfileimagewindowanditsLayerspanel,betweentheBackgroundandPineapplelayers.Photoshopalwaysaddsnewlayersdirectlyabovetheselectedlayer;youselectedtheBackgroundlayerearlier.
4.ClosetheBeach.psdfilewithoutsavingchangestoit.
![Page 89: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
Tip
Needimagesforaprojectlikethisone?InPhotoshop,chooseFile>SearchAdobeStocktodownloadlow-resolutionplaceholderimagesfromtheAdobeStockonlinephotolibraryatnoextracharge.Ifyoupurchasetheimages,Photoshopreplacestheplaceholderswithhigh-resolutionimages.
ViewingindividuallayersThe04Working.psdfilenowcontainssixlayers.Someofthelayersarevisibleandsomearehidden.Theeyeicon( )nexttoalayerthumbnailintheLayerspanelindicatesthatthelayerisvisible.
1.Clicktheeyeicon( )nexttothePineapplelayertohidetheimageofthepineapple.
Youcanhideorshowalayerbyclickingthisiconorclickinginitscolumn—alsocalledtheShow/HideVisibilitycolumn.
2.ClickagainintheShow/HideVisibilitycolumntodisplaythepineapple.
AddingabordertoalayerNowyou’lladdawhiteborderaroundtheBeachlayertocreatetheimpressionthatit’sanoldphotograph.
1.SelecttheBeachlayer.(Toselectthelayer,clickthelayernameintheLayerspanel.)
Thelayerishighlighted,indicatingthatitisactive.Changesyoumakeintheimagewindowaffecttheactivelayer.
2.Tomaketheopaqueareasonthislayermoreobvious,hidealllayersexcepttheBeachlayer:PressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)asyouclicktheeyeicon( )nexttotheBeachlayer.
![Page 90: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
Thewhitebackgroundandotherobjectsintheimagedisappear,leavingonlythebeachimageagainstacheckerboardbackground.Thecheckerboardindicatestransparentareasoftheactivelayer.
3.ChooseLayer>LayerStyle>Stroke.
TheLayerStyledialogboxopens.Nowyou’llselecttheoptionsforthewhitestrokearoundthebeachimage.
4.Specifythefollowingsettings:
•Size:5px
•Position:Inside
•BlendMode:Normal
•Opacity:100%
•Color:White(ClicktheColorbox,andselectwhiteintheColorPicker.)
5.ClickOK.Awhiteborderappearsaroundthebeachphoto.
![Page 91: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
RearranginglayersTheorderinwhichthelayersofanimageareorganizediscalledthestackingorder.Thestackingorderdetermineshowtheimageisviewed—youcanchangetheordertomakecertainpartsoftheimageappearinfrontoforbehindotherlayers.
You’llrearrangethelayerssothatthebeachimageisinfrontofanotherimagethatiscurrentlyhiddeninthefile.
1.MakethePostage,HAWAII,Flower,Pineapple,andBackgroundlayersvisiblebyclickingtheShow/HideVisibilitycolumnnexttotheirlayernames.
Thebeachimageisalmostentirelyblockedbyimagesonotherlayers.
2.IntheLayerspanel,dragtheBeachlayerupsothatitispositionedbetweenthePineappleandFlowerlayers—whenyou’vepositioneditcorrectly,you’llseeathick
![Page 92: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
linebetweenthelayersinthepanel—andthenreleasethemousebutton.
TheBeachlayermovesuponelevelinthestackingorder,andthebeachimageappearsontopofthepineappleandbackgroundimages,butunderthepostage,flower,andtheword“HAWAII.”
Tip
YoucanalsocontrolthestackingorderoflayeredimagesbyselectingthemintheLayerspanelandchoosingLayer>Arrange,andthenchoosingBringToFront,BringForward,SendToBack,orSendBackward.
ChangingtheopacityofalayerYoucanreducetheopacityofanylayertorevealthelayersbelowit.Inthiscase,thepostmarkistoodarkontheflower.You’lledittheopacityofthePostagelayertolettheflowerandotherimagesshowthrough.
1.SelectthePostagelayer,andthenclickthearrownexttotheOpacityfieldtodisplaytheOpacityslider.Dragthesliderto25%.Youcanalsotype25intheOpacityboxorscrubtheOpacitylabel.
ThePostagelayerbecomespartiallytransparent,soyoucanseetheotherlayers
![Page 93: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
underneath.NoticethatthechangeinopacityaffectsonlytheimageareaofthePostagelayer.ThePineapple,Beach,Flower,andHAWAIIlayersremainopaque.
2.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourwork.
DuplicatingalayerandchangingtheblendingmodeYoucanapplydifferentblendingmodestoalayer.Blendingmodesaffecthowthecolorpixelsononelayerblendwithpixelsonthelayersunderneath.Firstyou’lluseblendingmodestoincreasetheintensityoftheimageonthePineapplelayersothatitdoesn’tlooksodull.Thenyou’llchangetheblendingmodeonthePostagelayer.(Currently,theblendingmodeforbothlayersisNormal.)
1.ClicktheeyeiconsnexttotheHAWAII,Flower,andBeachlayerstohidethem.
2.Right-clickorControl-clickthePineapplelayer,andchooseDuplicateLayerfromthecontextmenu.(Makesureyouclickthelayername,notitsthumbnail,oryou’llseethewrongcontextmenu.)ClickOKintheDuplicateLayerdialogbox.
Alayercalled“Pineapplecopy”appearsabovethePineapplelayerintheLayerspanel.
Blendingmodes
Blendingmodesaffecthowthecolorpixelsononelayerblendwithpixelsonthelayersbeneaththem.Thedefaultblendingmode,Normal,hidespixelsbeneaththetoplayerunlessthetoplayerispartiallyorcompletelytransparent.Eachoftheotherblendingmodesletyoucontrolthewaythepixelsinthelayersinteractwitheachother.
Often,thebestwaytoseehowablendingmodeaffectsyourimageissimplytotryit.YoucaneasilyexperimentwithdifferentblendingmodesintheLayerspanel,applyingoneafteranothertocomparetheeffects.Asyoubeginexperimenting,keepinmindhowdifferentgroupsofblendingmodesaffectanimage.Generally,ifyouwantto:
•Darkenyourimage,tryDarken,Multiply,ColorBurn,orLinearBurn.
•Lightenyourimage,tryLighten,Screen,ColorDodge,orLinearDodge.
•Increasethecontrastintheimage,tryOverlay,SoftLight,HardLight,VividLight,LinearLight,PinLight,orHardMix.
•Changetheactualcolorvaluesoftheimage,tryHue,Saturation,Color,orLuminosity.
•Createaninversioneffect,tryDifferenceorExclusion.
![Page 94: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
Thefollowingblendingmodesoftencomeinhandy,andcanbeagoodplacetostartyourexperimentation:
•Multiplydoesjustwhatthenameimplies:itmultipliesthecolorintheunderlyingcolorswiththecolorinthetoplayer.
•Lightenreplacespixelsintheunderlyinglayerswiththoseinthetoplayerwheneverthepixelsinthetoplayerarelighter.
•Overlaymultiplieseitherthecolorsortheinverseofthecolors,dependingonthecolorsintheunderlyinglayers.Patternsorcolorsoverlaytheexistingpixelswhilepreservingthehighlightsandshadowsoftheunderlyinglayers.
•Luminosityreplacesonlytheluminanceoftheunderlyingcolorswiththatofthetoplayer.
•Differencesubtractsdarkercolorsfromlighterones.
3.WiththePineapplecopylayerselected,chooseOverlayfromtheBlendingModesmenuintheLayerspanel.
![Page 95: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
TheOverlayblendingmodeblendsthePineapplecopylayerwiththePineapplelayerbeneathittocreateavibrant,morecolorfulpineapplewithdeepershadowsandbrighterhighlights.
4.SelectthePostagelayer,andchooseMultiplyfromtheBlendingModesmenu.
TheMultiplyblendingmodemultipliesthecolorsintheunderlyinglayerswiththecolorinthetoplayer.Inthiscase,thepostmarkbecomesalittlestronger.
5.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourwork.
ResizingandrotatinglayersYoucanresizeandtransformlayers.
1.ClicktheVisibilitycolumnontheBeachlayertomakethelayervisible.
2.SelecttheBeachlayerintheLayerspanel,andchooseEdit>FreeTransform.
ATransformboundingboxappearsaroundthebeachimage.Theboundingboxhashandlesoneachcornerandeachside.
First,you’llresizeandanglethelayer.
3.PressShiftasyoudragacornerhandleinwardtoscalethebeachphotodownby
![Page 96: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
about50%.(WatchtheWidthandHeightpercentagesintheoptionsbar.)
4.Withtheboundingboxstillactive,positionthepointerjustoutsideoneofthecornerhandlesuntilitbecomesacurveddoublearrow.Dragclockwisetorotatethebeachimageapproximately15degrees.Youcanalsoenter15intheSetRotationboxintheoptionsbar.
5.ClicktheCommitTransformbutton( )intheoptionsbar.
6.MaketheFlowerlayervisible.Then,selecttheMovetool( ),anddragthebeachphotosothatitscorneristuckedneatlybeneaththeflower,asintheillustration.
7.ChooseFile>Save.
UsingafiltertocreateartworkNext,you’llcreateanewlayerwithnoartworkonit.(Addingemptylayerstoafileiscomparabletoaddingblanksheetsoffilmtoastackofimages.)You’llusethislayertoaddrealistic-lookingcloudstotheskywithaPhotoshopfilter.
![Page 97: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
1.IntheLayerspanel,selecttheBackgroundlayertomakeitactive,andthenclicktheCreateANewLayerbutton( )atthebottomoftheLayerspanel.
Anewlayer,namedLayer1,appearsbetweentheBackgroundandPineapplelayers.Thelayerhasnocontent,soithasnoeffectontheimage.
Note
YoucanalsocreateanewlayerbychoosingLayer>New>Layer,orbychoosingNewLayerfromtheLayerspanelmenu.
2.Double-clickthenameLayer1,typeClouds,andpressEnterorReturntorenamethelayer.
3.IntheToolspanel,clicktheforegroundcolorswatch,selectaskybluecolorfromtheColorPicker,andclickOK.Weselectedacolorwiththefollowingvalues:R=48,G=138,B=174.TheBackgroundColorremainswhite.
4.WiththeCloudslayerstillactive,chooseFilter>Render>Clouds.
Realistic-lookingcloudsappearbehindtheimage.
5.ChooseFile>Save.
![Page 98: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
DraggingtoaddanewlayerYoucanaddalayertoanimagebydragginganimagefilefromthedesktop,Bridge,orExplorer(Windows)ortheFinder(MacOS).You’lladdanotherflowertothepostcardnow.
1.IfPhotoshopfillsyourmonitor,reducethesizeofthePhotoshopwindow:
•InWindows,clicktheRestorebutton( )intheupperrightcorner,andthendragthelowerrightcornerofthePhotoshopwindowtomakeitsmaller.
•InMacOS,clickthegreenMaximize/Restorebutton( )intheupperleftcorneroftheimagewindow.
2.InPhotoshop,selectthePineapplecopylayerintheLayerspaneltomakeittheactivelayer.
3.InExplorer(Windows)ortheFinder(MacOS),navigatetotheLessonsfolderyoudownloadedfromthepeachpit.comwebsite.ThennavigatetotheLesson04folder.
4.SelectFlower2.psd,anddragitfromExplorerortheFinderontoyourimage.
TheFlower2layerappearsintheLayerspanel,directlyabovethePineapplecopylayer.PhotoshopplacestheimageasaSmartObject,whichisalayeryoucaneditwithoutmakingpermanentchanges.You’llworkmoreextensivelywithSmartObjectsinLesson8.
Tip
YoucandragimagesfromaBridgewindowtoPhotoshopaseasilyasyoucandragfromtheWindowsorMacdesktop.
5.PositiontheFlower2layerinthelowerleftcornerofthepostcard,sothatabouthalfofthetopflowerisvisible.
![Page 99: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
6.ClicktheCommitTransformbutton( )intheoptionsbartoacceptthelayer.
AddingtextNowyou’rereadytocreatesometypeusingtheHorizontalTypetool,whichplacesthetextonitsowntypelayer.You’lltheneditthetextandapplyaspecialeffect.
1.MaketheHAWAIIlayervisible.You’lladdtextjustbelowthislayer,andapplyspecialeffectstobothlayers.
2.ChooseSelect>DeselectLayers,sothatnolayersareselected.
3.IntheToolspanel,selecttheHorizontalTypetool( ).Then,chooseWindow>CharactertoopentheCharacterpanel.DothefollowingintheCharacterpanel:
•Selectaseriffont(weusedBirchStd;ifyouuseadifferentfont,adjustothersettingsaccordingly).
•Selectafontstyle(weusedRegular).
•Selectalargefontsize(weused36points).
•Selectalargetrackingvalue( )(weused250).
•Clickthecolorswatch,selectashadeofgrassygreenintheColorPicker,andclickOKtoclosetheColorPicker.
•ClicktheFauxBoldbutton( ).
•ClicktheAllCapsbutton( ).
•SelectCrispfromtheAnti-aliasingmenu( ).
![Page 100: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
4.Clickjustbelowthe“H”intheword“HAWAII,”andtypeIslandParadise.ThenclicktheCommitAnyCurrentEditsbutton( )intheoptionsbar.
TheLayerspanelnowincludesalayernamedIslandParadisewitha“T”thumbnail,indicatingthatitisatypelayer.Thislayerisatthetopofthelayerstack.
Thetextappearswhereyouclicked,whichprobablyisn’texactlywhereyouwantittobepositioned.
Note
Ifyoumakeamistakewhenyouclicktosetthetype,simplyclickawayfromthetypeandrepeatstep4.
5.SelecttheMovetool( ),anddragthe“IslandParadise”textsothatitiscenteredbelow“HAWAII.”
![Page 101: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
ApplyingagradienttoalayerYoucanapplyacolorgradienttoallorpartofalayer.Inthisexample,you’llapplyagradienttotheword“HAWAII”tomakeitmorecolorful.Firstyou’llselecttheletters,andthenyou’llapplythegradient.
1.SelecttheHAWAIIlayerintheLayerspaneltomakeitactive.
2.Right-clickorControl-clickthethumbnailintheHAWAIIlayer,andchooseSelectPixels.
Note
Makesureyouclickthethumbnail,ratherthanthelayername,oryou’llseethewrongcontextmenu.
EverythingontheHAWAIIlayer(thewhitelettering)isselected.Nowthatyou’veselectedtheareatofill,you’llapplyagradient.
3.IntheToolspanel,selecttheGradienttool( ).
Note
Thoughthelayercontainstheword“HAWAII,”itisnotatypelayer.Thetexthasbeenrasterized.
4.ClicktheForegroundColorswatchintheToolspanel,selectabrightshadeoforangeintheColorPicker,andclickOK.TheBackgroundColorshouldstillbewhite.
5.Intheoptionsbar,makesurethatLinearGradient( )isselected.
![Page 102: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
Tip
Tolistthegradientoptionsbynameratherthanbysample,clickthemenubuttoninthegradientpicker,andchooseeitherSmallListorLargeList.Or,hoverthepointeroverathumbnailuntilatooltipappears,showingthegradientname.
6.Intheoptionsbar,clickthearrownexttotheGradientEditorboxtoopentheGradientPicker.SelecttheForegroundToBackgroundswatch(it’sthefirstone),andthenclickanywhereoutsidethegradientpickertocloseit.
7.Withtheselectionstillactive,dragtheGradienttoolfromthebottomtothetopoftheletters.Ifyouwanttobesureyoudragstraightup,presstheShiftkeyasyoudrag.
Thegradientextendsacrossthetype,startingwithorangeatthebottomandgraduallyblendingtowhiteatthetop.
8.ChooseSelect>DeselecttodeselecttheHAWAIItype.
9.Savetheworkyou’vedonesofar.
ApplyingalayerstyleYoucanenhancealayerbyaddingashadow,stroke,satinsheen,orotherspecialeffectfromacollectionofautomatedandeditablelayerstyles.Thesestylesareeasytoapply,andtheylinkdirectlytothelayeryouspecify.
Likelayers,layerstylescanbehiddenbyclickingeyeicons( )intheLayerspanel.Layerstylesarenondestructive,soyoucaneditorremovethematanytime.Youcanapplyacopyofalayerstyletoadifferentlayerbydraggingtheeffectontothedestinationlayer.
Earlier,youusedalayerstyletoaddastroketothebeachphoto.Now,you’lladddropshadowstothetexttomakeitstandout.
![Page 103: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
1.SelecttheIslandParadiselayer,andthenchooseLayer>LayerStyle>DropShadow.
2.IntheLayerStyledialogbox,makesurethatthePreviewoptionisselected,andthen,ifnecessary,movethedialogboxsothatyoucanseetheIslandParadisetextintheimagewindow.
Tip
YoucanalsoopentheLayerStyledialogboxbyclickingtheAddALayerStylebuttonatthebottomoftheLayerspanelandthenchoosingalayerstyle,suchasBevelAndEmboss,fromthepop-upmenu.
3.IntheStructurearea,selectUseGlobalLight,andthenspecifythefollowingsettings:
•BlendMode:Multiply
•Opacity:75%
•Angle:78degrees
•Distance:5px
•Spread:30%
•Size:10px
WhenUseGlobalLightisselected,one“master”lightingangleisavailableinallthelayereffectsthatuseshading.Ifyousetalightingangleinoneoftheseeffects,everyothereffectwithUseGlobalLightselectedinheritsthesameanglesetting.
Tip
TochangetheGlobalLightsettings,chooseLayer>LayerStyle>GlobalLight.
Angledeterminesthelightingangleatwhichtheeffectisappliedtothelayer.Distancedeterminestheoffsetdistanceforashadoworsatineffect.Spreaddetermineshow
![Page 104: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
graduallytheshadowfadestowardtheedges.Sizedetermineshowfartheshadowextends.
Photoshopaddsadropshadowtothe“IslandParadise”textintheimage.
4.ClickOKtoacceptthesettingsandclosetheLayerStyledialogbox.
PhotoshopneststhelayerstyleintheIslandParadiselayer.FirstitlistsEffects,andthenthelayerstylesappliedtothelayer.Aneyeicon( )appearsnexttotheeffectcategoryandnexttoeacheffect.Toturnoffaneffect,clickitseyeicon.Clickthevisibilitycolumnagaintorestoretheeffect.Tohidealllayerstyles,clicktheeyeiconnexttoEffects.Tocollapsethelistofeffects,clickthearrownexttothelayer.
5.MakesurethateyeiconsappearforbothitemsnestedintheIslandParadiselayer.
6.PressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS),anddragtheEffectslineorthefxsymbol( )ontotheHAWAIIlayer.
TheDropShadowlayerstyleisappliedtotheHAWAIIlayer,copyingthesettingsyouappliedtotheIslandParadiselayer.Nowyou’lladdagreenstrokearoundthewordHAWAII.
![Page 105: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
TooltipsfromthePhotoshopevangelist
JulieanneKostisanofficialAdobePhotoshopevangelist.
Blendingeffects
Blendinglayersinadifferentorderorondifferentgroupschangestheeffect.Youcanapplyablendingmodetoanentirelayergroupandgetaverydifferentresultthanifyouapplythesameblendingmodetoeachofthelayersindividually.Whenablendingmodeisappliedtoagroup,Photoshoptreatsthegroupasasinglemergedobjectandthenappliestheblendingmode.Experimentwithblendingmodestogettheeffectyouwant.
7.SelecttheHAWAIIlayerintheLayerspanel,clicktheAddALayerStylebutton()atthebottomofthepanel,andthenchooseStrokefromthepop-upmenu.
8.IntheStructureareaoftheLayerStylesdialogbox,specifythefollowingsettings:
•Size:4px
•Position:Outside
![Page 106: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
•BlendMode:Normal
•Opacity:100%
•Color:Green(Selectashadethatgoeswellwiththeoneyouusedforthe“IslandParadise”text.)
9.ClickOKtoapplythestroke.
Nowyou’lladdadropshadowandasatinsheentotheflower.
10.SelecttheFlowerlayer,andchooseLayer>LayerStyle>DropShadow.ThenchangethefollowingsettingsintheStructurearea:
•Opacity:60%
•Distance:13px
•Spread:9%.
•MakesureUseGlobalLightisselected,andthattheBlendModeisMultiply.DonotclickOK.
![Page 107: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
11.WiththeLayerStyledialogboxstillopen,clickthewordSatinonthelefttoselectitanddisplayitsoptions.ThenmakesureInvertisselected,andapplythefollowingsettings:
•Color(nexttoBlendMode):Fuchsia(chooseacolorthatcomplementstheflowercolor)
•Opacity:20%
•Distance:22px
Note
BesuretoclickthewordSatin.Ifyouclickonlythecheckbox,Photoshopappliesthelayerstylewithitsdefaultsettings,butyouwon’tseetheoptions.
TheSatinlayereffectappliesinteriorshadingtocreateasatinyfinish.Thecontourcontrolstheshapeoftheeffect;Invertflipsthecontourcurve.
![Page 108: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
Extracredit
Usinganeffectmorethanonceinalayerstyle
Agreatwaytoaddvisualimpacttoadesignelementistoapplymultipleinstancesofeffectssuchasstrokes,glows,orshadows.Youdon’thavetoduplicatelayerstodothis,becauseyoucanapplymultipleinstancesofaneffectinsidetheLayerStylesdialogbox.
1.Open04End.psdinyourLesson04folder.
2.IntheLayerspanel,double-clicktheDropShadoweffectappliedtotheHAWAIIlayer.
3.Clickthe+buttonnexttotheDropShadoweffect,andselectthesecondDropShadoweffect.
Nowforthefunpart!Youcanadjustyourseconddropshadowtochangeoptionssuchascolor,size,andopacity.
4.IntheDropShadowoptions,clickthecolorswatch,movethepointeroutsidetheLayerStyledialogboxsothatthepointerchangesintoaneyedropper,andclickthebottomflowertosampleitspinkcolor.ThenmatchtheDropShadowsettingsasshownbelow,andclickOK.
![Page 109: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
5.ThenewpinkdropshadowhelpstheHAWAIItextpopoffthepage.
12.ClickOKtoapplybothlayerstyles.
AddinganadjustmentlayerAdjustmentlayerscanbeaddedtoanimagetoapplycolorandtonaladjustmentswithoutpermanentlychangingthepixelvaluesintheimage.Forexample,ifyouaddaColorBalanceadjustmentlayertoanimage,youcanexperimentwithdifferentcolorsrepeatedly,becausethechangeoccursonlyontheadjustmentlayer.Ifyoudecidetoreturntotheoriginalpixelvalues,youcanhideordeletetheadjustmentlayer.
You’veusedadjustmentlayersinotherlessons.Here,you’lladdaHue/Saturationadjustmentlayertochangethecolorofthepurpleflower.Anadjustmentlayeraffectsalllayersbelowitintheimage’sstackingorderunlessaselectionisactivewhenyoucreateitoryoucreateaclippingmask.
1.SelecttheFlower2layerintheLayerspanel.
2.ClicktheHue/SaturationiconintheAdjustmentspaneltoaddaHue/Saturationadjustmentlayer.
![Page 110: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
3.InthePropertiespanel,applythefollowingsettings:
•Hue:43
•Saturation:19
•Lightness:0
ThechangesaffecttheFlower2,PineappleCopy,Pineapple,Clouds,andBackgroundlayers.Theeffectisinteresting,butyouwanttochangeonlytheFlower2layer.
Note
Besuretoclickthelayername,notthethumbnail,toseetheappropriatecontextmenu.
4.Right-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS)thelayernameontheHue/Saturationadjustmentlayer,andchooseCreateClippingMask.
AnarrowappearsintheLayerspanel,indicatingthattheadjustmentlayerappliesonlytotheFlower2layer.You’lllearnmoreaboutclippingmasksinLessons6and7.
UpdatinglayereffectsLayereffectsareautomaticallyupdatedwhenyoumakechangestoalayer.Youcaneditthetextandwatchhowthelayereffecttracksthechange.
![Page 111: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
1.SelecttheIslandParadiselayerintheLayerspanel.
2.IntheToolspanel,selecttheHorizontalTypetool( ).
3.Intheoptionsbar,setthefontsizeto32points,andpressEnterorReturn.
Althoughyoudidn’tselectthetextbydraggingtheTypetool(asyouwouldhavetodoinawordprocessingprogram),“IslandParadise”nowappearsin32-pointtype.
Tip
YoucansearchforlayersintheLayerspanelbylayertype,layername,effect,mode,attribute,andcolor.Youcanalsodisplayonlytheselectedlayers:chooseSelect>IsolateLayers,orchooseSelectedfromtheKindmenuintheLayerspaneltoenterIsolationMode.
4.UsingtheHorizontalTypetool,clickbetween“Island”and“Paradise,”andtypeof.
Asyoueditthetext,thelayerstylesareappliedtothenewtext.
Note
Youdon’thavetoclicktheCommitAnyCurrentEditsbuttonaftermakingthetextedits,becauseselectingtheMovetoolhasthesameeffect.
5.Youdon’tactuallyneedtheword“of,”sodeleteit.
6.SelecttheMovetool( ),anddrag“IslandParadise”tocenteritbeneaththeword“HAWAII.”
7.ChooseFile>Save.
AddingaborderTheHawaiipostcardisnearlydone.Theelementsarealmostallarrangedcorrectlyinthecomposition.You’llfinishupbypositioningthepostmarkandthenaddingawhitepostcardborder.
1.SelectthePostagelayer,andthenusetheMovetool( )todragittothemiddle
![Page 112: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
rightoftheimage,asintheillustration.
2.SelecttheIslandParadiselayerintheLayerspanel,andthenclicktheCreateANewLayerbutton( )atthebottomofthepanel.
3.ChooseSelect>All.
4.ChooseSelect>Modify>Border.IntheBorderSelectiondialogbox,type10pixelsfortheWidth,andclickOK.
A10-pixelborderisselectedaroundtheentireimage.Now,you’llfillitwithwhite.
5.SelectwhitefortheForegroundColor,andthenchooseEdit>Fill.
6.IntheFilldialogbox,chooseForegroundColorfromtheContentsmenu,andclickOK.
7.ChooseSelect>Deselect.
8.Double-clicktheLayer1nameintheLayerspanel,andrenamethelayerBorder.
![Page 113: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
FlatteningandsavingfilesWhenyoufinisheditingallthelayersinyourimage,youcanmergeorflattenlayerstoreducethefilesize.Flatteningcombinesallthelayersintoasinglebackgroundlayer.However,youcannoteditlayersonceyou’veflattenedthem,soyoushouldn’tflattenanimageuntilyouarecertainthatyou’resatisfiedwithallyourdesigndecisions.RatherthanflatteningyouroriginalPSDfiles,it’sagoodideatosaveacopyofthefilewithitslayersintact,incaseyouneedtoeditalayerlater.
Toappreciatewhatflatteningdoes,noticethetwonumbersforthefilesizeinthestatusbaratthebottomoftheimagewindow.Thefirstnumberrepresentswhatthefilesizewouldbeifyouflattenedtheimage.Thesecondnumberrepresentsthefilesizewithoutflattening.Thislessonfile,ifflattened,wouldbe2–3MB,butthecurrentfileismuchlarger.Soflatteningiswellworthitinthiscase.
Note
Ifthesizesdonotappearinthestatusbar,clickthestatusbarpop-upmenuarrow,andchooseDocumentSizes.
1.SelectanytoolbuttheTypetool( ),tobesurethatyou’renotintext-editingmode.ThenchooseFile>Save(ifitisavailable)tobesurethatallyourchangeshavebeensavedinthefile.
2.ChooseImage>Duplicate.
![Page 114: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
3.IntheDuplicateImagedialogbox,namethefile04Flat.psd,andclickOK.
4.Leavethe04Flat.psdfileopen,butclosethe04Working.psdfile.
5.ChooseFlattenImagefromtheLayerspanelmenu.
Onlyonelayer,namedBackground,remainsintheLayerspanel.
6.ChooseFile>Save.EventhoughyouchoseSaveratherthanSaveAs,theSaveAsdialogboxappears.
7.MakesurethelocationistheLessons/Lesson04folder,andthenclickSavetoacceptthedefaultsettingsandsavetheflattenedfile.
Youhavesavedtwoversionsofthefile:aone-layer,flattenedcopyaswellastheoriginalfile,inwhichallthelayersremainintact.
You’vecreatedacolorful,attractivepostcard.ThislessononlybeginstoexplorethevastpossibilitiesandtheflexibilityyougainwhenyoumastertheartofusingPhotoshoplayers.You’llgetmoreexperienceandtryoutdifferenttechniquesforlayersinalmosteverychapterasyoumoveforwardinthisbook.
Tip
Ifyouwanttoflattenonlysomeofthelayersinafile,clicktheeyeiconstohidethelayersyoudon’twanttoflatten,andthenchooseMergeVisiblefromtheLayerspanelmenu.
![Page 115: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
Aboutlayercomps
Layercompsprovideone-clickflexibilityinswitchingbetweendifferentviewsofamultilayeredimagefile.AlayercompissimplyadefinitionofthesettingsintheLayerspanel.Onceyou’vedefinedalayercomp,youcanchangeasmanysettingsasyoupleaseintheLayerspanelandthencreateanotherlayercomptopreservethatconfigurationoflayerproperties.Then,byswitchingfromonelayercomptoanother,youcanquicklyreviewthetwodesigns.Thebeautyoflayercompsbecomesapparentwhenyouwanttodemonstrateanumberofpossibledesignarrangements.Whenyou’vecreatedafewlayercomps,youcanreviewthedesignvariationswithouthavingtotediouslyselectanddeselecteyeiconsorchangesettingsintheLayerspanel.
Say,forexample,thatyouaredesigningabrochure,andyou’reproducingaversioninEnglishaswellasinFrench.YoumighthavetheFrenchtextononelayer,andtheEnglishtextonanotherinthesameimagefile.Tocreatetwodifferentlayercomps,youwouldsimplyturnonvisibilityfortheFrenchlayerandturnoffvisibilityfortheEnglishlayer,andthenclicktheCreateNewLayerCompbuttonintheLayerCompspanel.Thenyou’ddotheinverse—turnonvisibilityfortheEnglishlayerandturnoffvisibilityfortheFrenchlayer,andclicktheCreateNewLayerCompbutton—tocreateanEnglishlayercomp.Toviewthedifferentlayercomps,clicktheLayerCompboxforeachcompintheLayerCompspanelinturn.
Layercompscanbeanespeciallyvaluablefeaturewhenthedesignisinfluxorwhenyouneedtocreatemultipleversionsofthesameimagefile.Ifsomeaspectsneedtostayconsistentamonglayercomps,youcanchangethevisibility,position,orappearanceofonelayerinalayercompandthensyncittoseethatchangereflectedinalltheotherlayercomps.
Extracredit
Mergingphotos
TaketheblinkingandbadposesoutofanotherwisegreatfamilyportraitwiththeAuto-AlignLayersfeature.
1.OpenFamilyPhoto.psdinyourLesson04folder.
2.IntheLayerspanel,turnLayer2onandofftoseethetwosimilarphotos.Whenbothlayersarevisible,Layer2showsthetallmaninthecenterblinking,andthetwogirlsinthefrontlookingaway.
![Page 116: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
You’llalignthetwophotos,andthenusetheErasertooltobrushoutthepartsofthephotoonLayer2thatyouwanttoimprove.
3.Makebothlayersvisible,andShift-clicktoselectthem.ChooseEdit>Auto-AlignLayers;clickOKtoacceptthedefaultAutoposition.ToggletheeyeiconnexttoLayer2offandontoseethatthelayersareperfectlyaligned.
Nowforthefunpart!You’llbrushoutthephotowhereyouwanttoimproveit.
4.SelecttheErasertoolintheToolspanel,andpickasoft,45-pixelbrushintheoptionsbar.SelectLayer2,andstartbrushinginthecenteroftheblinkingman’sheadtorevealthesmilingfacebelow.
5.UsetheErasertoolonthetwogirlslookingaway,revealingtheimagebelow,wheretheylookintothecamera.
![Page 117: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
You’vecreatedanaturalfamilysnapshot.
Reviewquestions1.Whatistheadvantageofusinglayers?
2.Whenyoucreateanewlayer,wheredoesitappearintheLayerspanelstack?
3.Howcanyoumakeartworkononelayerappearinfrontofartworkonanotherlayer?
4.Howcanyouapplyalayerstyle?
5.Whenyou’vecompletedyourartwork,whatcanyoudotominimizethefilesizewithoutchangingthequalityordimensions?
Reviewanswers1.Layersletyoumoveandeditdifferentpartsofanimageasdiscreteobjects.Youcanalsohideindividuallayersasyouworkonotherlayers.
2.Anewlayeralwaysappearsimmediatelyabovetheactivelayer.
3.YoucanmakeartworkononelayerappearinfrontofartworkonanotherlayerbydragginglayersupordownthestackingorderintheLayerspanel,orbyusingtheLayer>Arrangesubcommands—BringToFront,BringForward,SendToBack,andSendBackward.However,youcan’tchangethelayerpositionofabackgroundlayer.
4.Toapplyalayerstyle,selectthelayer,andthenclicktheAddALayerStylebuttonintheLayerspanel,orchooseLayer>LayerStyle>[style].
![Page 118: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
5.Tominimizefilesize,youcanflattentheimage,whichmergesallthelayersontoasinglebackground.It’sagoodideatoduplicateimagefileswithlayersintactbeforeyouflattenthem,incaseyouhavetomakechangestoalayerlater.
![Page 119: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
5.QuickFixes
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Removeredeye.
•Brightenanimage.
•Combineimagestocreateapanorama.
•BlurthebackgroundofanimageusingIrisBlur.
•Mergetwoimagestoextenddepthoffield.
•Applyopticallenscorrectiontoadistortedimage.
•Moveanobjectseamlessly.
•UsePerspectiveWarptoplaceanobjectintoanimagewithadifferentperspective.
Thislessonwilltakeaboutanhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson05projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 120: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
SometimesjustoneortwoclicksinPhotoshopcanturnanimagefromso-so(orworse)toawesome.Quickfixesgetyoutheresultsyouwantwithoutalotoffuss.
GettingstartedNoteveryimagerequiresacomplicatedmakeoverusingadvancedfeaturesinPhotoshop.Infact,onceyou’refamiliarwithPhotoshop,youcanoftenimproveanimagequickly.Thetrickistoknowwhat’spossibleandhowtofindwhatyouneed.
Inthislesson,you’llmakequickfixestoseveralimagesusingavarietyoftoolsandtechniques.Youcanusethesetechniquesindividually,orteamthemupwhenyou’reworkingwithanimagethatneedsjustalittlemorehelp.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
![Page 121: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
ImprovingasnapshotIfyou’resharingasnapshotwithfamilyandfriends,youmaynotneedittolookprofessional.Butyouprobablydon’twantglowingeyes,anditwouldbegoodifthepictureisn’ttoodarktoshowimportantdetail.Photoshopgivesyouthetoolstomakequickchangestoasnapshot.
CorrectingredeyeRedeyeoccurswhentheretinaofasubject’seyeisreflectedbythecameraflash.Itcommonlyoccursinphotographstakeninadarkroom,becausethesubject’sirisesarewideopen.Fortunately,redeyeiseasytofixinPhotoshop.Inthisexercise,youwillremovetheredeyefromtheboy’seyesintheportrait.
You’llstartbyviewingthebeforeandafterimagesinAdobeBridge.
1.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
2.IntheFavoritespanelinBridge,clicktheLessonsfolder.Then,intheContentpanel,double-clicktheLesson05foldertoopenit.
3.Adjustthethumbnailslider,ifnecessary,sothatyoucanseethethumbnailpreviewsclearly.ThenlookattheBoy_Start.jpgandBoy_End.psdfiles.
Note
Ifyouhaven’tinstalledBridge,you’llbepromptedtodosowhenyouchooseBrowseInBridge.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
Notonlydoesredeyemakeanordinarypersonoranimalappearsinister,butitcandistractfromthesubjectoftheimage.It’seasytocorrectredeyeinPhotoshop,andyou’llquicklylightenthisimagetoo.
4.Double-clicktheBoy_start.jpgfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
5.ChooseFile>SaveAs,choosePhotoshopfortheFormat,namethefileBoy_Working.psd,andclickSave.
![Page 122: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
6.SelecttheZoomtool( ),andthendragtozoomintoseetheboy’seyes.IfScrubbyZoomisn’tselected,dragamarqueearoundtheeyestozoomin.
7.SelecttheRedEyetool( ),hiddenundertheSpotHealingBrushtool( ).
8.Intheoptionsbar,reducethePupilSizeto23%,andtheDarkenAmountto30%.
TheDarkenAmountspecifieshowdarkthepupilshouldbe.
9.Clickonthepupilintheboy’slefteye.Theredreflectiondisappears.
10.Clickonthepupilintheboy’srighteyetoremovetheredreflectionthere,too.
Iftheredreflectionisdirectlyoverthepupil,clickingthepupilremovesit.However,iftheredreflectionisslightlyoffthepupil,tryclickingthehighlightintheeyefirst.Youmayneedtotryafewdifferentspots,butit’seasytoundoandtryagain.
11.ChooseView>FitOnScreentoseetheentireimage.
12.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
BrighteninganimageTheboy’seyesnolongerglow,buttheimageisabitdark.InPhotoshop,youcanbrightenanimageinseveraldifferentways,asyou’vealreadyseen.Choosingonlyfromadjustmentlayers,youcantrymodifyingBrightness/Contrast,Levels,Curves,andExposure.Sometimesthebestoptionistotrythemallandseewhichoneyoulikebest.That’seasytodowithadjustmentlayers.Butwhenyou’rereallylookingforaquickfix,aCurvesadjustmentlayerisagreatwaytogo.
1.ClickCurvesintheAdjustmentspanel.
2.ClickAutotoseewhatPhotoshopapplies.Theimagebrightens.
![Page 123: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
3.ChooseLighterfromthePresetmenu.Photoshopappliessomesubtlechanges.
4.SelecttheWhitePointeyedropperintheCurvespanel,andthenclickinthewhiteareaofthedecalonthechild’sshirt.Thatbrightenstheimagenicely,andalsoimprovesthecontrast.
![Page 124: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
5.Ifyou’dliketocontinuetweakingthesettings,youcanmovethecurvemanually,orchooseablackorgraypoint.Toseehowyou’vebrightenedtheimage,hidetheCurveslayerandthenshowitagain.
6.Savethefile,andthencloseit.Thesnapshotisreadytoshare.
BlurringabackgroundTheinteractiveblursintheBlurGalleryletyoucustomizeablurasyoupreviewitonyourimage.You’lluseanirisblurtoblurthebackgroundinanimage,focusingtheviewer’sattentionontheegret.You’llapplytheblurasaSmartFiltersothatyoucanmodifyitlaterifyouwantto.
You’llstartbylookingatthestartandendfilesinBridge.
1.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
2.IntheFavoritespanelinBridge,clicktheLessonsfolder.Then,intheContentpanel,double-clicktheLesson05foldertoopenit.
3.ComparetheEgret_Start.jpgandEgret_End.psdthumbnailpreviews.
![Page 125: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
Inthefinalimage,theegretappearssharper,asitsreflectionandthegrassaroundithavebeenblurred.IrisBlur,oneoftheinteractiveblursintheBlurGallery,makesthetaskaneasyone—nomaskingrequired.
4.ReturntoPhotoshop,andchooseFile>OpenAsSmartObject.
5.SelecttheEgret_Start.jpgfileintheLesson05folder,andclickOKorOpen.
Photoshopopenstheimage.ThereisonelayerintheLayerspanel,andit’saSmartObject.
6.ChooseFile>SaveAs,choosePhotoshopfortheFormat,namethefileEgret_Working.psd,andclickSave.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
7.ChooseFilter>BlurGallery>IrisBlur.
Ablurellipseiscenteredonyourimage.Youcanadjustthelocationandscopeoftheblurbymovingthecenterpin,featherhandles,andellipsehandles.PhotoshopalsoopenstheBlurGallery,whichincludestheBlurTools,BlurEffects,andMotionBlurEffectspanels.
8.Dragthecenterpinsothatit’satthebottomofthebird’sbody.
9.Clicktheellipse,anddraginwardtotightenthefocusaroundthebird.
A.CenterB.Ellipse
C.FeatherhandleD.Focus
10.PressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)asyouclickanddragthefeatherhandlestomatchthoseinthefirstimagebelow.PressingAltorOptionletsyoudrageachhandleseparately.
11.Clickanddragonthefocusringtoreducetheamountofblurto5px,creatinga
![Page 126: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
gradualbutnoticeableblur.YoucanalsochangetheamountofblurbymovingtheBlursliderintheIrisBlurareaoftheBlurToolspanel.
12.ClickOKintheoptionsbartoapplytheblur.
Theblurmaybealittletoosubtle.You’lledittheblurtoincreaseitslightly.
13.Double-clicktheBlurGalleryintheEgretlayerintheLayerspaneltoopenitagain.Adjusttheblurto6px,andclickOKintheoptionsbartoapplyit.
BecauseyouappliedthefiltertoaSmartObject,youcanhideitoredititwithoutaffectingtheoriginalimage.
14.Savethefileandcloseit.
Theegretisaccentuatedbytheblur.
BlurGallery
TheBlurGalleryincludesfiveinteractiveblurs:FieldBlur,IrisBlur,Tilt-Shift,PathBlur,andSpinBlur.Eachgivesyouon-imageselectivemotionblurtools,withaninitialblurpin.Youcancreateadditionalblurpinsbyclickingontheimage.Youcanapplyoneoracombinationofblurs,andyoucancreateastrobeeffectforpathandspinblurs.
FieldBlurappliesagradientblurtoareasoftheimage,definedbypinsyoucreateandsettingsyouspecifyforeach.WhenyoufirstapplyFieldBlur,apinisplacedinthecenteroftheimage.YoucanadjusttheblurrelativetothatpointbydraggingtheblurhandleorspecifyingavalueintheBlurToolspanel;youcanalsodragthepintoadifferentlocation.
![Page 127: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
Tilt-Shiftsimulatesanimagetakenwithatilt-shiftlens.Thisblurdefinesareasofsharpnessandthenfadestoablurattheedges.Youcanusethiseffecttosimulatephotosofminiatureobjects.
IrisBlursimulatesashallowdepth-of-fieldeffect,graduallyblurringeverythingoutsidethefocusring.Adjusttheellipsehandles,featherhandles,andbluramounttocustomizetheirisblur.
SpinBlurisaradial-styleblurmeasuredindegrees.Youcanchangethesizeandshapeoftheellipse,re-centertherotationpointbypressingAltorOptionasyouclickanddrag,andadjusttheblurangle.YoucanalsospecifytheblurangleintheBlurToolspanel.Multiplespinblurscanoverlap.
![Page 128: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
PathBlurcreatesmotionblursalongpathsyoudraw.Youcontroltheshapeandamountoftheblur.
WhenyoufirstapplyaPathBlur,adefaultpathappears.Dragtheendpointtorepositionit.Clickthecenterpointanddragtochangethecurve.Clicktoaddadditionalcurvepoints.Thearrowonthepathindicatestheblur’sdirection.
Youcanalsocreateamultiple-pointpathorashape.Blurshapesdescribethelocalmotionblurs,similartocamerashake(see“CameraShakeReduction”onpage134).TheSpeedsliderintheBlurToolspaneldeterminesthespeedforallthepathblurs.TheCenteredBluroptionensuresthattheblurshapeforanypixeliscenteredonthatpixel,resultinginmorestable-feelingmotionblurs;tomakethemotionappearmorefluid,deselectthisoption.
IntheEffectstabyouspecifythebokehparameterstocontroltheappearanceofblurredareas.LightBokehbrightenstheblurredareas;BokehColoraddsmorevividcolorstolightenedareasthataren’tblownouttowhite;LightRangedeterminestherangeoftonesthatthesettingsaffect.
Youcanaddastrobeeffecttospinandpathblurs.SelecttheMotionEffectstabtobringitspanelforward.TheStrobeStrengthsliderdetermineshowmuchblurshowsbetweenflashexposures(0%givesnostrobeeffect;100%givesfullstrobeeffectwithlittleblurbetweenexposures).StrobeFlashesdeterminesthenumberofexposures.
![Page 129: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
Applyingablurwillsmoothoutvisibledigitalimagenoiseorfilmgrainthat’sintheoriginalimage,andthismismatchbetweentheoriginalandblurredareascanmaketheblurappearartificial.YoucanusetheNoisetabtorestorenoiseorgrainsothatblurredareasmatchupwithunblurredareas.StartwiththeAmountslider,andthenusetheotherNoiseoptionstomatchthecharacteroftheoriginalgrain.IncreasetheColorvalueiftheoriginalhasvisiblecolornoise,andlowertheHighlightsvalueifyouneedtobalancethenoiselevelinthehighlightscomparedtotheshadows.
CreatingapanoramaSometimesavistaisjusttoolargeforasingleshot.Photoshopmakesiteasytocombinemultipleimagesintoapanoramasothatyourviewerscangetthefulleffect.
Onceagain,you’lltakealookattheendfilefirst,toseewhereyou’regoing.
1.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.
2.NavigatetotheLesson05folder,ifyou’renottherealready.Then,lookattheSkyline_End.psdthumbnailpreview.
Skyline_End.psd
You’llcombinefourshotsoftheSeattleskylineintoasinglewidepanoramaimagesothatviewersgetasenseofthewholescene.Creatingapanoramafrommultipleimagesrequiresonlyafewclicks.Photoshopdoestherest.
3.ReturntoPhotoshop.
![Page 130: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
Tip
YoucanalsoopenselectedimagesfromBridgedirectlyintoPhotomergebychoosingTools>Photoshop>Photomerge.
4.WithnofilesopeninPhotoshop,chooseFile>Automate>Photomerge.
5.IntheSourceFilesarea,clickBrowse,andnavigatetotheLesson05/FilesForPanoramafolder.
6.Shift-selectalltheimagesinthefolder,andclickOKorOpen.
7.IntheLayoutareaofthePhotomergedialogbox,selectPerspective.
8.AtthebottomofthePhotomergedialogbox,selectBlendImagesTogether,VignetteRemoval,GeometricDistortionCorrection,andContentAwareFillTransparentAreas.ThenclickOK.
BlendImagesTogetherblendsimagesbasedontheoptimalbordersbetweenthem,insteadofjustcreatingasimplerectangularblend.VignetteRemovalperformsexposurecompensationinimageswithdarkenededges.GeometricDistortionCorrectioncompensatesforbarrel,pincushion,orfisheyedistortion.ContentAwareFillTransparent
![Page 131: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
Areasautomaticallypatchestheemptyareasbetweenthemergedimageedgesandthesidesofthecanvas.
Photoshopcreatesthepanoramaimage.It’sacomplexprocess,soyoumayhavetowaitafewmomentswhilePhotoshopworks.Whenit’sfinished,you’llseethefullvistaintheimagewindowwithfivelayersintheLayerspanel.Thebottomfourlayersaretheoriginalfourimagesyouselected.Photoshopidentifiedtheoverlappingareasoftheimagesandmatchedthem,correctinganyangulardiscrepancies.Thetoplayer,containing“(merged)”inthelayername,isasinglepanoramaimageblendedfromalloftheimagesyouselected,combinedwithformerlyemptyareasfilledinbyContentAwareFill.Thoseareasareindicatedbytheselection.
Tip
IfyouwanttoseehowthepanoramalookswithouttheareascreatedbyContentAwareFill,hidethetoplayer.
![Page 132: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
GettingthebestresultswithPhotomerge
Ifyouknowyou’regoingtocreateapanoramawhenyoutakeyourshots,keepthefollowingguidelinesinmindtogetthebestresult.
Overlapimagesapproximately40%.YouwantenoughoverlapthatPhotomergecanassemblethepanoramabutnotsomuchthatitcan’tblendtheimages.
Useaconsistentfocallength.Ifyouuseazoomlens,keepthefocallengththesameforallthepicturesinthepanorama.
Useatripodifpossible.You’llgetthebestresultsifthecameraisatthesamelevelwhenyoutakeeachoftheshots.Atripodwitharotatingheadmakesthateasier.
Takethephotosfromthesameposition.Ifyou’renotusingatripodwitharotatinghead,trytostayinthesamepositionasyoutakethephotossothattheyaretakenfromthesameviewpoint.
Avoiddistortionlenses.TheycaninterferewithPhotomerge.(TheAutooptiondoesadjustforimagesyoutakewithfish-eyelenses,though.)
Usethesameexposure.Theimageswillblendmoregracefullyiftheyallhavethesameexposure.Forexample,eitheruseflashforalltheimagesornoneofthem.
Trydifferentlayoutoptions.Ifyoudon’tliketheresultsyougetwhenyoucreatethepanorama,tryagainusingadifferentlayoutoption.Often,Autoselectstheappropriateoption,butsometimesyou’llgetabetterimagewithoneoftheotheroptions.
9.ChooseSelect>Deselect.
10.ChooseLayer>FlattenImage.
11.ChooseFile>SaveAs.ChoosePhotoshopfortheFormat,andnamethefileSkyline_Working.psd.SavethefileintheLesson05folder.ClickSave.
Thepanoramalooksgreat,butit’salittledark.You’lladdaLevelsadjustmentlayertobrightenitalittlebit.
![Page 133: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
12.ClicktheLevelsiconintheAdjustmentspaneltoaddaLevelsadjustmentlayer.
13.SelecttheWhitePointeyedropper,andthenclickonawhiteareaoftheclouds.
Theskygetsbluer,andtheentireimagebrightens.
14.Saveyourwork.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogboxandclosethefile.
It’sthateasytocreateapanorama!
![Page 134: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
CorrectingimagedistortionTheLensCorrectionfilterfixescommoncameralensflaws,suchasbarrelandpincushiondistortion,chromaticaberration,andvignetting.Barreldistortionisalensdefectthatcausesstraightlinestobowouttowardtheedgesoftheimage.Pincushiondistortionistheoppositeeffect,causingstraightlinestobendinward.Chromaticaberrationappearsasacolorfringealongtheedgesofimageobjects.Vignettingoccurswhentheedgesofanimage,especiallythecorners,aredarkerthanthecenter.
Somelensesexhibitthesedefectsdependingonthefocallengthorthef-stopused.TheLensCorrectionfiltercanapplysettingsbasedonthecamera,lens,andfocallengththatwereusedtomaketheimage.Thefiltercanalsorotateanimageorfiximageperspectivecausedbytiltingacameraverticallyorhorizontally.Thefilter’simagegridmakesiteasierandmoreaccuratetomaketheseadjustmentsthanusingtheTransformcommand.
1.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.
2.NavigatetotheLesson05folderifyou’renotalreadythere,andthenlookattheColumns_Start.psdandColumns_End.psdthumbnailpreviews.
Inthiscase,theoriginalimageofaGreektempleisdistorted,withthecolumnsappearingtobebowed.Thisphotowasshotatarangethatwastooclosewithawide-anglelens.You’llquicklycorrectthelensbarreldistortion.
3.Double-clicktheColumns_Start.psdfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
4.ChooseFile>SaveAs.IntheSaveAsdialogbox,namethefileColumns_Working.psd,andsaveitintheLesson05folder.ClickOKifthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogboxappears.
5.ChooseFilter>LensCorrection.TheLensCorrectiondialogboxopens.
6.SelectShowGridatthebottomofthedialogbox,ifit’snotalreadyselected.
Analignmentgridoverlaystheimage,nexttooptionsforremovingdistortion,correcting
![Page 135: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
chromaticaberration,removingvignettes,andtransformingperspective.
TheLensCorrectiondialogboxincludesauto-correctionoptions.You’lladjustonesettingintheAutoCorrectiontabandthencustomizethesettings.
7.IntheCorrectionareaoftheAutoCorrectiontab,makesureAutoScaleImageisselected,andthatTransparencyisselectedfromtheEdgemenu.
8.SelecttheCustomtab.
9.IntheCustomtab,dragtheRemoveDistortionslidertoabout+52.00toremovethebarreldistortionintheimage.Alternatively,youcouldselecttheRemoveDistortiontool( )anddragintheimagepreviewareauntilthecolumnsarestraight.Theadjustmentcausestheimageborderstobowinward.However,becauseyouselectedAutoScaleImage,theLensCorrectionfilterautomaticallyscalestheimagetoadjusttheborders.
Tip
Watchthealignmentgridasyoumakethesechangessothatyoucanseewhentheverticalcolumnsarestraightenedintheimage.
10.ClickOKtoapplyyourchangesandclosetheLensCorrectiondialogbox.
![Page 136: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
Thecurvingdistortioncausedbythewide-anglelensandlowshootingangleiseliminated.
11.(Optional)Toseetheeffectofyourchangeinthemainimagewindow,pressCtrl+Z(Windows)orCommand+Z(MacOS)twicetoundoandredothefilter.
12.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourchanges,clickOKifthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogboxappears,andthenclosetheimage.
Thetemplelooksmuchmorestablenow!
![Page 137: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
AddingdepthoffieldWhenyou’reshootingaphoto,youoftenhavetochoosetofocuseitherthebackgroundortheforeground.Ifyouwanttheentireimagetobeinfocus,youcantaketwophotos—onewiththebackgroundinfocusandonewiththeforegroundinfocus—andthenmergethetwoinPhotoshop.
Becauseyou’llneedtoaligntheimagesexactly,it’shelpfultouseatripodtokeepthecamerasteady.Evenwithahandheldcamera,though,youcangetsomeamazingresults.You’lladddepthoffieldtoanimageofawineglassinfrontofabeach.
1.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.
2.NavigatetotheLesson05folder,ifyou’renottherealready,andthenlookattheGlass_Start.psdandGlass_End.psdthumbnailpreviews.
Thefirstimagehastwolayers.Dependingonwhichlayerisvisible,eithertheglassintheforegroundorthebeachinthebackgroundisinfocus.You’llextendthedepthoffieldtomakebothclear.
3.Double-clicktheGlass_Start.psdfiletoopenit.
4.ChooseFile>SaveAs.NamethefileGlass_Working.psd,andsaveitintheLesson05folder.ClickOKifthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogboxappears.
5.IntheLayerspanel,hidetheBeachlayer,sothatonlytheGlasslayerisvisible.Theglassisinfocus,butthebackgroundisblurred.Then,showtheBeachlayerandhidetheGlasslayer.Nowthebeachisinfocus,buttheglassisblurred.
![Page 138: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
You’llmergethelayers,usingthepartofeachlayerthatisinfocus.First,youneedtoalignthelayers.
6.Showbothlayersagain,andthenShift-clicktoselectbothofthem.
7.ChooseEdit>Auto-AlignLayers.
Becausetheseimageswereshotfromthesameangle,Autowillworkjustfine.
![Page 139: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
8.SelectAuto,ifitisn’talreadyselected.MakesureneitherVignetteRemovalnorGeometricDistortionisselected.ThenclickOKtoalignthelayers.
Nowthatthelayersareperfectlyaligned,you’rereadytoblendthem.
9.MakesurebothlayersarestillselectedintheLayerspanel.ThenchooseEdit>Auto-BlendLayers.
10.SelectStackImagesandSeamlessTonesAndColors,iftheyaren’talreadyselected.MakesureContentAwareFillTransparentAreasisnotselected,andthenclickOK.
11.Saveyourwork,andclosethefile.
Boththewineglassandthebeachbehinditareinfocus.
![Page 140: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
MovingobjectswiththeContent-AwareMovetoolYou’veusedthecontent-awarefeaturesinsomeprettyimpressivewaysinearlierlessons,andtofillintheskyinthepanoramaprojectinthislesson.Nowyou’llusetheContent-AwareMovetooltomovesomethinginanimage(inthiscase,aduck)andhavePhotoshopconvincinglyfillintheareawheretheitemyoumovedusedtobe.YoucanalsousetheContent-AwareMovetooltoextendaportionofanimage,suchasastandoftreesorfenceposts,seamlessly.
1.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.
2.NavigatetotheLesson05folder,ifyou’renottherealready,andthenlookattheDucks_Start.jpgandDucks_End.psdthumbnailpreviews.
You’llusetheContent-AwareMovetooltonudgethelastduckintoaclusterwithitscompanions.
3.Double-clicktheDucks_Start.jpgfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
4.ChooseFile>SaveAs,choosePhotoshopfortheformattype,andnamethenewfileDucks_Working.psd.ClickSave.
5.SelecttheContent-AwareMovetool( ),whichishiddenbeneaththeRedEyeRemovaltool( ).
6.Intheoptionsbar,chooseMovefromtheModemenu,andenter3intheStructurefield.
7.Drawaselectionmarqueearoundthethirdduck,withamarginlargeenoughtoincludethegrassanddirtaroundit.
8.Dragtheselectiontotheleft,slightlyabovethesecondduck,sothattheducksareclustered.
![Page 141: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
Whenyoureleasethemouse,thedraggedduckappearswithatransformationrectangleandhandles.Thesetransformationcontrolsgiveyouanopportunitytorotateandscalethecontent,butyoudon’tneedtodothatinthisstep.
9.ClicktheCommitTransformbuttonintheoptionsbar.
10.ChangetheStructuresettingto5,whichrequiresstricteradherencetothepattern,andobservehowtheimagechanges.ThenchangetheStructuresettingto1,whichresultsinamuchlooseradaptation.YoucanalsoexperimentwithdifferentColorsettings,from0to10.
Nowthatyou’vecommittedtothemove,Photoshopfillsintheareatheduckleftbehind.HowitcreatestheareadependsontheStructureandColorsettingsintheOptionsbar.Youcantrydifferentoptionswhiletheselectionremainsactive.
11.ChoosetheStructureandColoroptionsyouthinklookbest.ThenchooseSelect>Deselect.Savethefileandcloseit.
Thethreeducksareinatighterformationnow,andyoucan’ttellthatthethirdduckusedtobeinadifferentposition.
![Page 142: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
MoreontheContent-AwareMovetool
TheContent-AwareMovetoolisveryimpressivewhenyou’reworkingwithsomeimages,andlessimpressivewithothers.Forbestresults,useitwhenthebackgroundisconsistentenoughthatPhotoshopwillbeabletorecognizeandreplicateapattern.Intheimageofducks,thegrassanddirtarefairlyconsistentandrepetitive.Youcanalsotrymovingobjectswithbackgroundssuchasmeadows,solid-coloredwalls,sky,woodgrains,orwater.
It’sbesttoextendarchitecturalobjectsinphotosthathavebeenshotonaparallelplane,ratherthanatanangle.Ifyou’reworkingwithanimagethathasmultiplelayers,selectSampleAllLayersintheoptionsbartoincludethemallintheselection.
TheStructureandColoroptionsdefinehowcloselytheresultsreflecttheexistingimagepatterns.IntheStructuresettings,1istheloosestand5isthestrictest.TheColorsettingsrangefrom0(nocoloradaptation)to10(matchingthecolorascloselyaspossible).Experimentwiththeoptionswhiletheobjectisstillselectedtoseewhichgiveyouthebestresultsinaparticularimage.Youmaywanttohidetheselectionedges(chooseView>Show>SelectionEdgesorView>Extras)toseehowtheobjectintegratesintoitsnewposition.
Extracredit
TransformationswiththeContent-AwareMovetool
WiththeContent-AwareMovetool,youneedonlyafewquickstepstocreateacopyofthethistlethatcombinesseamlesslywiththebackgroundandisalsodifferentenoughthatitdoesn’tlooklikeanexactcopyoftheoriginal.
1.OpenThistle.psdinyourLesson05/Extra_Creditfolder.
2.SelecttheContent-AwareMovetool( ).
3.Intheoptionsbar,chooseExtendfromtheModemenu.ChoosingExtendduplicatesthethistle;ifyoujustwanttorepositionthesinglethistle,youwouldchooseMove.
4.Drawaselectionmarqueearoundthethistle,withamarginlargeenoughtoincludethegrassaroundit.
5.Dragtheselectiontotheleft,anddropitintheemptyareaofgrass.
6.Right-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS)thedraggedthistle,andchooseFlipHorizontal.
![Page 143: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
7.Dragthetoplefttransformationhandletomakethethistlesmaller.Ifyouthinkthecopyofthethistleshouldbefartherfromtheoriginal,positionthepointerinsidethetransformationrectangle(butnotovertheanchorpoint)anddragthethistlecopyslightlytotheleft.
8.PressEnterorReturntomakethetransformationspermanent,leavingthecontentselectedsoyoucanadjusttheStructureandColoroptions.
9.ChooseSelect>Deselect,andsaveyourchanges.
AdjustingperspectiveinanimageThePerspectiveWarpfeatureletsyouadjustthewayobjectsinyourimagerelatetothescene.Youcancorrectdistortions,changetheanglefromwhichanobjectappearstobeviewed,orshifttheperspectiveofanobjectsothatitmergessmoothlywithanewbackground.
UsingthePerspectiveWarpfeatureisatwo-stepprocess:definingtheplanesandadjustingthem.YoustartinLayoutmode,drawingquadstodefinetwoormoreplanes;it’sagoodideatoaligntheedgesofthequadssothattheyareparallelwiththelinesoftheoriginalobject.ThenyouswitchtoWarpmode,andmanipulatetheplanesyoudefined.
You’llusePerspectiveWarptomergeimageswithdifferentperspectives.
1.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.
2.NavigatetotheLesson05folder,ifyou’renottherealready,andthenlookattheBridge_Start.psdandBridge_End.psdthumbnailpreviews.
![Page 144: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
IntheBridge_Start.psdfile,theimageofthetrainhasbeencombinedwiththeimageofatrestlebridge,buttheirperspectivesdon’tmatch.Ifyou’reillustratingastoryaboutaflyingtrainthatismakingalandingonatrestlebridge,thismightbeperfect.Butifyouwantamorerealisticimage,you’llneedtoadjusttheperspectiveofthetraintoputitfirmlyonthetracks.You’llusePerspectiveWarptodojustthat.
3.Double-clicktheBridge_Start.psdfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
4.ChooseFile>SaveAs,andrenamethefileBridge_Working.psd.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
5.SelecttheTrainlayer.
ThetracksareontheBackgroundlayer.ThetrainisontheTrainlayer.BecausetheTrainlayerisaSmartObject,youcanapplyPerspectiveWarpandthenmodifytheresultsifyou’renotsatisfied.
6.ChooseEdit>PerspectiveWarp.Thisfeaturerequiresafairamountofprocessingpower.IfPerspectiveWarpisgrayedoutwhenyoutrytoselectit,makesureyouhaveacurrentvideocardandaminimumof512MBVRAM.
Asmallanimatedtutorialappears,showingyouhowtodrawaquad,whichdefinesaplane.
7.Watchtheanimation,andthencloseit.
Inthefirststepoftheprocess,youwanttoenclosetheobjectinquadsthatrepresentthecurrentplanesoftheobject.
8.Drawthequadforthesideofthetrain:Clickabovethetopofthesmokestack,drag
![Page 145: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
downtotherailroadtiebelowthefrontwheel,andthendragacrosstotheendofthecaboose.Theplaneiscurrentlyarectangle.
9.Dragasecondquadforthefrontofthetrain,draggingacrossthecowcatcheratthebottomandintothetreesatthetop.Dragittotherightuntilitattachestotheleftedgeofthefirstquad.
10.Dragthecornersoftheplanestomatchtheanglesofthetrain.Thebottomlineofthesideplaneshouldrunalongthebottomofthetrainwheels;thetopedgeshouldborderthetopofthecaboose.Thefrontplaneshouldmirrorthelinesofthecowcatcherandthetopofthelight.
Nowthatthequadsaredrawn,you’rereadyforthesecondstepintheprocess:warping.
11.ClickWarpintheoptionsbar.Closethetutorialboxthatshowsyouhowtowarptheplane.
12.ClicktheAutomaticallyStraightenNearVerticalLinesbutton,nexttoWarpintheoptionsbar.
Thismakesthetrainappearproperlyvertical,makingiteasiertoadjusttheperspectiveaccurately.
13.Dragthehandlestomanipulatetheplanes,movingthebackendofthetraindownandintoperspecivewiththetracks.Exaggeratetheperspectivetowardthecabooseforamoredramaticresult.
14.Warpotherpartsofthetrainasneeded.Youmayneedtoadjustthefrontofthetrain.Payattentiontothewheels;makesureyoudon’tdistortthemasyouwarptheperspective.
![Page 146: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
Thereisnopreciserightorwrongwaytoadjustperspective.Trustyoureyestotellyouwhenitlooksright.Rememberyoucanreturntotweakitagainlater,becauseyou’reapplyingPerspectiveWarpasaSmartFilter.
15.Whenyou’resatisfiedwiththeperspective,clicktheCommitPerspectiveWarpbuttonintheoptionsbar.
16.Tocomparethechangedimagewiththeoriginal,hidethePerspectiveWarpfilterintheLayerspanel.Thenshowthefilteragain.
Ifyouwanttomakefurtheradjustments,double-clickthePerspectiveWarpfilterintheLayerspanel.Youcancontinuetoadjusttheexistingplanes,orclickLayoutintheoptionsbartoreshapethem.
![Page 147: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
Changingtheperspectiveofabuilding
Intheexercise,youappliedPerspectiveWarptoonelayertochangeitsrelationshipwithanother.ButyoucanalsousePerspectiveWarptochangetheperspectiveofanobjectinrelationshiptoothersinthesamelayer.Forexample,youcanshifttheanglefromwhichyouviewabuilding.
Inthiscase,youapplyPerspectiveWarpthesameway:InLayoutmode,drawtheplanesoftheobjectyouwanttoaffect.InWarpmode,manipulatethoseplanes.Ofcourse,becauseyou’reshiftingangleswithinalayer,otherobjectsonthelayerwillmove,too,soyouneedtowatchforanyirregularities.
Inthisimage,astheperspectiveofthebuildingshifted,sodidtheperspectiveofthetreessurroundingit.
CameraShakeReduction
Evenwithasteadyhand,unintendedcameramotioncanoccurwithslowshutterspeedsorlongfocallengths.TheCameraShakeReductionfilterreducestheresultingcamerashake,givingyouasharperimage.
![Page 148: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
BeforeapplyingtheCameraShakeReductionfilter
You’llgetthebestresultsifyouapplythefiltertoaparticularpartofanimage,ratherthantheentireimage.Itcanbeespeciallyusefuliftexthasbecomeillegibleduetocamerashake.
TousetheCameraShakeReductionfilter,opentheimage,andchooseFilter>Sharpen>ShakeReduction.Thefilterautomaticallyanalyzestheimage,selectsaregionofinterest,andcorrectstheblur.UsetheDetailloupetoexaminethepreview.Thatmaybeallyouneedtodo.Ifso,clickOKtoclosetheShakeReductiondialogboxandapplythefilter.
AfterapplyingtheCameraShakeReductionfilter
Ifyouwanttomakefurtheradjustments,expandtheAdvancedareaofthedialogbox.Youcanchangetheregionofinterestoradjustitssize;viewandresizetheblurtrace,whichistheshapeandsizeofthecamerashakethatPhotoshopidentified;andadjusttheSmoothingandArtifactSuppressionvaluestocorrectnoiseandartifacts.Youcanevensavetheblurtracetousethesettingsonanotherimage.ForfullinformationabouttheCameraShakeReductionfilter,seePhotoshopHelp.
Reviewquestions1.Whatisredeye,andhowdoyoucorrectitinPhotoshop?
![Page 149: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
2.Howcanyoucreateapanoramafrommultipleimages?
3.DescribehowtofixcommoncameralensflawsinPhotoshop.Whatcausesthesedefects?
4.WhatconditionsprovidethebestresultswhenusingtheContent-AwareMovetool?
Reviewanswers1.Redeyeoccurswhentheretinasofasubject’seyesarereflectedbythecameraflash.TocorrectredeyeinPhotoshop,zoomintothesubject’seyes,selecttheRedEyetool,andthenclicktheeye.
2.Toblendmultipleimagesintoapanorama,chooseFile>Automate>Photomerge,selectthefilesyouwanttocombine,andclickOK.
3.TheLensCorrectionfilterfixescommoncameralensflaws,suchasbarrelandpincushiondistortion,inwhichstraightlinesbowouttowardstheedgesoftheimage(barrel)orbendinward(pincushion);chromaticaberration,whereacolorfringeappearsalongtheedgesofimageobjects;andvignettingattheedgesofanimage,especiallycorners,thataredarkerthanthecenter.Defectscanoccurfromincorrectlysettingthelens’sfocallengthorf-stop,orbytiltingthecameraverticallyorhorizontally.
4.TheContent-AwareMovetoolworksbestinimagesthathaveconsistentbackgroundssothatPhotoshopcanseamlesslyreplicatethepatterns.
![Page 150: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
6.MasksandChannels
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Createamasktoremoveasubjectfromabackground.
•Refineamasktoincludecomplexedges.
•Createaquickmasktomakechangestoaselectedarea.
•EditamaskusingthePropertiespanel.
•ManipulateanimageusingPuppetWarp.
•Saveaselectionasanalphachannel.
•ViewamaskusingtheChannelspanel.
•Loadachannelasaselection.
•Isolateachanneltomakespecificimagechanges.
Thislessonwilltakeaboutanhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson06projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 151: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
Photography©ImageSource,www.imagesource.comPROJECT:MAGAZINECOVERIMAGE
Usemaskstoisolateandmanipulatespecificpartsofanimage.Thecutoutportionofamaskcanbealtered,buttheareasurroundingthecutoutisprotectedfromchange.Youcancreateatemporarymasktouseonce,oryoucansavemasksforrepeateduse.
WorkingwithmasksandchannelsInPhotoshop,masksisolateandprotectpartsofanimage,justasmaskingtapeprotectswindowpanesortrimfrompaintwhenahouseispainted.Whenyoucreateamaskbasedonaselection,theareayouhaven’tselectedismasked,orprotectedfromediting.Withmasks,youcancreateandsavetime-consumingselectionsandthenusethemagain.Inaddition,youcanusemasksforothercomplexeditingtasks—forexample,toapplycolorchangesorfiltereffectstoanimage.
InPhotoshop,youcanmaketemporarymasks,calledquickmasks,oryoucancreatepermanentmasksandstorethemasspecialgrayscalechannelscalledalphachannels.Photoshopalsouseschannelstostoreanimage’scolorinformation.Unlikelayers,channelsdonotprint.YouusetheChannelspaneltoviewandworkwithalphachannels.
Akeyconceptinmaskingisthatblackhidesandwhitereveals.Asinlife,rarelyisanythingblackandwhite.Shadesofgraypartiallyhide,dependingonthegraylevels.
![Page 152: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
GettingstartedFirst,you’llviewtheimagethatyou’llcreateusingmasksandchannels.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
Note
IfBridgeisn’tinstalled,you’llbepromptedtoinstallitwhenyouchooseBrowseInBridge.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
4.ClicktheFavoritestabontheleftsideoftheBridgewindow.SelecttheLessonsfolder,andthendouble-clicktheLesson06folderintheContentpanel.
5.Studythe06End.psdfile.Toenlargethethumbnailsothatyoucanseeitmoreclearly,movethethumbnailslideratthebottomoftheBridgewindowtotheright.
Inthislesson,you’llcreateamagazinecover.Themodelforthecoverwasphotographedinfrontofadifferentbackground.You’llusemaskingandtheRefineMaskfeaturetoplacethemodelontheappropriatebackground.
6.Double-clickthe06Start.psdthumbnailtoopenitinPhotoshop.ClickOKifyouseeanEmbeddedProfileMismatchdialogbox.
CreatingamaskYou’llusetheQuickSelectiontooltocreatetheinitialmaskinordertoseparatethemodelfromthebackground.
1.ChooseFile>SaveAs,renamethefile06Working.psd,andclickSave.ClickOKifthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogboxappears.
Savingaworkingversionofthefileletsyoureturntotheoriginalifyouneedit.
2.SelecttheQuickSelectiontool( ).Intheoptionsbar,setupabrushwithasizeof15pxandhardnessof100%.
Tip
Forhelpmakingselections,refertoLesson3,“WorkingwithSelections.”
3.Dragtoselecttheman.It’sfairlyeasytoselecthisshirtandface,butthehairistrickier.Don’tworryiftheselectionisn’tperfect.You’llrefinethemaskinthenextexercise.
![Page 153: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
4.AtthebottomoftheLayerspanel,clicktheAddLayerMaskbutton( )tocreatealayermask.
![Page 154: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
Aboutmasksandmasking
Alphachannels,channelmasks,clippingmasks,layermasks,vectormasks—what’sthedifference?Insomecases,they’reinterchangeable:Achannelmaskcanbeconvertedtoalayermask,alayermaskcanbeconvertedtoavectormask,andviceversa.
Here’sabriefdescriptiontohelpyoukeepthemallstraight.Whattheyhaveincommonisthattheyallstoreselections,andtheyallletyoueditanimagenondestructively,soyoucanreturnatanytimetoyouroriginal.
•Analphachannel—alsocalledamaskorselection—isanextrachanneladdedtoanimage;itstoresselectionsasgrayscaleimages.Youcanaddalphachannelstocreateandstoremasks.
•Alayermaskislikeanalphachannel,butit’sattachedtoaspecificlayer.Alayermaskcontrolswhichpartofalayerisrevealedorhidden.ItappearsasablankthumbnailnexttothelayerthumbnailintheLayerspaneluntilyouaddcontenttoit;ablackoutlineindicatesthatit’sselected.
•Avectormaskisessentiallyalayermaskmadeupofvectors,notpixels.Resolution-independent,vectormaskshavecrispedgesandarecreatedwiththepenorshapetools.Theydon’tsupporttransparency,sotheiredgescan’tbefeathered.Theirthumbnailsappearthesameaslayermaskthumbnails.
•Aclippingmaskappliestoalayer.Itconfinestheinfluenceofaneffecttospecificlayers,ratherthantoeverythingbelowthelayerinthelayerstack.Usingaclippingmaskclipslayerstoabaselayer;onlythatbaselayerisaffected.Thumbnailsofaclippedlayerareindentedwitharight-anglearrowpointingtothelayerbelow.Thenameoftheclippedbaselayerisunderlined.
•Achannelmaskrestrictseditingtoaspecificchannel(forexample,aCyanchannelinaCMYKimage).Channelmasksareusefulformakingintricate,fringed,orwispy-edgedselections.Youcancreateachannelmaskbasedonadominantcolorinanimageorapronouncedcontrastinanisolatedchannel,forexample,betweenthesubjectandthebackground.
Theselectionbecomesapixelmask,anditappearsaspartofLayer0intheLayerspanel.Everythingoutsidetheselectionistransparent,representedbyacheckerboardpattern.
RefiningamaskThemaskisprettygood,buttheQuickSelectiontoolcouldn’tquitecaptureallofthemodel’shair.Themaskisalsoalittlechoppyaroundthecontoursoftheshirtandface.You’llsmooththemask,andthenfine-tunetheareaaroundthehair.
1.ChooseWindow>PropertiestoopenthePropertiespanel.
2.Ifitisn’talreadyselected,clickthemaskonLayer0intheLayerspanel.
![Page 155: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
3.InthePropertiespanel,clickMaskEdge.TheRefineMaskdialogboxopens.
4.IntheViewModeareaofthedialogbox,clickthearrownexttothepreviewwindow.ChooseOnBlackfromthepop-upmenu.
Themaskappearsagainstablackbackground,whichmakesiteasiertoseetheedgeofthewhiteshirtandtheface.
5.IntheAdjustEdgeareaofthedialogbox,movethesliderstocreateasmooth,unfeatherededgealongtheshirtandface.Theoptimalsettingsdependontheselectionyoucreated,butthey’llprobablybesimilartoours.WemovedtheSmoothsliderto15tocreateasmootheroutline,Contrastto40%tomakethetransitionsalongtheselectionbordermoreabrupt,andShiftEdgeto-8%tomovetheselectionborderinwardandhelpremoveunwantedbackgroundcolorsfromselectionedges.(AdjustingShiftEdgetoapositivenumbermovestheborderoutward.)
![Page 156: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
6.IntheOutputareaofthedialogbox,selectDecontaminateColors.ChooseNewLayerWithLayerMaskfromtheOutputTomenu.
DecontaminateColorsreplacescolorfringeswiththecoloroffullyselectedpixelsnearby.Becauseitchangespixelcolor,thisoptionrequiresyoutooutputtoanewlayerordocument.
7.SelecttheZoomtoolintheRefineMaskdialogbox,andthenclickthefacetozoominsoyoucanseeitsedgesmoreclearly.
8.SelecttheRefineRadiustool( )intheRefineMaskdialogbox.Useittopaintoutanywhitebackgroundthatremainsaroundthelipsandthenose.Presstheleftbracket([)todecreasethebrushsizeandtherightbracket(])toincreaseit.
![Page 157: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
TooltipsfromthePhotoshopevangelist
JulieanneKostisanofficialAdobePhotoshopevangelist.
Zoomtoolshortcuts
Oftenwheneditinganimage,you’llneedtozoomintoworkonadetailandthenzoomoutagaintoseethechangesincontext.Hereareseveralkeyboardshortcutsthatmakezoomingfasterandeasier.
•Withanytoolselected,pressCtrl(Windows)orCommand(MacOS)withtheplussign(+)tozoomin,orwiththeminussign(-)tozoomout.
•Double-clicktheZoomtoolintheToolspaneltoreturntheimageto100%view.
•WhenScrubbyZoomisselectedintheoptionsbar,justdragtheZoomtooltothelefttozoomoutordragittotherighttozoomin.
•PressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)tochangetheZoomIntooltotheZoomOuttool,andclicktheareaoftheimageyouwanttoreduce.EachAlt/Optionclickreducestheimagebythenextpresetincrement.
9.Whenyou’resatisfiedwiththemaskaroundtheface,clickOK.
Anewlayer,namedLayer0copy,appearsintheLayerspanel.You’llusethislayertoaddthespikestothemaskofthehair.
10.WithLayer0copyactive,clickMaskEdgeinthePropertiespaneltoopentheRefineMaskdialogboxagain.
11.FromtheViewpop-upmenu,chooseOnWhite.Theblackhairshowsupwellagainstthewhitematte.Ifnecessary,zoomoutorusetheHandtooltorepositiontheimagesothatyoucanseeallofthehair.
12.SelecttheRefineRadiustoolintheRefineMaskdialogbox.Pressthe]keytoincreasethesizeofthebrush.(Theoptionsbardisplaysthebrushsize;weused300pxatfirst.)Then,beginbrushingalongthetopofthehair,highenoughtoincludethespikes.
![Page 158: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
13.Pressthe[keyafewtimestodecreasethebrushsizebyabouthalf.Then,paintalongtherightsideofthehead,wherethehairisasolidcolor,topickupanysmall,finehairsthatprotrude.
Asyoupaint,Photoshoprefinesthemaskedge,includingthehair,buteliminatingmostofthebackground.Ifyouwerepaintingonalayermask,thebackgroundwouldbeincluded.TheRefineMaskfeatureisgood,butit’snotperfect.You’llcleanupanyareasofbackgroundthatareincludedwiththehair.
14.SelecttheEraseRefinementstool( ),hiddenbehindtheRefineRadiustoolintheRefineMaskdialogbox.Clickonceortwiceineachareawherebackgroundcolorshows.Whenyoueraseanarea,theRefineMaskfeatureerasessimilarcolors,cleaningupmoreofthemaskforyou.Becarefulnottoerasetherefinementsyoumadetothehairedge.YoucanundoasteporusetheRefineRadiustooltorestoretheedgeifnecessary.
15.SelectDecontaminateColors,andmovetheAmountsliderto85%.ChooseNewLayerWithLayerMaskfromtheOutputTomenu.ThenclickOK.
16.IntheLayerspanel,maketheMagazineBackgroundlayervisible.Themodelappearsinfrontofanorangepatternedbackground.
![Page 159: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
CreatingaquickmaskYou’llcreateaquickmasktochangethecoloroftheglassesframes.First,you’llcleanuptheLayerspanel.
1.HidetheMagazineBackgroundlayersoyoucanfocusonthemodel.ThendeletetheLayer0andLayer0copylayers.ClickYesorDeletetoconfirmdeletionofthelayersortheirmasks,ifprompted;youdonotneedtoapplythemasktothecurrentlayerbecauseLayer0copy2alreadyhasthemaskapplied.
2.Double-clicktheLayer0copy2layername,andrenameitModel.
3.ClicktheEditInQuickMaskModebuttonintheToolspanel.(Bydefault,youhavebeenworkinginStandardmode.)
InQuickMaskmode,aredoverlayappearsasyoumakeaselection,maskingtheareaoutsidetheselectionthewayarubylith,orredacetate,wasusedtomaskimagesintraditionalprintshops.Youcanapplychangesonlytotheunprotectedareathatisvisibleandselected.NoticethatthehighlightfortheselectedlayerintheLayerspanelappearsgrayinsteadofblue,indicatingyou’reinQuickMaskmode.
4.IntheToolspanel,selecttheBrushtool( ).
5.Intheoptionsbar,makesurethatthemodeisNormal.OpentheBrushpop-uppanel,andselectasmallbrushwithadiameterof13px.Clickoutsidethepaneltocloseit.
6.Painttheearpieceoftheglassesframes.Theareayoupaintwillappearred,creatingamask.
7.ContinuepaintingwiththeBrushtooltomasktheearpieceoftheframesandtheframearoundthelenses.Reducethebrushsizetopaintaroundthelenses.Don’tworryaboutthehairoverlappingtheearpiece;goaheadandpaintoverit.
![Page 160: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
InQuickMaskmode,PhotoshopautomaticallydefaultstoGrayscalemode,withaforegroundcolorofblackandabackgroundcolorofwhite.WhenusingapaintingoreditingtoolinQuickMaskmode,keeptheseprinciplesinmind:
•Paintingwithblackaddstothemask(theredoverlay)anddecreasestheselectedarea.
•Paintingwithwhiteerasesthemask(theredoverlay)andincreasestheselectedarea.
•Paintingwithgraypartiallyaddstothemask.
8.ClicktheEditInStandardModebuttontoexitQuickMaskMode.
Theunmaskedareaisselected.Unlessyousaveaquickmaskasamorepermanentalpha-channelmask,Photoshopdiscardsthetemporarymaskonceitisconvertedtoaselection.
9.ChooseSelect>Inversetoselecttheareayouoriginallymasked.
10.ChooseImage>Adjustments>Hue/Saturation.
11.IntheHue/Saturationdialogbox,changetheHueto70.Thenewgreencolorfillstheglassesframe.ClickOK.
12.ChooseSelect>Deselect.
13.Saveyourworksofar.
![Page 161: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
ManipulatinganimagewithPuppetWarpThePuppetWarpfeaturegivesyouflexibilityinmanipulatinganimage.Youcanrepositionareas,suchashairoranarm,justasyoumightpullthestringsonapuppet.Placepinswhereveryouwanttocontrolmovement.You’llusePuppetWarptotiltthemodel’sheadback,soheappearstobelookingup.
1.Zoomoutsoyoucanseetheentiremodel.
2.WiththeModellayerselectedintheLayerspanel,chooseEdit>PuppetWarp.
Ameshappearsoverthevisibleareasinthelayer—inthiscase,themeshappearsoverthemodel.You’llusethemeshtoplacepinswhereyouwanttocontrolmovement(ortoensurethereisnomovement).
3.Clickaroundtheedgesoftheshirt.Eachtimeyouclick,PuppetWarpaddsapin.Approximately10pinsshouldwork.
Thepinsyou’veaddedaroundtheshirtwillkeepitinplaceasyoutiltthehead.
4.Selectthepinatthenapeoftheneck.Awhitedotappearsinthecenterofthepintoindicatethatit’sselected.
5.PressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS).Alargercircleappearsaroundthepinandacurveddoublearrowappearsnexttoit.ContinuepressingAltorOptionasyoudragthepointertorotatetheheadbackwards.Youcanseetheangleofrotationintheoptionsbar;youcanenter135theretorotatetheheadback.
Note
BecarefulnottoAlt-clickorOption-clickthedotitself,oryou’lldeletethepin.
![Page 162: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
6.Whenyou’resatisfiedwiththerotation,clicktheCommitPuppetWarpbutton( )intheoptionsbar,orpressEnterorReturn.
7.Saveyourworksofar.
WorkingwithchannelsJustasdifferentinformationinanimageisstoredondifferentlayers,channelsalsoletyouaccessspecifickindsofinformation.Alphachannelsstoreselectionsasgrayscaleimages.Colorinformationchannelsstoreinformationabouteachcolorinanimage;forexample,anRGBimageautomaticallyhasred,green,blue,andcompositechannels.
Toavoidconfusingchannelsandlayers,thinkofchannelsascontaininganimage’scolorandselectioninformation;thinkoflayersascontainingpaintingandeffects.
You’lluseanalphachanneltocreateashadowforthemodel.Then,you’llconverttheimagetoCMYKmodeandusetheBlackchanneltoaddcolorhighlightstothehair.
UsinganalphachanneltocreateashadowYou’vealreadycreatedamaskofthemodel.Tocreateashadow,youwanttoessentiallyduplicatethatmaskandthenshiftit.You’lluseanalphachanneltomakethatpossible.
1.IntheLayerspanel,Ctrl-click(Windows)orCommand-click(MacOS)thelayericonintheModellayer.Themaskedareaisselected.
2.ChooseSelect>SaveSelection.IntheSaveSelectiondialogbox,makesureNewischosenintheChannelmenu.ThennamethechannelModelOutline,andclickOK.
![Page 163: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
NothingchangesintheLayerspanelorintheimagewindow.However,anewchannelnamedModelOutlinehasbeenaddedtotheChannelspanel.
3.ClicktheCreateANewLayericon( )atthebottomoftheLayerspanel.DragthenewlayerbelowtheModellayer,sothattheshadowwillbebelowtheimageofthemodel.Thendouble-clickthenewlayer’sname,andrenameitShadow.
4.WiththeShadowlayerselected,chooseSelect>RefineEdge.IntheRefineEdgedialogbox,movetheShiftEdgesliderto+36%.ThenclickOK.
5.ChooseEdit>Fill.IntheFilldialogbox,chooseBlackfromtheContentsmenu,andthenclickOK.
TheShadowlayerdisplaysafilled-inblackoutlineofthemodel.Shadowsaren’tusuallyasdarkasthepersonthatcaststhem.You’llreducethelayeropacity.
6.IntheLayerspanel,changethelayeropacityto30%.
![Page 164: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
Theshadowisinexactlythesamepositionasthemodel,whereitcan’tbeseen.You’llshiftit.
7.ChooseSelect>Deselecttoremovetheselection.
8.ChooseEdit>Transform>Rotate.Rotatetheshadowbyhand,orenter-15°intheRotatefieldintheoptionsbar.Thendragtheshadowtotheleft,orenter845intheXfieldintheoptionsbar.ClicktheCommitTransformbutton( )intheoptionsbar,orpressEnterorReturn,toacceptthetransformation.
9.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
AdjustinganindividualchannelYou’realmostdonewiththemagazinecoverimage.Allthatremainsistoaddcolorhighlightstothemodel’shair.You’llconverttheimagetoCMYKmodesoyoucantakeadvantageoftheBlackchanneltodojustthat.
1.SelecttheModellayerintheLayerspanel.
2.ChooseImage>Mode>CMYKColor.ClickDon’tMergeinthedialogboxthatappears,becauseyouwanttokeepyourlayersintact.ClickOKifyou’repromptedaboutcolorprofiles.
3.Alt-click(Windows)orOption-click(MacOS)thevisibilityiconfortheModel
![Page 165: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
layertohidetheotherlayers.
Aboutalphachannels
IfyouworkinPhotoshopverylong,you’reboundtoworkwithalphachannels.It’sagoodideatoknowafewthingsaboutthem.
•Animagecancontainupto56channels,includingallcolorandalphachannels.
•Allchannelsare8-bitgrayscaleimages,capableofdisplaying256levelsofgray.
•Youcanspecifyaname,color,maskoption,andopacityforeachchannel.(Theopacityaffectsthepreviewofthechannel,nottheimage.)
•Allnewchannelshavethesamedimensionsandnumberofpixelsastheoriginalimage.
•Youcaneditthemaskinanalphachannelusingthepaintingtools,editingtools,andfilters.
•Youcanconvertalphachannelstospot-colorchannels.
4.SelecttheChannelstab.IntheChannelspanel,selecttheBlackchannel.ThenchooseDuplicateChannelfromtheChannelspanelmenu.NamethechannelHair,andclickOK.
Individualchannelsappearingrayscale.IfmorethanonechannelisvisibleintheChannelspanel,thechannelsappearincolor.
5.MaketheHairchannelvisible,andhidetheBlackchannel.ThenselecttheHairchannel,andchooseImage>Adjustments>Levels.
![Page 166: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
6.IntheLevelsdialogbox,adjustBlackto85,Midtonesto1,andWhiteto165.MovingtheBlackandWhitepointscreatescontrastinthehair.ClickOK.
7.WiththeHairchannelstillselected,chooseImage>Adjustments>Invert.Thechannelappearswhiteagainstablackbackground.
8.SelecttheBrushtool,andclicktheSwitchForegroundAndBackgroundColorsiconintheToolspaneltomaketheForegroundcolorblack.Thenpaintovertheglasses,eyes,andanythinginthechannelthatisn’thair.
9.ClicktheLoadChannelAsSelectioniconatthebottomoftheChannelspanel.
10.SelecttheLayerstab.IntheLayerspanel,selecttheModellayer.
![Page 167: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
11.ChooseSelect>RefineEdge.IntheRefineEdgedialogbox,movetheFeathersliderto1.2px,andthenclickOK.
12.ChooseImage>Adjustments>Hue/Saturation.SelectColorize,andthenmovetheslidersasfollows,andclickOK:
•Hue:230
•Saturation:56
•Lightness:11
13.ChooseImage>Adjustments>Levels.IntheLevelsdialogbox,movethesliderssothattheBlacksliderispositionedwheretheblackspeak,theWhitesliderwherethewhitespeak,andtheMidtonesinbetween.ThenclickOK.Weusedthevalues58,1.65,255,butyourvaluesmayvary.
![Page 168: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
14.IntheLayerspanel,maketheShadowandMagazineBackgroundlayersvisible.
15.ChooseSelect>Deselect.
16.ChooseFile>Save.
Yourmagazinecoverisreadytogo!
Reviewquestions1.Whatisthebenefitofusingaquickmask?
2.Whathappenstoaquickmaskwhenyoudeselectit?
3.Whenyousaveaselectionasamask,whereisthemaskstored?
4.Howcanyoueditamaskinachannelonceyou’vesavedit?
5.Howdochannelsdifferfromlayers?
Reviewanswers1.Quickmasksarehelpfulforcreatingquick,one-timeselections.Inaddition,usingaquickmaskisaneasywaytoeditaselectionusingthepaintingtools.
2.Thequickmaskdisappearswhenyoudeselectit.
3.Masksaresavedinchannels,whichcanbethoughtofasstorageareasforcolorand
![Page 169: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
selectioninformationinanimage.
4.Youcanpaintonamaskinachannelusingblack,white,andshadesofgray.
5.Channelsareusedasstorageareasforsavedselections.Unlessyouexplicitlydisplayachannel,itdoesnotappearintheimageorprint.Layerscanbeusedtoisolatevariouspartsofanimagesothattheycanbeeditedasdiscreteobjectswiththepaintingoreditingtoolsorothereffects.
![Page 170: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
7.TypographicDesign
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Useguidestopositiontextinacomposition.
•Makeaclippingmaskfromtype.
•Mergetypewithotherlayers.
•Previewfonts.
•Formattext.
•Distributetextalongapath.
•Controltypeandpositioningusingadvancedfeatures.
Thislessonwilltakelessthananhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson07projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 171: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
Photography©ImageSource,www.imagesource.comPROJECT:MAGAZINECOVERLAYOUT
Photoshopprovidespowerful,flexibletexttoolssoyoucanaddtypetoyourimageswithgreatcontrolandcreativity.
AbouttypeTypeinPhotoshopconsistsofmathematicallydefinedshapesthatdescribetheletters,numbers,andsymbolsofatypeface.Manytypefacesareavailableinmorethanoneformat,themostcommonformatsbeingType1orPostScriptfonts,TrueType,andOpenType(see“OpenTypeinPhotoshop”laterinthislesson).
WhenyouaddtypetoanimageinPhotoshop,thecharactersarecomposedofpixelsandhavethesameresolutionastheimagefile—zoominginoncharactersshowsjaggededges.However,Photoshoppreservesthevector-basedtypeoutlinesandusesthemwhenyouscaleorresizetype,saveaPDForEPSfile,orprinttheimagetoaPostScriptprinter.Asaresult,youcanproducetypewithcrisp,resolution-independentedges,applyeffectsandstylestotype,andtransformitsshapeandsize.
![Page 172: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
GettingstartedInthislesson,you’llworkonthelayoutforthecoverofatechnologymagazine.You’llstartwiththeartworkyoucreatedinLesson6:Thecoverhasamodel,hisshadow,andtheorangebackground.You’lladdandstylizetypeforthecover,includingwarpingthetext.
You’llstartthelessonbyviewinganimageofthefinalcomposition.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
Note
IfBridgeisnotinstalled,you’llbepromptedtodownloadandinstallit.Seepage3formoreinformation.
4.IntheFavoritespanelontheleftsideofBridge,clicktheLessonsfolder,andthendouble-clicktheLesson07folderintheContentpanel.
5.Selectthe07End.psdfile.Increasethethumbnailsizetoseetheimageclearlybydraggingthethumbnailslidertotheright.
You’llapplythetypetreatmentinPhotoshoptofinishthemagazinecover.AllofthetypecontrolsyouneedareavailableinPhotoshop,soyoudon’thavetoswitchtoanotherapplicationtocompletetheproject.
6.Double-clickthe07Start.psdfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
Note
ThoughthislessonstartswhereLesson6leftoff,usethe07Start.psdfile.We’veincludedapathandastickynoteinthestartfilethatwon’tbeinthe06Working.psdfileyousaved.
7.ChooseFile>SaveAs,renamethefile07Working.psd,andclickSave.
8.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
9.ChooseTypographyfromtheWorkspaceSwitcherintheoptionsbar.
![Page 173: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
TheTypographyworkspacedisplaystheCharacterandParagraphpanelsthatyou’lluseinthislesson,alongwiththeParagraphStyles,CharacterStyles,Glyphs,Layers,Channels,andPathspanels.
CreatingaclippingmaskfromtypeAclippingmaskisanobjectoragroupofobjectswhoseshapemasksotherartworksothatonlyareasthatliewithintheclippingmaskarevisible.Ineffect,youareclippingtheartworktoconformtotheshapeoftheobject(ormask).InPhotoshop,youcancreateaclippingmaskfromshapesorletters.Inthisexercise,you’lluselettersasaclippingmasktoallowanimageinanotherlayertoshowthroughtheletters.
AddingguidestopositiontypeThe07Working.psdfileincludesabackgroundlayer,whichwillbethefoundationforyourtypography.You’llstartbyzoominginontheworkareaandusingrulerguidestohelppositionthetype.
1.ChooseView>FitOnScreentoseethewholecoverclearly.
2.ChooseView>Rulerstodisplayrulersalongtheleftandtopbordersoftheimagewindow.
![Page 174: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
3.Dragaverticalguidefromtheleftrulertothecenterofthecover(4.25″).
AddingpointtypeNowyou’rereadytoaddtypetothecomposition.Youcancreatehorizontalorverticaltypeanywhereinanimage.Youcanenterpointtype(asingleletter,word,orline)orparagraphtype.Youwilldobothinthislesson.First,you’llcreatepointtype.
1.IntheLayerspanel,selecttheBackgroundlayer.
2.SelecttheHorizontalTypetool( ),and,intheoptionsbar,dothefollowing:
•Chooseaseriftypeface,suchasMinionProRegular,fromtheFontFamilypop-upmenu.
•Type144ptfortheSize,andpressEnterorReturn.
•ClicktheCenterTextbutton.
3.IntheCharacterpanel,changetheTrackingvalueto100.
TheTrackingvaluespecifiestheoverallspacebetweenletters,whichaffectsthedensityinalineoftext.
4.Clickonthecenterguideyouaddedtosetaninsertionpoint,andtypeDIGITALinallcapitalletters.ThenclicktheCommitAnyCurrentEditsbutton( )intheoptionsbar.
![Page 175: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
Note
Afteryoutype,youmustcommityoureditinginthelayerbyclickingtheCommitAnyCurrentEditsbuttonorswitchingtoanothertoolorlayer.YoucannotcommittocurrenteditsbypressingEnterorReturn;doingsomerelycreatesanewlineoftype.
Theword“DIGITAL”isaddedtothecover,anditappearsintheLayerspanelasanewtypelayernamedDIGITAL.Youcaneditandmanagethetypelayerasyouwouldanyotherlayer.Youcanaddorchangethetext,changetheorientationofthetype,applyanti-aliasing,applylayerstylesandtransformations,andcreatemasks.Youcanmove,restack,andcopyatypelayer,oredititslayeroptions,justasyouwouldforanyotherlayer.
Thetextisbigenough,butnotmodernenough,forthismagazine’sstyle.You’llapplyadifferentfont.
5.SelecttheHorizontalTypetool( ),andselectthe“DIGITAL”text.
6.OpentheFontFamilypop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.Movethecursoroverthefonts,eitherwiththemouseorusingarrowkeys.
Whenthecursorisoverafontname,Photoshopappliesthatfonttotheselectedtextsoyoucanpreviewthefontincontext.
7.SelectMyriadProSemibold,andthenclicktheCommitAnyCurrentEditsbutton()intheoptionsbar.
![Page 176: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
That’smuchmoreappropriate.
8.SelecttheMovetool,anddragthe“DIGITAL”texttomoveittothetopofthecover,ifit’snottherealready.
9.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
MakingaclippingmaskandapplyingashadowYouaddedthelettersinblack,thedefaulttextcolor.However,youwanttheletterstoappeartobefilledwithanimageofacircuitboard,soyou’llusetheletterstomakeaclippingmaskthatwillallowanotherimagelayertoshowthrough.
1.ChooseFile>Open,andopenthecircuit_board.tiffile,whichisintheLesson07folder.
2.ChooseWindow>Arrange>2-UpVertical.Thecircuit_board.tifand07Working.psdfilesappearonscreentogether.Clickthecircuit_board.tiffiletoensurethatit’stheactivewindow.
3.WiththeMovetoolselected,holddowntheShiftkeyasyoudragtheBackgroundlayerfromtheLayerspanelinthecircuit_board.tiffileontothecenterofthe07Working.psdfile.
PressingShiftasyoudragcentersthecircuit_board.tifimageinthecomposition.
Anewlayer—Layer1—appearsintheLayerspanelforthe07Working.psdfile.Thisnew
![Page 177: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
layercontainstheimageofthecircuitboard,whichwillshowthroughthetype.Butbeforeyoumaketheclippingmask,you’llresizethecircuitboardimage,asit’scurrentlytoolargeforthecomposition.
4.Closethecircuit_board.tiffilewithoutsavinganychangestoit.
5.Inthe07Working.psdfile,selectLayer1,andthenchooseEdit>Transform>Scale.
6.Grabacornerhandleontheboundingboxforthecircuitboard.PressAlt+Shift(Windows)orOption+Shift(MacOS)asyouresizeittoapproximatelythesamewidthastheareaoftext.
PressingShiftretainstheimage’sproportions;AltorOptionkeepsitcentered.
7.Repositionthecircuitboardsothattheimagecoversthetext,andpressEnterorReturntoconfirmthetransformation.
8.Double-clicktheLayer1name,andchangeittoCircuitBoard.ThenpressEnterorReturn,orclickawayfromthenameintheLayerspanel,toapplythechange.
9.SelecttheCircuitBoardlayer,ifitisn’talreadyselected,andchooseCreateClippingMaskfromtheLayerspanelmenu( ).
![Page 178: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
Tip
YoucanalsomakeaclippingmaskbyholdingdowntheAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)keyandclickingbetweentheCircuitBoardandDIGITALtypelayers.
ThecircuitboardnowshowsthroughtheDIGITALletters.AsmallarrowintheCircuitBoardlayerandtheunderlinedtypelayernameindicatetheclippingmaskisapplied.Next,you’lladdaninnershadowtogivethelettersdepth.
10.SelecttheDIGITALlayertomakeitactive.Then,clicktheAddALayerStylebutton( )atthebottomoftheLayerspanel,andchooseInnerShadowfromthepop-upmenu.
11.IntheLayerStyledialogbox,changetheBlendModetoMultiply,Opacityto48%,Distanceto18,Choketo0,andSizeto16.ThenclickOK.
![Page 179: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
12.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
![Page 180: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
ParagraphandCharacterStyles
IfyoufrequentlyworkwithtypeinPhotoshop,orifyouneedtoconsistentlyformatasignificantamountoftypeinanimage,paragraphandcharacterstylescanhelpyouworkmoreefficiently.Aparagraphstyleisacollectionoftypeattributesthatyoucanapplytoanentireparagraphwithasingleclick.Acharacterstyleisacollectionofattributesthatyoucanapplytoindividualcharacters.
TheconceptoftypestylesinPhotoshopissimilartothatinpagelayoutapplicationssuchasAdobeInDesignandword-processingapplicationssuchasMicrosoftWord.However,stylesbehavealittledifferentlyinPhotoshop.ForthebestresultsworkingwithstylesinPhotoshop,keepthefollowinginmind:
•Bydefault,alltextyoucreateinPhotoshophastheBasicParagraphstyleapplied.TheBasicParagraphstyleisdefinedbyyourtextdefaults,butyoucanchangeitsattributes.
•Deselectalllayersbeforeyoucreateanewstyle.
•Iftheselectedtexthasbeenchangedfromthecurrentparagraphstyle(usuallytheBasicParagraphstyle),thosechanges(consideredoverrides)persistevenwhenyouapplyanewstyle.Toensurethatalltheattributesofaparagraphstyleareappliedtotext,applythestyle,andthenclicktheClearOverridesbuttonintheParagraphStylespanel.
•Youcanusethesameparagraphandcharacterstylesacrossmultiplefiles.Tosavethecurrentstylesasdefaultsforallnewdocuments,chooseType>SaveDefaultTypeStyles.Touseyourdefaultstylesinanexistingdocument,chooseType>LoadDefaultTypeStyles.
CreatingtypeonapathInPhotoshop,youcancreatetypethatfollowsalongapaththatyoucreatewithapenorshapetool.Thedirectionthetypeflowsdependsontheorderinwhichanchorpointswereaddedtothepath.WhenyouusetheHorizontalTypetooltoaddtexttoapath,thelettersareperpendiculartothebaselineofthepath.Ifyouchangethelocationorshapeofthepath,thetypemoveswithit.
You’llcreatetypeonapathtomakeitlookasifquestionsarecomingfromthemodel’smouth.We’vealreadycreatedthepathforyou.
1.IntheLayerspanel,selecttheBackgroundlayer.
2.SelectthePathstabintheLayerspanelgroup.
3.InthePathspanel,selectthepathnamedSpeechPath.
Thepathappearstobecomingoutofthemodel’smouth.
![Page 181: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
4.SelecttheHorizontalTypetool.
5.Intheoptionsbar,clicktheRightAlignTextbutton.
TooltipsfromthePhotoshopevangelist
JulieanneKostisanofficialAdobePhotoshopevangelist.
Typetooltricks
•Shift-clickintheimagewindowwiththeHorizontalTypetooltocreateanewtypelayer—incaseyou’reclosetoanotherblockoftypeandPhotoshoptriestoautoselecttheexistingtypelayer.
•Double-clickthethumbnailicononanytypelayerintheLayerspaneltoselectallofthetypeonthatlayer.
•Withanytextselected,right-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS)onthetexttoaccessthecontextmenu.ChooseCheckSpellingtorunaspellcheck.
6.IntheCharacterpanel,selectthefollowingsettings:
•FontFamily:MyriadProRegular
•FontStyle:Regular
•FontSize( ):16pt
•Tracking( ):-10
•Color:White
•AllCaps( )
7.MovetheTypetooloverthepath.WhenasmallslantedlineappearsacrosstheI-bar,clicktheendofthepathclosesttothemodel’smouth,andtypeWhat’snew
![Page 182: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
withgames?
8.Selecttheword“GAMES,”andchangeitsfontstyletoBold.ClicktheCommitAnyCurrentEditsbutton( )intheoptionsbar.
9.ClicktheLayerstabtobringitforward.IntheLayerspanel,selecttheWhat’snewwithgames?layer,andthenchooseDuplicateLayerfromtheLayerspanelmenu.NamethenewlayerWhat’snewwithmusic?,andclickOK.
Photoshopcreatesaduplicatetextlayer,hidingthetextyoutypedearlier.
10.WiththeTypetool,select“GAMES,”andreplaceitwithmusic.ClicktheCommitAnyCurrentEditsbuttonintheoptionsbar.
11.ChooseEdit>FreeTransformPath.Rotatetheleftsideofthepathapproximately30degrees,andthenshiftthepathupabovethefirstpath,andalittletotheright,asintheimagebelow.ClicktheCommitTransformbuttonintheoptionsbar.
![Page 183: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
12.Repeatsteps9–11,replacingtheword“GAMES”withphones.Rotatetheleftsideofthepathapproximately-30degrees,andmoveitbelowtheoriginalpath.
13.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
WarpingpointtypeThetextonacurvypathismoreinterestingthanstraightlineswouldbe,butyou’llwarpthetexttomakeitmoreplayful.Warpingletsyoudistorttypetoconformtoavarietyofshapes,suchasanarcorawave.Thewarpstyleyouselectisanattributeofthetypelayer—youcanchangealayer’swarpstyleatanytimetochangetheoverallshapeofthewarp.Warpingoptionsgiveyouprecisecontrolovertheorientationandperspectiveofthewarpeffect.
1.ScrollorusetheHandtool( )tomovethevisibleareaoftheimagewindowsothatthesentencestotheleftofthemodelareinthecenterofthescreen.
2.Right-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS)theWhat’snewwithgames?layerintheLayerspanel,andchooseWarpTextfromthecontextmenu.
![Page 184: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
3.IntheWarpTextdialogbox,chooseWavefromtheStylemenu,andselecttheHorizontaloption.Specifythefollowingvalues:Bend,+33%;HorizontalDistortion,-23%;andVerticalDistortion,+5%.ThenclickOK.
TheBendsliderspecifieshowmuchwarpisapplied.HorizontalDistortionandVerticalDistortiondeterminetheperspectiveofthewarp.
Thewords“What’snewwithgames?”appeartofloatlikeawaveonthecover.
4.Repeatsteps2and3towarptheothertwotextlayersyoutypedonapath.
5.Saveyourwork.
![Page 185: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
DesigningparagraphsoftypeAllofthetextyou’vewrittenonthiscoversofarhasbeenafewdiscretewordsorlines—pointtype.However,manydesignscallforfullparagraphsoftext.YoucandesigncompleteparagraphsoftypeinPhotoshop;youcanevenapplyparagraphstyles.Youdon’thavetoswitchtoadedicatedpagelayoutprogramforsophisticatedparagraphtypecontrols.
UsingguidesforpositioningYouwilladdparagraphstothecoverinPhotoshop.First,you’lladdsomeguidestotheworkareatohelpyoupositiontheparagraph
1.Dragaguidefromtheleftverticalruler,placingitapproximately1/4″fromtherightsideofthecover.
2.Dragaguidedownfromthetophorizontalruler,placingitapproximately2″fromthetopofthecover.
AddingparagraphtypefromastickynoteYou’rereadytoaddthetext.Inarealdesignenvironment,thetextmightbeprovidedtoyouinaword-processingdocumentorthebodyofanemailmessage,whichyoucouldcopyandpasteintoPhotoshop.Oryoumighthavetotypeitin.Anothereasywaytoaddabitoftextisforthecopywritertoattachittotheimagefileinastickynote,aswe’vedoneforyouhere.
1.SelecttheMovetool,andthendouble-clicktheyellowstickynoteinthelowerrightcorneroftheimagewindowtoopentheNotespanel.ExpandtheNotespanel,ifnecessary,toseeallthetext.
![Page 186: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
2.IntheNotespanel,selectallthetext.PressCtrl+C(Windows)orCommand+C(MacOS)tocopythetexttotheclipboard.ClosetheNotespanel.
3.SelecttheModellayer.Then,selecttheHorizontalTypetool( ).
4.PressShiftasyouclickwheretheguidelinesintersect,about¼″fromtherightedgeand2″fromthetopofthecover.ContinuetoholdtheShiftkeyasyoustarttodragatextboxdownandtotheleft.ThenreleasetheShiftkeyandcontinuedragginguntiltheboxisabout4incheswideby8incheshigh,thetopandrightedgesalignedwiththeguidesyoujustadded.
Tip
PressShiftasyoustarttodragatextboxtoensurethatPhotoshopcreatesanewtextlayer,insteadofselectinganexistingtextlayer.
5.PressCtrl+V(Windows)orCommand+V(MacOS)topastethetext.ThenewtextlayerisatthetopoftheLayerspanel,sothetextappearsinfrontofthemodel.
Note
Ifthetextisn’tvisible,makesurethenewtypelayerisabovetheModellayerintheLayerspanel.
Thepastedtextis16pts,andit’sright-aligned,becausethosewerethelatesttextsettingsyou’dused.
6.Selectthefirstthreelines(“TheTrendIssue”),andthenapplythefollowingsettingsintheCharacterpanel:
•FontFamily:MyriadPro(oranothersansseriffont)
•FontStyle:Regular
•FontSize( ):70pt
•Leading( ):55pt
![Page 187: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
•Tracking( ):50
•Color:White
Note
Leadingdeterminestheverticalspacebetweenlines.
7.Selectjusttheword“Trend,”andchangetheFontStyletoBold.
You’veformattedthetitle.Nowyou’llformattherestofthetext.
Tip
UsetheGlyphspaneltoaccessthefullrangeofalternatecharactersinOpenTypefonts.Wheneditingtext,double-clickacharacterintheGlyphspaneltoaddittothetext.Ifyouseeablackdotinthebottomrightcornerofacharacter’sboxintheGlyphspanel,clickitandholddownthemousebuttontoseealternateversionsofthatcharacter,andthenchooseonetoaddittothetext.
8.Selecttherestofthetextyoupasted.IntheCharacterpanel,selectthefollowing:
•FontFamily:MyriadPro
•FontStyle:Regular
•FontSize:22pt
•Leading:28pt
•Tracking:0
•DeselectAllCaps( )
Thetextlooksgood,butit’sallthesame.You’llmaketheheadlinesstandoutmore.
9.Selectthe“What’sHot!”text,andthenchangethefollowingintheCharacterpanel:
•FontStyle:Bold
•FontSize:28pt
![Page 188: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
10.Repeatstep9forthe“What’sNot”and“Comingthisyear”subheads.
11.Select“Comingthisyear”andallthetextthatfollowsit.Then,intheCharacterpanel,changethetextcolortoBlack.
12.Finally,clicktheCommitAnyCurrentEditsbuttonintheoptionsbar.
13.Saveyourchanges.
OpenTypeinPhotoshop
OpenTypeisacross-platformfontfileformatdevelopedjointlybyAdobeandMicrosoft.TheformatusesasinglefontfileforbothMacOSandWindows,soyoucanmovefilesfromoneplatformtoanotherwithoutfontsubstitutionorreflowedtext.OpenTypeofferswidelyexpandedcharactersetsandlayoutfeatures,suchasswashesanddiscretionaryligatures,thataren’tavailableintraditionalPostScriptandTrueTypefonts.This,inturn,providesricherlinguisticsupportandadvancedtypographycontrol.HerearesomehighlightsofOpenType.
TheOpenTypemenuTheCharacterpanelmenuincludesanOpenTypesubmenuthatdisplaysallavailablefeaturesforaselectedOpenTypefont,includingligatures,alternates,andfractions.Dimmedfeaturesareunavailableforthattypeface;acheckmarkappearsnexttofeaturesthathavebeenapplied.
DiscretionaryligaturesToaddadiscretionaryligaturetotwoOpenTypeletters,suchasto“th”intheBickhamScriptStandardtypeface,selecttheminthefile,andchooseOpenType>DiscretionaryLigaturesfromtheCharacterpanelmenu.
SwashesAddingswashesoralternatecharactersworksthesameway.Selecttheletter,suchasacapital“T”inBickhamScript,andchooseOpenType>Swashtochangetheordinarycapitalintoadramaticallyornateswash“T.”
TruefractionsTocreatetruefractions,typethefraction’scharacters—forexample,1/2.Then,selectthecharacters,andfromtheCharacterpanelmenu,chooseOpenType>Fractions.Photoshopappliesthetruefraction(½).
![Page 189: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
TheGlyphspanelTheGlyphspanellistsallcharactersavailableforafont,includingspecializedcharactersandalternateversionssuchasswashes.AmenuunderthefontnameletsyoudisplayawritingsystemsuchasArabic,oracategoryofcharacterssuchaspunctuationorcurrencysymbols.Ablackdotinthebottomrightcornerofacharacter’sboxindicatesthatalternatesareavailableforthatcharacter;clickandholdthemouseonthecharactertoviewitsalternateglyphsortochooseonetoenterintoatextlayer.
NotethatsomeOpenTypefontshavemoreoptionsthanothers.
AddingaroundedrectangleYou’realmostdonewiththetextforthemagazinecover.Allthatremainsistoaddthevolumenumberintheupperrightcorner.First,you’llcreatearectanglewithroundedcornerstoserveasabackgroundforthevolumenumber.
1.SelecttheRoundedRectangletool( ),hiddenbeneaththeRectangletool( ),intheToolspanel.
2.Drawarectangleinthespaceabovetheletter“L”intheupperrightcornerofthecover,placingitsrightedgealongtheguide.
3.InthePropertiespanel,type67pxforthewidth,andthenmakesurethestrokewidthis3pt.
4.ClickthefillcolorswatchinthePropertiespanel,andselectthePastelYellowOrangeswatchinthethirdrow.
Bydefault,allthecornersintherectanglehavethesameradius,butyoucanadjusttheradiusforeachcornerseparately.Youcanevenreturntoeditthecornerslaterifyouwantto.You’llchangetherectanglesothatonlythelowerleftcornerisrounded,changingtheotherstorightangles.
5.UnlinkthecornerradiusvaluesinthePropertiespanel.Thenchangethebottomleftcornerto16px,andsetalltheothersto0px.
6.WiththeMovetool,dragtherectangletothetopoftheimagesoithangsdownlikearibbonanditsrightedgeisnexttotherulerguide.
![Page 190: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
7.SelectShowTransformControlsintheoptionsbar.Dragthebottomoftherectangledownsothatit’sclosetotheletter“L.”Youwanttherectangletobelongenoughtocontainthetext.ThenclicktheCommitTransformbutton( ).
AddingverticaltextYou’rereadytoaddthevolumenumberontopoftheribbon.
1.ChooseSelect>DeselectLayers.ThenselecttheVerticalTypetool( ),whichishiddenundertheHorizontalTypetool.
2.PresstheShiftkey,andclickinsidetherectangleyoujustcreated.
PressingtheShiftkeyasyouclickensuresthatyoucreateanewtextboxinsteadofselectingthetitle.
3.TypeVOL9.
Thelettersaretoolargetoview.You’llneedtochangetheirsizetoseethem.
4.ChooseSelect>All,andthen,intheCharacterpanel,selectthefollowing:
•FontFamily:asans-seriftypeface,suchasMyriadPro
•FontStyle:alightornarrowstyle,suchasLightCondensed
•Fontsize:15pt
•Tracking:10
•Color:Black
![Page 191: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
5.ClicktheCommitAnyCurrentEditsbutton( )intheoptionsbar.YourverticaltextnowappearsasthelayernamedVOL9.UsetheMovetool( )tocenteritintheribbon,ifnecessary.
Now,you’llcleanupabit.
6.Clickthenotetoselectit.Thenright-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS),andchooseDeleteNotefromthecontextmenu;clickYestoconfirmthatyouwanttodeletethenote.
7.Hidetheguides:ChoosetheHandtool( ),andthenpressCtrl+;(Windows)orCommand+;(MacOS).Thenzoomouttogetanicelookatyourwork.
8.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourwork.
Congratulations!You’veaddedandstylizedallofthetypeontheDigitalmagazinecover.Nowthatthemagazinecoverisreadytogo,you’llflattenitandprepareitforprinting.
9.ChooseFile>SaveAs,renamethefile07Working_flattened,andclickSave.ClickOKifyouseethePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
![Page 192: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
Keepingalayeredversionletsyoureturntothe07Working.psdfileinthefuturetoeditit.
10.ChooseLayer>FlattenImage.
11.ChooseFile>Save,andthenclosetheimagewindow.
SavingasPhotoshopPDF
Thetypeyou’veaddedconsistsofvector-basedoutlines,whichremaincrispandclearasyouzoominorresizethem.However,ifyousavethefileasaJPEGorTIFFimage,Photoshoprasterizesthetype,soyoulosethatflexibility.WhenyousaveaPhotoshopPDFfile,vectortypeisincluded.
YoucanpreserveotherPhotoshopeditingcapabilitiesinaPhotoshopPDFfile,too.Forexample,youcanretainlayers,colorinformation,andevennotes.
Toensureyoucaneditthefilelater,selectPreservePhotoshopEditingCapabilitiesintheSaveAdobePDFdialogbox.
TopreserveanynotesinthefileandconvertthemtoAcrobatcommentswhenyousavetoPDF,selectNotesintheSaveareaoftheSaveAsdialogbox.
YoucanopenaPhotoshopPDFfileinAcrobatorPhotoshop,placeitinanotherapplication,orprintit.FormoreinformationaboutsavingasPhotoshopPDF,seePhotoshopHelp.
Reviewquestions1.HowdoesPhotoshoptreattype?
2.HowisatextlayerthesameasordifferentfromotherlayersinPhotoshop?
3.Whatisaclippingmask,andhowdoyoumakeonefromtype?
![Page 193: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
Reviewanswers1.TypeinPhotoshopconsistsofmathematicallydefinedshapesthatdescribetheletters,numbers,andsymbolsofatypeface.WhenyouaddtypetoanimageinPhotoshop,thecharactersarecomposedofpixelsandhavethesameresolutionastheimagefile.However,Photoshoppreservesthevector-basedtypeoutlinesandusesthemwhenyouscaleorresizetype,saveaPDForEPSfile,orprinttheimagetoaPostScriptprinter.
2.TypethatisaddedtoanimageappearsintheLayerspanelasatextlayerthatcanbeeditedandmanagedinthesamewayasanyotherkindoflayer.Youcanaddandeditthetext,changetheorientationofthetype,andapplyanti-aliasingaswellasmove,restack,copy,andchangetheoptionsforlayers.
3.Aclippingmaskisanobjectorgroupwhoseshapemasksotherartworksothatonlyareasthatliewithintheshapearevisible.Toconvertthelettersonanytextlayertoaclippingmask,makesurethelayeryouwanttorevealisdirectlyabovethetextlayer,selectthelayeryouwanttoshowthroughtheletters,andchooseCreateClippingMaskfromtheLayerspanelmenu.
![Page 194: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
8.VectorDrawingTechniques
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Differentiatebetweenbitmapandvectorgraphics.
•DrawstraightandcurvedpathsusingthePentool.
•Savepaths.
•Drawandeditshapelayers.
•Drawcustomshapes.
•ImportandeditaSmartObjectfromAdobeIllustrator.
•UseSmartGuides.
Thislessonwilltakeabout90minutestocomplete.DownloadtheLesson08projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 195: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
PROJECT:COFFEESHOPSIGN
Unlikebitmapimages,vectorimagesretaintheircrispedgeswhenyouenlargethemtoanysize.YoucandrawvectorshapesandpathsinyourPhotoshopimagesandadd
vectormaskstocontrolwhatisshowninanimage.
AboutbitmapimagesandvectorgraphicsBeforeworkingwithvectorshapesandvectorpaths,it’simportanttounderstandthebasicdifferencesbetweenthetwomaincategoriesofcomputergraphics:bitmapimagesandvectorgraphics.YoucanusePhotoshoptoworkwitheithertypeofgraphic;infact,youcancombinebothbitmapandvectordatainanindividualPhotoshopimagefile.
Bitmapimages,technicallycalledrasterimages,arebasedonagridofdotsknownaspixels.Eachpixelisassignedaspecificlocationandcolorvalue.Inworkingwithbitmapimages,youeditgroupsofpixelsratherthanobjectsorshapes.Becausebitmapgraphicscanrepresentsubtlegradationsofshadeandcolor,theyareappropriateforcontinuous-toneimagessuchasphotographsorartworkcreatedinpaintingprograms.Adisadvantageofbitmapgraphicsisthattheycontainafixednumberofpixels.Asaresult,theycanlosedetailandappearjaggedwhenscaleduponscreenorprintedatalowerresolutionthantheywerecreatedfor.
Vectorgraphicsaremadeupoflinesandcurvesdefinedbymathematicalobjectscalledvectors.Thesegraphicsretaintheircrispnesswhethertheyaremoved,resized,orhave
![Page 196: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
theircolorchanged.Vectorgraphicsareappropriateforillustrations,type,andgraphicssuchaslogosthatmaybescaledtodifferentsizes.
AboutpathsandthePentoolInPhotoshop,theoutlineofavectorshapeisapath.ApathisacurvedorstraightlinesegmentyoudrawusingthePentool,FreeformPentool,orashapetool.ThePentooldrawspathswiththegreatestprecision;shapetoolsdrawrectangles,ellipses,andothershapepaths;theFreeformPentooldrawspathsasifyouweredrawingwithapencilonpaper.
![Page 197: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
TooltipsfromthePhotoshopevangelist
JulieanneKostisanofficialAdobePhotoshopevangelist.
Accessingtoolsquickly
EachtoolintheToolspanelhasasingle-letterkeyboardshortcut.Typetheletter,getthetool.PressShiftwiththeshortcutkeytocyclethroughanynestedtoolsinagroup.Forexample,pressPtoselectthePentool,andpressShift+PtotogglebetweenthePenandFreeformPentools.
Pathscanbeopenorclosed.Anopenpath(suchasawavyline)hastwodistinctendpoints.Aclosedpath(suchasacircle)iscontinuous.Thetypeofpathyoudrawaffectshowitcanbeselectedandadjusted.
Pathsthathavenofillorstrokedonotprintwhenyouprintyourartwork.Thisisbecausepathsarevectorobjectsthatcontainnopixels,unlikethebitmapshapesdrawnbythePenciltoolandotherpaintingtools.
GettingstartedInthislesson,you’lldrawapatharoundacoffeecupinanimage,andcreateanotherpathinsidethehandle.You’llsubtractoneselectionfromtheothersothatalightningboltshape(providedintheShapespanel)knocksoutofthecupshape.Finally,you’llimportanIllustratortitletreatmentasaSmartObjectandapplyacolorandembosseffect.
Beforeyoubegin,you’llviewtheimageyou’llbecreating—asignforafictitiouscoffeeshop.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.
4.IntheFavoritespanel,clicktheLessonsfolder,andthendouble-clicktheLesson08folderintheContentpanel.
5.Selectthe08End.psdfile,andpressthespacebartoseeitinfull-screenview.
Tocreatethissign,you’lltracethecoffeecupinanimage,andusethattracingtomakeavectorlogo.You’llresizethatlogoandcombineitwithanIllustratortypographiclogoimportedasaSmartObject.First,you’llpracticemakingpathsandselectionsusingthePentool.
6.Whenyou’vefinishedlookingatthe08End.psdfile,pressthespacebaragain.Then
![Page 198: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
double-clickthe08Practice_Start.psdfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
7.ChooseFile>SaveAs,renamethefile08Practice_Working.psd,andclickSave.IfthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogboxappears,clickOK.
DrawingwiththePentoolYou’llusethePentooltoselectthecoffeecup.Thecuphaslong,smooth,curvededgesthatwouldbedifficulttoselectusingothermethods.
ThePentoolworksalittledifferentlyfrommostPhotoshoptools.We’vecreatedapracticefilewhichyoucanusetogetfamiliarwiththePentoolbeforemakingyourKailuaKoffeesign.
Pathsincludeanchorpoints(smoothandcorner)andsegments(straightandcurved).You’llgetafeelforthePentoolbydrawingastraightpath,asimplecurve,andthenanS-curvebeforeyoupracticetracingthecoffeecup
CreatingpathswiththePentool
YoucanusethePentooltocreatepathsthatarestraightorcurved,openorclosed.Ifyou’reunfamiliarwiththePentool,itcanbeconfusingtouseatfirst.UnderstandingtheelementsofapathandhowtocreatethoseelementswiththePentoolmakespathsmucheasiertodraw.
Tocreateastraightpath,clickthemousebutton.Thefirsttimeyouclick,yousetthestartingpoint.Eachtimethatyouclickthereafter,astraightlineisdrawnbetweenthepreviouspointandthecurrentpoint.Todrawcomplexstraight-segmentpathswiththePentool,simplycontinuetoaddpoints.
Creatingastraightline
![Page 199: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
Tocreateacurvedpath,clicktoplaceananchorpoint,dragtocreateadirectionlineforthatpoint,andthenclicktoplacethenextanchorpoint.Eachdirectionlineendsintwodirectionpoints;thepositionsofdirectionlinesandpointsdeterminethesizeandshapeofthecurvedsegment.Movingthedirectionlinesandpointsreshapesthecurvesinapath.
Smoothcurvesareconnectedbyanchorpointscalledsmoothpoints.Sharplycurvedpathsareconnectedbycornerpoints.Whenyoumoveadirectionlineonasmoothpoint,thecurvedsegmentsonbothsidesofthepointadjustsimultaneously,butwhenyoumoveadirectionlineonacornerpoint,onlythecurveonthesamesideofthepointasthedirectionlineisadjusted.
Pathsegmentsandanchorpointscanbemovedafterthey’redrawn,eitherindividuallyorasagroup.Whenapathcontainsmorethanonesegment,youcandragindividualanchorpointstoadjustindividualsegmentsofthepath,orselectalloftheanchorpointsinapathtoedittheentirepath.UsetheDirectSelectiontooltoselectandadjustananchorpoint,apathsegment,oranentirepath.
A.CurvedlinesegmentB.DirectionpointC.Directionline
D.SelectedanchorpointE.Unselectedanchorpoint
Creatingaclosedpathdiffersfromcreatinganopenpathinthewaythatyouendit.Toendanopenpath,pressEnterorReturn.Tocreateaclosedpath,positionthePentoolpointeroverthestartingpoint,andclick.Closingapathautomaticallyendsthepath.Afterthepathcloses,thePentoolpointerappearswithasmall*,indicatingthatyournextclickwillstartanewpath.
Creatingaclosedpath
![Page 200: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
Asyoudrawpaths,atemporarystorageareanamedWorkPathappearsinthePathspanel.It’sagoodideatosaveworkpaths,andit’sessentialifyouusemultiplediscretepathsinthesameimagefile.IfyoudeselectanexistingWorkPathinthePathspanelandthenstartdrawingagain,anewworkpathwillreplacetheoriginalone,whichwillbelost.Tosaveaworkpath,double-clickitinthePathspanel,typeanameintheSavePathdialogbox,andclickOKtorenameandsavethepath.ThepathremainsselectedinthePathspanel.
First,you’llconfigurethePentooloptionsandtheworkarea.
1.IntheToolspanel,selectthePentool( ).
2.Intheoptionsbar,selectorverifythefollowingsettings:
•ChooseShapefromtheToolModepop-upmenu.
•InthePenOptionsmenu,makesurethatRubberBandisnotselected.
•MakesurethatAutoAdd/Deleteisselected.
•ChooseNoColorfromtheFillpop-upmenu.
•ChooseagreencolorfromtheStrokepop-upmenu.
•Enter4ptforthestrokewidth.
•IntheStrokeOptionswindow,chooseCenter(thesecondoption)fromtheAlignmenu.
A.ToolModemenuB.PenOptionsmenu
DrawingastraightlineYou’llstartbydrawingastraightline.Anchorpointsmarktheendsofpathsegments;thestraightlineyou’lldrawisasinglepathsegmentwithtwoanchorpoints.
1.ClickthePathstabtobringthatpaneltothefrontoftheLayerspanelgroup.
ThePathspaneldisplaysthumbnailpreviewsofthepathsyoudraw.Currently,thepanelis
![Page 201: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
empty,becauseyouhaven’tstarteddrawing.
2.Ifnecessary,zoominsothatyoucaneasilyseetheletteredpointsandbluedotsontheshapetemplate.Makesureyoucanseethewholetemplateintheimagewindow,andbesuretoreselectthePentoolafteryouzoom.
3.ClickpointAonthefirstshape,andreleasethemousebutton.You’vecreatedananchorpoint.
4.ClickpointB.You’vecreatedastraightlinewithtwoanchorpoints.
5.PressEnterorReturntostopdrawing.
ThepathyoudrewappearsinthePathspanelandasanewlayerintheLayerspanel.
DrawingcurvesOncurvedsegments,selectingananchorpointdisplaystwodirectionlines(smoothpoints)oronedirectionline(cornerpoint).Directionlinesendindirectionpoints,andthepositionsofthedirectionlinesanddirectionpointsdeterminethesizeandshapeofthecurvedsegment.You’llcreatecurvedlines,usingsmoothpoints.
1.ClickAonthesemicircle,andreleasethemousetocreatethefirstanchorpoint.
2.ClickpointB,butdon’treleasethemousebutton.Instead,dragthecursortothebluedottotherightofpointBtocreateacurvedpathsegmentandasmoothanchorpoint.Thenreleasethemousebutton.
Smoothanchorpointshavetwolinkeddirectionlines.Whenyoumoveone,thecurved
![Page 202: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
segmentsonbothsidesofthepathadjustsimultaneously.
3.ClickpointC,anddragdowntothebluedotbelow.Thenreleasethemousebutton.You’vecreatedasecondcurvedpathsegmentandanothersmoothpoint.
4.ClickpointD,andreleasethemousetocreatethefinalanchorpoint.PressEnterorReturntocompletethepath.
WhendrawingafreehandpathusingthePentool,useasfewpointsaspossibletocreatetheshapeyouwant.Thefewerpointsyouuse,thesmootherthecurvesare—andthemoreefficientyourfileis.
Usingthesametechniques,you’lldrawanS-shapedcurve.
5.ClickpointA,thenclickpointB,anddragthecursortothefirstbluedot.
6.ContinuewithpointsC,D,E,andF,ineachcaseclickingthepointandthendraggingtothecorrespondingbluedot.
7.ClickpointGtocreatethefinalanchorpoint,andthenpressEnterorReturntocompletethepath.
ThisshapeisonitsownlayerintheLayerspanel.OnlyonepathisinthePathspanelbecausetheworkpathforthesecondshapeoverwrotetheworkpathforthefirstone.
DrawingamorecomplexshapeNowthatyou’vegottheidea,you’llhaveachancetodrawamorecomplexobject:theoutlineofacoffeecup.
1.ClickpointAontheshapeontherightsidetosetthefirstanchorpoint.
2.PresstheShiftkeyasyouclickpointB.PressingtheShiftkeyconstrainsthelinesothatitisperfectlystraight.
3.PresstheShiftkeyasyouclickpointsC,D,andEtocreatestraightpathsegments.
4.ClickpointF,anddragtothebluedottocreateacurve.Thenreleasethemousebutton.
![Page 203: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
5.ClickpointG,anddragtothebluedottocreateanothercurve.Thenreleasethemousebutton.
6.ClickpointH.ThenpressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)asyouclickpointHagaintocreateacornerpoint.
Whenyoumoveadirectionlineonacornerpoint,onlythecurveonthesamesideofthepointasthedirectionlineisadjusted,soyoucancreateasharptransitionbetweentwosegments.
7.ClickpointAtodrawthefinalpathsegmentandclosethepath.Closingapathautomaticallyendsthedrawing;youdon’tneedtopressEnterorReturn.
TracingashapefromaphotoNowyou’rereadytodrawapatharoundthecoffeecupintheimage.You’llusethetechniquesyou’vepracticedtodrawapatharoundtheoutsideofthecupandanotheroneinsidethehandle.
1.Openthe08Start.psdfileinPhotoshop.
Theimageincludesthreelayers:thebackgroundlayerandtwotemplatelayerstoguideyouasyoudrawshapes.
2.ChooseFile>SaveAs,renamethefile08Working.psd,andclickSave.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
3.WiththePentoolselected,chooseSubtractFrontShapefromthePathOperations
![Page 204: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
pop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.
Tip
Ifyou’dliketotrytracingthecupwithoutusingthedotstoguideyou,hidetheOutsideCuplayerintheLayerspanel.
OptionsinthePathOperationsmenudeterminehowmultipleshapesinteractwitheachotherinapath.Afteryoudrawthecupoutline,you’llsubtracttheinsideofthehandlefromit.
4.ClickpointA.Photoshopcreatesanewlayerfortheshape.
5.ClickpointB,anddragthecursortothereddotontherighttocreatetheinitialcurve.
6.ClickpointC,anddragtothereddottoitsright.
7.Continuetracingthecup,clickingeachpoint,anddraggingthecursortothecorrespondingreddotswhenyouneedtocreateacurve.
8.ClosetheshapebyclickingpointAagain.
9.Evaluateyourpath.Ifyouwanttoadjustanysegments,usetheDirectSelectiontooltoselectapoint,andthenmoveitsdirectionlinestoeditthesegment.
![Page 205: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
10.Saveyourworksofar.
AddingasecondshapetoapathYou’vedrawnapaththatoutlinestheexteriorofthecup,butyouwanttheinsideofthehandletobetransparent.You’lldrawashapetoisolatetheinsideofthecuphandle.
1.HidetheOutsideCuplayer,andmaketheInsideHandlelayervisible.
2.MakesurethePentoolisselectedandthatSubtractFrontShapeisstillselectedinthePathOperationspop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.
3.ClickpointAtobegindrawing.ThenclickpointB,dragtothenextreddot,andreleasethemousebutton.
4.Continuedrawing,clickinganddraggingasindicatedatpointsCandD.
5.ClickpointE,anddragslightlydowntothereddot,andrelease.Then,pressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)asyouclickpointEtoconvertthepointtoacornerpoint.
ConvertingpointEtoacornerpointenablesyoutodrawastraightpathsegmentbetweenitandpointA.IfpointEremainedasmoothpoint,thepathbetweenpointsEandAwouldbeslightlycurved.
6.ClickpointAtoclosetheshapeandstopdrawing.
Nowyou’llsavethepathtouselater.
7.InthePathspanel,double-clickShape1ShapePath,typeCupOutlineintheSavePathdialogboxclickOKtosaveit;then,inthePathspanel,clickoutsideCupOutlinetodeselectit.
![Page 206: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
8.IntheLayerspanel,deletetheOutsideCupandInsideHandlelayers,becauseyoudon’tneedthemanymore.TheShape1ShapePathinthePathspanelwillberemoved,asindicatedinthescreenshotabove.
9.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourwork.
WorkingwithdefinedcustomshapesPhotoshopincludesseveralpredefinedcustomshapesintheCustomShapePicker,butyoucanalsocreateyourown.
ConvertingapathtoashapeYou’lldefinethecupoutlinepathasacustomshapethatyoucanuseforthelogo.TheshapewillbeavailableintheCustomShapePicker.
1.SelecttheCupOutlinepathinthePathspanel.
2.ChooseEdit>DefineCustomShape.
3.NametheshapeCoffeeCup,andclickOK.
4.SelecttheCustomShapetool( ),hiddenbeneaththeRectangletool( )intheToolspanel
5.OpentheCustomShapePickerintheoptionsmenu,andscrolltothebottomofthepicker.Theshapeyouaddedshouldbethelastonedisplayed.
6.PositiontheCustomShapeToolneartheupperleftcornerofthecoffeecup,andstartdraggingdownandtotheright.Begindragging,andthenpressshifttomaintainoriginalproportions.Whenthelogoistherightsize,releasethemousebuttonandthenreleasetheShiftkey.
![Page 207: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
PressingtheShiftkeykeepstheshapeproportionalasyoudrag.
7.Double-clicktheShape1layerintheLayerspanel,andnameitCoffeeCup.
ChangingthefillcolorofashapelayerYou’vecreatedacustomshapefromyourpath,andyou’veusedtheCustomShapetooltodrawtheshapeontheimage.Butit’sjustanoutline.You’lladdafill.
1.MakesuretheCoffeeCuplayerisselectedintheLayerspanel.
2.SelectthePentool( )intheToolspanel.
3.Intheoptionsbar,selectblackfortheFillcolor,andNoneforthestroke.
Thecoffeecupshapeisnowsolidblack.
4.SelecttheMovetooltodeselectthecoffeecup.
SubtractingshapesfromashapelayerAfteryoucreateashapelayer,youcansubtractnewshapesfromit.You’lladdsomeinteresttothecoffeecupshapebysubtractingalightningboltshapefromit,allowingthebackgroundtoshowthrough.
1.IntheToolspanel,selecttheCustomShapetool.
2.Ontheoptionsbar,chooseSubtractFrontShapefromthePathOperationsmenu.Thepointernowappearsascross-hairswithasmallminussign( ).
3.InthePathspanel,selecttheCoffeeCupshapepath.
4.SelectthelightningboltfromtheCustomShapePicker(it’sinthesecondrow).
![Page 208: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
Startattheupperleftcorneranddragdowntothebottomright.Clickfirst,andasyoudragdiagonally,presstheShiftkeytokeepthedimensionsproportionate.
ImportingaSmartObjectSmartObjectsarelayersthatyoucaneditinPhotoshopnondestructively;thatis,changesyoumaketotheimageremaineditableanddon’taffecttheactualimagepixels,whicharepreserved.Regardlessofhowoftenyouscale,rotate,skew,orotherwisetransformaSmartObject,itretainsitssharp,preciseedges.
YoucanimportvectorobjectsfromAdobeIllustratorasSmartObjects.IfyouedittheoriginalobjectinIllustrator,thechangeswillbereflectedintheplacedSmartObjectinyourPhotoshopimagefile.
WhenyouplaceaSmartObject,youcanlinkitorembedit.Ifyoulinkit,Photoshopretainsalinktotheoriginalfilesothatyoucaneasilyupdateitlater,anditincludesabitmapimageoftheSmartObjectinthePhotoshopfile.IfyouembedaSmartObject,PhotoshopincludestheentireobjectinthePhotoshopfile,butdoesnotretainalink.However,youcanconvertanembeddedSmartObjecttoalinkedSmartObjectiftheoriginalfileisstillavailable.
You’llworkwithaSmartObjectnowbyplacingaKailuaKoffeelogotypethatwascreatedinIllustrator.
1.SelecttheMovetool( )intheToolspanel.
2.SelecttheCoffeeCuplayer,andchooseFile>PlaceLinked.SelecttheLogotype.epsfileintheLesson08folder,andclickPlace.
TheKailuaKoffeelogotypeisaddedtothemiddleofthecomposition,insideaboundingboxwithadjustablehandles.Anewlayer,Logotype,appearsintheLayerspanel.
3.Dragthelogotypeobjecttotheupperleftcornerofthesign,justtotherightofthecoffeecuplogo,andthenpressShiftanddragacornertomakethetextobjectproportionallylarger—largeenoughthatitfillsthetopportionoftheimage,asinthefollowingillustration.Whenyou’vefinished,eitherpressEnterorReturn,orclicktheCommitTransformbutton( )intheoptionsbar.
![Page 209: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
Whenyoucommittothetransformation,thelayerthumbnailiconchangestoreflectthatthetitlelayerisalinkedSmartObject.
AswithanyshapelayerorSmartObject,youcancontinuetoedititssizeandshapeifyou’dlike.Simplyselectthelayer,chooseEdit>FreeTransformtoaccessthecontrolhandles,anddragtoadjustthem.Or,selecttheMovetool( ),andselectShowTransformControlsintheoptionsbar.Thenadjustthehandles.
AddingcoloranddepthtoashapeusinglayerstylesYoucreatedtheshapewithablackfill.Nowyou’llmakeitsnazzierbychangingthefillcolorandaddingaBevel&Embosseffect.
1.WiththeLogotypelayerselected,chooseColorOverlayfromtheAddALayerStylemenu( )atthebottomoftheLayerspanel.
2.IntheLayerStyledialogbox,chooseadarkredorburgundycolor.
3.ClickBevel&EmbossontheleftsideoftheLayerStyledialogboxtoaddanotherlayerstyle.AcceptthedefaultsfortheBevel&Embosslayerstyle,andclickOK.
![Page 210: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
Note
Besuretoclickthewords“Bevel&Emboss.”Ifyouclickonlythecheckbox,Photoshopappliesthelayerstylewithitsdefaultsettings,butyouwon’tseetheoptions.
TheColorOverlayandBevel&EmbosslayerstylesaffecttheLogotypelayer.You’llcopythemtotheCoffeeCuplayer.
4.PressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)asyoudragthelayereffectsindicator( )fromtheLogotypelayerontotheCoffeeCuplayer.
5.CleanuptheLayerspanel:HideallbuttheLogotype,CoffeeCup,andBackgroundlayers.ThenchooseDeleteHiddenLayersfromtheLayerspanelmenu,andclickYeswhenaskedtoconfirmthedeletion.
![Page 211: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
6.CleanupthePathspanelbydeletingtheCupOutlinepath.
7.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourwork.Thecoffeeshopsigniscomplete.
ExtraCredit
UsingCreativeCloudLibrarieswithlinkedSmartObjects
WhenyouorganizeandshareyourdesignassetsusingCreativeCloudLibraries,youandyourteamcanusethoselibraryitemsinmanyCreativeClouddesktopandmobileapps.Let’stakealook:
1.Open08End.psd,andchooseWindow>LibrariestoopentheLibrariespanel.
2.IntheLibrariespanelmenu,chooseCreateNewLibrary,andnameitKailuaKoffee.
3.IntheLayerspanel,selecttheBackgroundlayer.IntheLayerspanelmenu,chooseConverttoSmartObject.Thislayerisnownamed“Layer0”.
4.SelecttheMovetool.Dragthelayerfromthedocumentwindow(nottheLayerspanel)intotheKailuaKoffeelibrary.
5.Repeatsteps3and4fortheLogotypelayerandtheCoffeeCuplayer.
NowallthreeelementswillappearinCreativeCloudapplicationsandmobileapps.BecauseeachitemisalinkedSmartObject,thecompanycaneditthelogointheKailuaKoffeelibraryanditwillupdateinalldocumentsthatuseit.Toeditalibraryitem,justdouble-clickitintheLibrariespanel.
Addingcolors
1.WiththeEyedroppertool,clicktheredmuginthedocumentwindow.Then,deselectalllayersintheLayerspanel.
![Page 212: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
2.AtthebottomoftheLibrariespanel,clicktheAddForegroundColorswatch.Thataddsthecoloryousampledtothecurrentlibrary.Usethesamemethodtosamplealightbluefromtheskyinthebackground,andaddthatcolortoyourlibrarytoo.
Collaborating
WhenyoushareaCreativeCloudLibrary,yourteamalwayshasthecurrentversionofthoseassets.IntheLibrariespanelmenu,chooseCollaborate,andfillintheInviteCollaboratorsscreenthatappearsinyourwebbrowser.CollaboratorswillseethelibraryyousharedintheirCreativeCloudapplications(toutilizethisfeature,youmusthaveaCreativeCloudaccountandbeloggedin).
AddingassetstolibrariesusingAdobemobileapps
UseAdobemobileapps—suchasAdobeColorCC,AdobeShapeCC,andAdobeBrushCC—tocapturecolorthemes,shapes,andbrushesfromreallifeandaddthemtoyourCreativeCloudlibraries.LibraryassetsyouaddwithmobileappsareautomaticallysyncedtoyourCreativeCloudaccount,soyou’llseethenewassetsinyourLibrariespanelwhenyoureturntoyourcomputer.
SmartGuides
Let’stakethisdesigntothenextlevel.Youcanusethecoffeecuplogotomakearepeatedmotifatthebottomofthesign.SmartGuidescanhelpyoupositiontheimagesevenly.
1.ChooseView>Show,andmakesureSmartGuidesareenabled.Ifthere’sacheckmarknexttoSmartGuides,they’reon.Ifthereisn’tone,selectSmartGuidestoenablethem.
2.SelecttheCoffeeCuplayer.ThenselecttheMovetool,andpressAlt+Shift(Windows)orOption+Shift(MacOS)asyoudragthecuplogotothelowerleftcornerofthesign.TheAltorOptionkeycopiesthe
![Page 213: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
selectedobject;theShiftkeyconstrainsitsmovement.ThemagentalinesthatappearasyoudragtheobjectareSmartGuides.
3.ChooseEdit>FreeTransform.ThenpressShifttomaintaintheproportionsasyouscalethecuptoaboutone-fourthitsoriginalsize.PressEnterorReturntoconfirmthetransformation.
4.WiththeCoffeeCupcopylayerstillselected,pressAlt+ShiftorOption+Shiftanddragtotherightuntilthemeasurementsdisplayedinpinkshowyouthattheimagesare3.5inchesapart.Asyoudrag,SmartGuidesgiveyoualignmentguidesanddisplaymeasurementstohelpyoupositionobjects.
5.Selectthesecondimageonthebottom,andrepeatstep4.Thistime,whenyoudragtheimage3.5inches,Photoshopdisplaysthedistancebetweeneachofthesetsofimages.
6.Repeatstep5soyouhaveatotalof4equallyspacedlogos.
Reviewquestions1.Whatisthedifferencebetweenabitmapimageandavectorgraphic?
2.Howcanyoucreateacustomshape?
![Page 214: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
3.Whattoolcanyouusetomoveandresizepathsandshapes?
4.WhatareSmartObjects,andwhatisthebenefitofusingthem?
Reviewanswers1.Bitmap,orraster,imagesarebasedonagridofpixelsandareappropriateforcontinuous-toneimagessuchasphotographsorartworkcreatedinpaintingprograms.Vectorgraphicsaremadeupofshapesbasedonmathematicalexpressionsandareappropriateforillustrations,type,anddrawingsthatrequireclear,smoothlines.
2.Tocreateacustomshape,selectapath,andthenchooseEdit>DefineCustomShape.Nametheshape;itwillappearintheCustomShapePicker.
3.YouusetheDirectSelectiontooltomove,resize,andeditshapes.YoucanalsomodifyandscaleaselectedshapeorpathbychoosingEdit>FreeTransform.
4.SmartObjectsarevectorobjectsthatyoucanplaceandeditinPhotoshopwithoutalossofquality.Regardlessofhowoftenyouscale,rotate,skew,orotherwisetransformaSmartObject,itretainssharp,preciseedges.AgreatbenefitofusingSmartObjectsisthatyoucanedittheoriginalobjectintheauthoringapplication,suchasIllustrator,andthechangeswillbereflectedintheplacedSmartObjectinyourPhotoshopimagefile.
![Page 215: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
9.AdvancedCompositing
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•ApplyandeditSmartFilters.
•UsetheLiquifyfiltertodistortanimage.
•Applycoloreffectstoselectedareasofanimage.
•Applyfilterstocreatevariouseffects.
•UsetheHistorypaneltoreturntoapreviousstate.
•Upscalealow-resolutionimageforhigh-resolutionprinting.
Thislessonwilltakeaboutanhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson09projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 216: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
MonstermakeupimagerycourtesyofRussellBrown,withillustrationbyJohnConnellPROJECT:MONSTERMOVIEPOSTERDESIGN
Filterscantransformordinaryimagesintoextraordinarydigitalartwork.SmartFiltersletyoueditthosetransformationsatanytime.Thewidevarietyoffeaturesin
Photoshopletsyoubeascreativeasyouwanttobe.
GettingstartedInthislesson,you’llassembleamontageofimagesforamovieposterasyouexplorefiltersinPhotoshop.First,lookatthefinalprojecttoseewhatyou’llbecreating.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
![Page 217: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
Note
IfBridgeisn’tinstalled,you’llbepromptedtoinstallitwhenyouchooseBrowseInBridge.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.
4.InBridge,chooseFavoritesfromthemenuontheleft,andthenclicktheLessonsfolder.Double-clicktheLesson09folder.
5.Viewthe09_End.psdthumbnail.MovetheslideratthebottomoftheBridgewindowifyouneedtozoomintoseethethumbnailmoreclearly.
Thisfileisamovieposterthatcomprisesabackground,amonsterimage,andseveralsmallerimages.Eachimagehashadoneormorefiltersoreffectsappliedtoit.
Themonsteriscomposedofanimageofaperfectlynormal(thoughslightlythreatening)guywithseveralghoulishimagesapplied.ThesemonstrousadditionsarecourtesyofRussellBrown,withillustrationbyJohnConnell.
6.InBridge,navigatetotheLesson09/Monster_Makeupfolder,andopenit.
![Page 218: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
7.Shift-clicktoselectallthefilesintheMonster_Makeupfolder,andthenchooseTools>Photoshop>LoadFilesIntoPhotoshopLayers.
PhotoshopimportsalltheselectedfilesasindividuallayersinanewPhotoshopfile.Thevisibilityiconislabeledredinthelayersthatcreatethemonster’slook.
8.InPhotoshop,chooseFile>SaveAs.ChoosePhotoshopfortheFormat,andnamethenewfile09Working.psd.SaveitintheLesson09folder.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
![Page 219: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
ArranginglayersYourimagefilecontainseightlayers,importedinalphabeticalorder.Intheircurrentpositions,theydon’tmakeaveryconvincingmonster.You’llrearrangethelayerorderandresizetheircontentsasyoustarttobuildyourmonster.
1.Zoomoutorscrollsothatyoucanseeallthelayersontheartboard.
2.IntheLayerspanel,dragtheMonster_Hairlayertothetopofthelayerstack.
3.DragtheFrankenlayertothebottomofthelayerstack.
4.SelecttheMovetool( ),andthenmovetheFrankenlayer(theimageoftheperson)tothebottomofthepage.
5.IntheLayerspanel,Shift-selecteverylayerexcepttheFrankenlayer,andchooseEdit>FreeTransform.
![Page 220: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
6.PresstheShiftkeyasyoudragdownfromacorneroftheselectiontoresizealltheselectedlayerstoabout50%oftheiroriginalsize.(Watchthewidthandheightpercentagesintheoptionsbar.)
7.Withtheresizedlayersstillselected,movethemovertheheadoftheFrankenlayer.ThenpressEnterorReturntocommitthetransformation.
8.Zoomintoseetheheadareaclearly.
9.HidealllayersexcepttheGreen_Skin_TextureandFrankenlayers.
10.SelectonlytheGreen_Skin_Texturelayer,andusetheMovetooltocenteritovertheface.
![Page 221: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
11.ChooseEdit>FreeTransformagaintoadjustthefitofthetexturetotheface.Usethesidehandlestoadjustthewidth,thebottomandtophandlestoadjusttheheight,andarrowkeystonudgetheentirelayerintoposition.Usetheeyesandmouthasaguide.Whenyou’vepositionedtheskintexture,pressEnterorReturntocommitthetransformation.
12.Saveyourfile.
UsingSmartFiltersUnlikeregularfilters,whichpermanentlychangeanimage,SmartFiltersarenondestructive:Theycanbeadjusted,turnedoffandon,anddeleted.However,youcanapplySmartFiltersonlytoaSmartObject.
![Page 222: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
ApplyingtheLiquifyfilterYou’llusetheLiquifyfiltertotightentheeyeopeningsandchangetheshapeofthemonster’sface.Becauseyouwanttobeabletoadjustthefiltersettingslater,you’llusetheLiquifyfilterasaSmartFilter.Soyou’llfirstneedtoconverttheGreen_Skin_TexturelayertoaSmartObject.
1.MakesuretheGreen_Skin_TexturelayerisselectedintheLayerspanel,andthenchooseConvertToSmartObjectfromtheLayerspanelmenu.
2.ChooseFilter>Liquify.
PhotoshopdisplaysthelayerintheLiquifydialogbox.
3.IntheLiquifydialogbox,selectAdvancedModetoseeadditionaloptions.
4.SelectShowBackdrop,andthenchooseBehindfromtheModemenu.SettheOpacityto75.
![Page 223: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
5.SelecttheZoomtool( )fromtheToolspanelontheleftsideofthedialogbox,andzoomintotheeyearea.
6.SelecttheForwardWarptool( )(thefirsttool).
TheForwardWarptoolpushespixelsforwardasyoudrag.
7.IntheBrushToolOptionsarea,settheSizeto150andPressureto75.
8.WiththeForwardWarptool,pulltherighteyebrowdowntoclosetheeyeopening.Thenpullupfromundertheeye.
9.Repeatstep8onthelefteyebrowandunder-eyearea.
![Page 224: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
10.Whenyou’veclosedthegaparoundtheeyes,clickOK.
Becauseyou’veappliedtheLiquifyfilterasaSmartFilter,youcanreturnlatertomakeadditionalchangestotheface.
PositioningotherlayersNowthatyou’vegottheskintextureinplace,you’llmovetheotherlayersintoposition,workingupfromthelowestlayersintheLayerspanel.
1.MaketheGreen_Nose_Stitcheslayervisible,andselectitintheLayerspanel.
2.ChooseEdit>FreeTransform,andthenpositionthelayeroverthenose,resizingitasnecessary.PressEnterorReturntocommitthetransformation.
![Page 225: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
You’llrepeattheprocesstopositiontherestofthelayers.
3.MaketheGreen_Neck_Stitcheslayervisible,andselectit.Thenmoveitovertheneck.Ifyouneedtoadjustit,chooseEdit>FreeTransform,resizeit,andpressEnterorReturn.
4.MaketheGreen_Ear_Stapleslayervisible,andselectit.Movethestaplesoverhisrightear.ChooseEdit>FreeTransform,resizeandrepositionthestaples,andthenpressEnterorReturn.
5.MaketheEnhanced_Green_Foreheadlayervisible,andselectit.Moveitovertheforehead;it’sprobablyabitlarge.ChooseEdit>FreeTransform,resizetheforehead
![Page 226: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
tofitthespace,andpressEnterorReturn.
6.MaketheBoltslayervisible,andselectit.Dragtheboltssothey’repositionedoneithersideoftheneck.ChooseEdit>FreeTransform,andresizethemsothattheyfitsnuglyagainsttheneck.Whenyouhavetheminposition,pressEnterorReturntocommitthetransformation.
7.Lastly,maketheMonster_Hairlayervisible,andselectit.Moveitovertheforehead.ChooseEdit>Transform,andthenresizethehairsoitfitsproperlyagainsttheforehead.PressEnterorReturntocommitthechange.
8.Saveyourworksofar.
EditingaSmartFilterWithallthelayersinposition,youcanfurtherrefinetheeyeopeningsandexperimentwiththebulgesintheeyebrows.You’llreturntotheLiquifyfiltertomakethoseadjustments.
![Page 227: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
1.IntheLayerspanel,double-clickLiquify,listedunderSmartFiltersintheGreen_Skin_Texturelayer.
PhotoshopopenstheLiquifydialogboxagain.Thistime,allthelayersarevisibleinPhotoshop,sowhenShowBackdropisselected,youseethemall.Sometimesit’seasiertomakechangeswithoutabackdroptodistractyou.Othertimes,it’susefultoseeyoureditsincontext.
2.Zoomintoseetheeyesmoreclosely.
3.SelectthePuckertool( )intheToolspanel,andclickontheoutercornerofeacheye.
ThePuckertoolmovespixelstowardsthecenterofthebrushasyouclickordrag,forapuckeringeffect.
4.SelecttheBloattool( ),andclicktheouteredgeofaneyebrowtoexpandit;dothesamefortheothereyebrow.
TheBloattoolmovespixelsawayfromthecenterofthebrushasyouclickordrag.
5.ExperimentwiththePucker,Bloat,andothertoolsintheLiquifyfiltertocustomizethemonster’sface.Rememberthatyoucanchangethebrushsizeandothersettings.Youcanundoindividualsteps,butifyouwanttostartover,it’seasiesttoclickCancel,andthenreturntotheLiquifydialogbox.
6.Whenyou’rehappywiththemonster’sface,clickOK.
![Page 228: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
PaintingalayerTherearemanywaystopaintobjectsandlayersinPhotoshop.OneofthesimplestistousetheColorblendingmodeandtheBrushtool.You’llusethismethodtopainttheexposedskingreenonyourmonster.
1.SelecttheFrankenlayerintheLayerspanel.
2.ClicktheCreateANewLayerbuttonatthebottomoftheLayerspanel.
Photoshopcreatesanewlayer,namedLayer1.
3.WithLayer1selected,chooseColorfromtheBlendingModemenuatthetopoftheLayerspanel.
TheColorblendingmodecombinestheluminanceofthebasecolor(thecoloralreadyonthelayer)withthehueandsaturationofthecoloryou’reapplying.It’sagoodblendingmodetousewhenyou’recoloringmonochromeimagesortintingcolorimages.
Tip
Tolearnmoreaboutblendingmodes,includingadescriptionofeachone,see“Blendingmodes”inPhotoshopHelp.
4.SelecttheBrushtool( ).Intheoptionsbar,selecta60-pixelbrushwithahardnessof0.
5.PressAltorOptiontotemporarilyswitchtotheEyedroppertool.Sampleagreencolorfromtheforehead.ThenreleasetheAltorOptionkeytoreturntotheBrushtool.
![Page 229: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
6.Ctrl-clickorCommand-clickthethumbnailintheFrankenlayertoselectitscontents.
Usually,youselectanentirelayerintheLayerspanel.Whenyoudothat,thelayerisactive,butthereisn’tactuallyanactiveselection.WhenyouCtrl-clickorCommand-clickthethumbnailofthelayer,Photoshopselectsthecontentsofthelayer,soyouhaveanactiveselection.It’saquickwaytoselectallofthecontentsofalayer—butonlythecontentsofthatspecificlayer.
7.MakesureLayer1isstillselectedintheLayerspanel,andthenusetheBrushtooltopaintoverthehandsandarms.Youcanpaintquicklywherethehandsareagainsttransparentareas,becausepaintingoutsidetheselectionhasnoeffect.However,rememberthattheshirtispartoftheselection,soyouneedtobemorecarefulasyoupainttheskinwhereitabutstheshirtcolors.
![Page 230: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
Tip
Tochangethebrushsizeasyoupaint,pressthebracketkeysonyourkeyboard.TheLeftBracketkey([)decreasesthebrushsize;theRightBracket(])increasesit.
8.PaintanyareasofthefaceorneckwheretheoriginalfleshcolorshowsthroughtheGreen_Skin_Texturelayer.
9.Whenyou’rehappywiththegreenskin,chooseSelect>Deselect.Saveyourwork.
AddingabackgroundYou’vegotagood-lookingmonster.Nowit’stimetoputhiminhisspookyenvironment.Toeasilymovethemonsterontoabackground,you’llfirstmergethelayers.
1.Makesureallthelayersarevisible.ThenchooseMergeVisiblefromtheLayerspanelmenu.
![Page 231: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
Photoshopmergesallthelayersintoone,namedLayer1.
2.RenameLayer1Monster.
3.ChooseFile>Open.NavigatetoandopentheBackdrop.psdfileintheLesson09folder.
4.ChooseWindow>Arrange>2-UpVerticaltodisplayboththemonsterandbackdropfiles.
5.Clickthe09Working.psdfiletomakeitactive.
6.SelecttheMovetool( ),andthendragtheMonsterlayerontotheBackdrop.psdfile.Positionthemonstersohishandsarejustabovethemovietitle.
![Page 232: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
7.Closethe09Working.psdfile,savingthechangeswhenprompted.
Fromnowon,you’llworkonthemovieposterfileitself.
8.ChooseFile>SaveAs,andsavethefilewiththenameMovie-Poster.psd.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
UsingtheHistorypaneltoundotasksYou’veusedtheUndocommandtomovebackwardonestep.That’sasfarbackasUndocantakeyou.Thisisapracticality,becausePhotoshopfilescanbeverylarge,andmaintainingmultipleUndostepscantieupalotofmemory,whichtendstodegradeperformance.IfyoupressCtrl+ZorCommand+Ztoundo,andthenpresstheshortcutagain,Photoshoprestoresthestepyouinitiallyremoved.
Whenyouwanttogobackmorethanonestep,youcouldusetheStepBackwardcommandtoundostepsoneatatime,butit’sfasterandeasiertoreversemultipleactionsbyusingtheHistorypanel.
PhotoshopstoresarecordofthestepsyouperformintheHistorypanel.Knowingthis,youcantryacreativeapproach,easilyreturntoyourstartingpointifyoudon’tgettheresultsyouwant,andtrygoingadifferentdirection.
ApplyingfiltersandeffectsYou’lladdatombstonetotheposter,andyou’llexperimentwithfiltersandeffectstoseewhatworks,usingtheHistorypaneltoreversecourseifnecessary.
1.InPhotoshop,chooseFile>Open.
2.NavigatetotheLesson09folder,anddouble-clicktheT1.psdfiletoopenit.
Thetombstoneimageisplain,butyou’lladdtextureandcolortoit.
3.IntheToolspanel,clicktheDefaultForegroundAndBackgroundColorsicon( )to
![Page 233: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
returntheforegroundcolortoblack.
You’llstartbyaddingalittleatmospheretothetombstone.
4.ChooseFilter>Render>DifferenceClouds.
You’llleavethetopofthetombstoneinfocus,butblurtherestusinganirisblur.Thedefaultblursettingswillworkfine.
5.ChooseFilter>BlurGallery>IrisBlur.
6.Intheimagewindow,dragtheIrisBlurellipseupsothatthetopofthetombstoneisinfocus.ThenclickOK.
You’lluseadjustmentlayerstomaketheimagedarkerandchangeitscolor.
7.ClicktheBrightness/ContrasticonintheAdjustmentspanel.Then,inthePropertiespanel,movetheContrastsliderto70.
![Page 234: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
8.ClicktheChannelMixericonintheAdjustmentspanel.
9.InthePropertiespanel,chooseGreenfromtheOutputChannelmenu,andthenchangetheRedvalueto+37andtheBluevalueto+108.
Thetombstonetakesonagreencast.YoucanusetheChannelMixeradjustmenttocreatehigh-qualitygrayscale,sepiatone,orothertintedimages.Youcanalsomakecreativecoloradjustmentstoanimage.
10.ClicktheExposureiconintheAdjustmentspanel.InthePropertiespanel,movetheExposuresliderto+.90toincreasethecontrastintheimage.
![Page 235: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
UndoingmultiplestepsThetombstonecertainlylooksdifferentthanitdidwhenyoustarted,butitdoesn’tquitematchthetombstonesthatarealreadyintheposter.You’llusetheHistorypaneltorevisitthestepsyou’vetaken.
1.ChooseWindow>HistorytoopentheHistorypanel.Dragthebottomofthepaneldownsothatyoucanseeeverythinginit.
TheHistorypanelrecordstherecentactionsyou’veperformedontheimage.Thecurrentstateisselected.
2.ClicktheBlurGallerystateintheHistorypanel.
Thestatesbelowtheselectedstatearedimmed,andtheimagehaschanged.Thecolorisgone,asaretheBrightness/Contrastsettings.Atthispoint,theDifferenceCloudsfilterhasbeenrunandtheirisblurhasbeenapplied.Everythingelsehasbeenremoved.TherearenoadjustmentlayerslistedintheLayerspanel.
3.ClicktheModifyChannelMixerLayerstateintheHistorypanel.
Manyofthestatesarerestored.Thecolorhasreturned,alongwiththebrightnessandcontrastsettings.TherearetwoadjustmentlayersintheLayerspanel.However,thestatesbelowtheoneyouselectedremaindimmed,andtheExposureadjustmentlayerisnotlistedintheLayerspanel.
![Page 236: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
You’llreturnalmosttothebeginningtoapplydifferenteffectstothetombstone.
4.ClickDifferenceCloudsintheHistorypanel.
Everythingfollowingthatstateisdimmed.
5.ChooseFilter>Noise>AddNoise.
Addingnoisewillgivethetombstoneagrainierlook.
6.IntheAddNoisedialogbox,settheAmountto3%,selectGaussian,andselectMonochromatic.ThenclickOK.
ThestatesthatweredimmedarenolongerintheHistorypanel.Instead,theHistorypanelhasaddedastateforthetaskyoujustperformed(AddNoise),followingthestateyouhadselected(DifferenceClouds).Youcanclickanystatetoreturntothatpointintheprocess,butassoonasyouperformanewtask,Photoshopdeletesalldimmedstates.
![Page 237: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
7.ChooseFilter>Render>LightingEffects.
8.Intheoptionsbar,chooseFlashlightfromthePresetsmenu.
9.InthePropertiespanel,clicktheColorswatch,selectalightbluecolor,andthenclickOK.
10.Intheimagewindow,dragthelightsourcetotheupperthirdofthetombstone,centeredovertheletters“RIP.”
11.InthePropertiespanel,changetheAmbienceto46.
Note
TheLightingEffectsfilterisunavailableifUseGraphicsProcessorisnotselectedinthePerformancePreferencesdialogbox.IfyourvideocarddoesnotsupporttheUseGraphicsProcessoroption,skipsteps7–12.
12.ClickOKintheoptionsbartoaccepttheLightingEffectssettings.
Thetombstoneisreadytojointheothersinyourmovieposter.
13.Savethefile.
14.ChooseWindow>Arrange>TileAllVertically.
15.DragthetombstoneyoujustcreatedtotheMovie-Poster.psdfile.ClickOKifyouseeacolormanagementwarning.
16.Dragthetombstonetothebottomleftcorner,withthetopthirdofitshowing.
17.ChooseFile>SavetosavetheMovie-Poster.psdfile.ThenclosetheT1.psdfilewithoutsavingit.
![Page 238: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
You’vehadachancetotryoutsomenewfiltersandeffects,andtousetheHistorypaneltobacktrack.Bydefault,theHistorypanelretainsonlythelast20states.YoucanchangethenumberoflevelsintheHistorypanelbychoosingEdit>Preferences>Performance(Windows)orPhotoshopCC>Preferences>Performance(MacOS),andenteringadifferentvalueforHistoryStates.
Upscalingalow-resolutionimageLow-resolutionimagesarefine—evendesirable—forwebpagesandsocialmedia.Ifyouneedtoenlargethem,though,theymaynotcontainenoughinformationforhigh-qualityprinting.Toscaleanimageupinsize,Photoshopneedstoresampleit.Thatis,itneedstocreatenewpixelswherenoneexisted,approximatingtheirvalues.ThePreserveDetails(Enlargement)algorithminPhotoshopgivesthebestresultswhenyouupscalelow-resolutionimages.
Inyourmovieposter,youwanttousealow-resolutionimagethatwaspostedonasocialmediasite.You’llneedtoresizeitwithoutcompromisingqualityforyourprintedposter.
1.ChooseFile>Open,navigatetotheLesson09folder,andopentheFaces.jpgfile.
2.Zoominto300%,soyoucanseethepixels.
3.ChooseImage>ImageSize.
4.ChangethewidthandheightmeasurementstoPercent,andthenchangetheirvaluesto400%.
Thewidthandheightarelinkedbydefault,sothatimagesresizeproportionally.Ifyouneedtochangethewidthandheightseparatelyforaproject,clickthelinkicontounlinkthevalues.
5.Paninthepreviewwindowsothatyoucanseetheglasses.
6.MakesureResampleisselected,andchoosePreserveDetails(Enlargement)fromtheResamplemenu.
![Page 239: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
Theimageismuchsharper,butthesharpeninghasintroducedsomenoise.
7.MovetheReduceNoisesliderto50%tosmooththeimage.
8.Clickandholdonthepreviewwindowtoseetheoriginalimage,soyoucancompareittothealteredimage.
9.ClickOK.
Thefinalimagequalityissofter,butitholdsupwell,consideringyou’vequadrupledtheimagesizeandmadealow-resolutionimageusableforprint.You’llpastetheimageintoafeatheredselectionontheposter.
10.ChooseSelect>All,andthenchooseEdit>Copy.
11.SelecttheMovie-Poster.psdtabtobringittothefront,andthenselecttheEllipticalMarqueetool( ),hiddenbeneaththeRectangularMarqueetool( ).
12.Intheoptionsbar,enter50pxforFeathertosoftentheedgeofthepastedimage.
13.Drawanovalintheupperrightcorneroftheposter,abovethemonster’shead.Theovalshouldoverlapthewindowandfireescape.
14.ChooseEdit>PasteSpecial>PasteInto.ClickOKifyouseethePasteProfileMismatchdialogbox.
15.SelecttheMovetool( ),andcenterthepastedimageinthefeatheredarea.
16.IntheLayerspanel,chooseLuminosityfromtheBlendingModemenu,andmovetheOpacitysliderto50%.
![Page 240: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
17.ChooseFile>Save.ThenclosetheFaces.jpgfilewithoutsavingit.
Reviewquestions1.WhatarethedifferencesbetweenusingaSmartFilterandaregularfiltertoapplyeffectstoanimage?
2.WhatdotheBloatandPuckertoolsintheLiquifyfilterdo?
3.WhatdoestheHistorypaneldo?
Reviewanswers1.SmartFiltersarenondestructive:Theycanbeadjusted,turnedoffandon,anddeletedatanytime.Incontrast,regularfilterspermanentlychangeanimage;onceapplied,theycannotberemoved.ASmartFiltercanbeappliedonlytoaSmartObjectlayer.
2.TheBloattoolmovespixelsawayfromthecenterofthebrush;thePuckertoolmovespixelstowardthecenterofthebrush.
3.TheHistorypanelrecordsrecentstepsyou’veperformedinPhotoshop.YoucanreturntoanearlierstepbyselectingitintheHistorypanel.
![Page 241: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
10.PaintingwiththeMixerBrush
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Customizebrushsettings.
•Cleanthebrush.
•Mixcolors.
•Useanerodibletip.
•Createacustombrushpreset.
•Usewetanddrybrushestoblendcolor.
Thislessonwilltakeaboutanhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson10projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 242: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
PROJECT:DIGITALPAINTING
TheMixerBrushtoolgivesyouflexibility,color-mixingabilities,andbrushstrokesasifyouwerepaintingonaphysicalcanvas.
AbouttheMixerBrushInpreviouslessons,you’veusedbrushesinPhotoshoptoperformvarioustasks.TheMixerBrushisunlikeotherbrushesinthatitletsyoumixcolorswitheachother.Youcanchangethewetnessofthebrushandhowitmixesthebrushcolorwiththecoloralreadyonthecanvas.
Photoshopbrusheshaverealisticbristles,soyoucanaddtexturesthatresemblethoseinpaintingsyoumightcreateinthephysicalworld.Whilethisisagreatfeatureingeneral,it’sparticularlyusefulwhenyou’reusingtheMixerBrush.Youcanalsouseanerodibletiptoachievetheeffectsyoumightgetwithcharcoalpencilsandpastelsinthephysicalworld.Combiningdifferentbristlesettingsandbrushtipswithdifferentwetness,paint-load,andpaint-mixingsettingsgivesyouopportunitiestocreateexactlythelookyouwant.
![Page 243: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
GettingstartedInthislesson,you’llgetacquaintedwiththeMixerBrushaswellasthebrushtipandbristleoptionsavailableinPhotoshop.Startbytakingalookatthefinalprojectsyou’llcreate.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
4.InBridge,clickLessonsintheFavoritespanel.Double-clicktheLesson10folderintheContentpanel.
Note
IfBridgeisn’tinstalled,you’llbepromptedtoinstallitwhenyouchooseBrowseInBridge.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
5.PreviewtheLesson10endfiles.
You’llusethepaletteimagetoexplorebrushoptionsandlearntomixcolors.You’llthenapplywhatyou’velearnedtotransformthelandscapeimageintoawatercolor.
6.Double-click10Palette_Start.psdtoopenthefileinPhotoshop.
Note
IfyouplantodoalotofpaintinginPhotoshop,considerusingatablet,suchasaWacomtablet,insteadofamouse.Photoshopcansensethewayyouholdandusethepentochangethebrushwidth,strength,andangleonthefly.
7.ChooseFile>SaveAs,andnamethefile10Palette_Working.psd.ClickOKifthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogboxappears.
![Page 244: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
SelectingbrushsettingsTheimageincludesapaletteandfourtubesofcolor,whichyou’llusetosamplethecolorsyou’reworkingwith.You’llchangesettingsasyoupaintdifferentcolors,exploringbrushtipsettingsandwetnessoptions.
1.SelecttheZoomtool( ),andzoomintoseethetubesofpaint.
2.SelecttheEyedroppertool( ),andclicktheredtubetosampleitscolor.
Theforegroundcolorchangestored.
3.SelecttheMixerBrushtool( ),hiddenundertheBrushtool( ).
Note
IfyouhaveOpenGLenabled,Photoshopdisplaysasamplingringsoyoucanpreviewthecoloryou’repickingup.
4.ChooseWindow>BrushtoopentheBrushpanel.Selectthefirstbrush.
TheBrushpanelcontainsbrushpresetsandseveraloptionsforcustomizingbrushes.
![Page 245: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
ExperimentingwithwetnessoptionsandbrushesTheeffectofthebrushisdeterminedbytheWet,Load,andMixfieldsintheoptionsbar.Wetcontrolshowmuchpaintthebrushpicksupfromthecanvas.Loadcontrolshowmuchpaintthebrushholdswhenyoubeginpainting(aswithaphysicalbrush,itrunsoutofpaintasyoupaintwithit).Mixcontrolstheratioofpaintfromthecanvasandpaintfromthebrush.
Youcanchangethesesettingsseparately.However,it’sfastertoselectastandardcombinationfromthepop-upmenu.
1.Intheoptionsbar,chooseDryfromthepop-upmenuofblendingbrushcombinations.
WhenyouselectDry,Wetissetto0%,Loadto50%,andMixisnotapplicable.WiththeDrypreset,youpaintopaquecolor;youcannotmixcolorsonadrycanvas.
2.Paintintheareaabovetheredtube.Solidredappears.Asyoucontinuepaintingwithoutreleasingthemouse,thepainteventuallyfadesandrunsout.
![Page 246: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
3.Samplethebluecolorfromthebluetubeofpaint.YoucanusetheEyedroppertoolorAlt-click(Windows)orOption-click(MacOS)tosamplethecolor.IfyouusetheEyedroppertool,returntotheMixerBrushtoolafteryousamplethecolor.
4.IntheBrushpanel,selecttheroundfan-shapedbrush.ChooseWetfromthepop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.
Note
WhenyouAlt-clickorOption-clicktoloadpaint,thebrushpicksupcolorvariationsinthesamplearea.Tosampleonlysolidcolors,selectLoadSolidColorsOnlyintheCurrentBrushLoadmenuintheoptionsbar.
5.Paintabovethebluetube.Thepaintmixeswiththewhitebackground.
6.ChooseDryfromthemenuintheoptionsbar,andthenpaintagainabovethebluetube.Amuchdarker,moreopaqueblueappears,anddoesn’tmixwiththewhitebackground.
![Page 247: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
Tip
TheLiveTipBrushPreviewshowsyouthedirectionofthebristlesasyoupaint.ToshoworhidetheLiveTipBrushPreview,clicktheToggleTheLiveTipBrushPreviewbuttonatthebottomoftheBrushorBrushPresetspanel.TheLiveTipBrushPreviewisavailableonlywithOpenGLenabled.
Thebristlesfromthefanbrushyouselectedaremuchmoreapparentthanthebristlesyouusedoriginally.Changingbristlequalitiesmakesabigdifferenceinthetextureyoupaint.
7.IntheBrushpanel,decreasethenumberofbristlesto40%.Paintalittlemorewiththebluebrushtoseethechangeintexture.Thebristlesaremuchmoreobviousinthestroke.
8.Sampletheyellowcolorfromtheyellowpainttube.IntheBrushpanel,selecttheflat-pointbrushwithfewerbristles(theonetotherightofthefanbrush).ChooseDryfromthemenuintheoptionsbar,andthenpaintintheareaovertheyellowpainttube.
9.ChooseVeryWetfromthemenuintheoptionsbar,andthenpaintsomemore.Nowtheyellowmixeswiththewhitebackground.
![Page 248: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
UsinganerodibletipWhenyouuseanerodibletip,thewidthofthebrushchangesasyoupaint.ErodibletipsarerepresentedintheBrushpanelbypencilicons,becauseinthephysicalworld,pencilsandpastelshaveerodibletips.You’llexperimentwitherodiblepointandtriangletips.
1.Samplethegreencolorfromthegreenpainttube,andchooseDry,HeavyLoadintheoptionsbar.
2.Selectoneoftheerodibletips(anytipwithapencilicon),andthenchooseErodiblePointfromtheShapemenu.Changethebrush’sSizeto30pxandSoftnessto100%.
TheSoftnessvaluedetermineshowquicklythetiperodes.Ahighervalueresultsinfastererosion.
3.Drawazigzaglineabovethegreenpainttube.
Thelinegetsthickerasthetiperodes.
4.ClickSharpenTipintheBrushpanel,andthendrawalinenexttotheoneyoujustdrew.
Thesharpertipdrawsamuchnarrowerline.
5.ChooseErodibleTrianglefromtheShapemenuintheBrushpanel,anddrawazigzaglinewithit.
Youcanchoosefromseveralerodibletips,dependingontheeffectyouwant.
![Page 249: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
MixingcolorsYou’veusedwetanddrybrushes,changedbrushsettings,andmixedthepaintwiththebackgroundcolor.Now,you’llfocusmoreonmixingcolorswitheachotherasyouaddpainttothepainter’spalette.
1.Zoomoutjustenoughtoseethefullpaletteandthepainttubes.
Note
Dependingonthecomplexityofyourproject,youmayneedtobepatient.Mixingcolorscanbeamemory-intensiveprocess.
2.SelectthePaintmixlayerintheLayerspanel,sothecoloryoupaintwon’tblendwiththebrownpaletteontheBackgroundlayer.
TheMixerBrushtoolmixescolorsonlyontheactivelayerunlessyouselectSampleAllLayersintheoptionsbar.
3.UsetheEyedroppertooltosampletheredcolorfromtheredpainttube.Then,withtheMixerBrushtoolselected,selecttheroundbluntbrushintheBrushpanel(thefifthbrush).ThenchooseWetfromthepop-upmenuintheoptionsbar,andpaintinthetopcircleonthepalette.
4.ClicktheCleanTheBrushAfterEachStrokeicon( )intheoptionsbartodeselectit.
![Page 250: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
5.UsetheEyedroppertooltosamplethebluecolorfromthebluepainttube,andthenusetheMixerBrushtooltopaintinthesamecircle,mixingtheredwiththeblueuntilthecolorbecomespurple.
Tip
UsetheEyedroppertooltosamplethecolor,sinceit’sonadifferentlayer.YoucanpressItoselecttheEyedroppertool.
UsetheEyedroppertooltosampleacolorwhenthelayerthatcontainsthecolor(inthiscase,theBackgroundlayer)isn’tselected.
6.Paintinthenextcircle.You’repaintinginpurplebecausethepaintstaysonthebrushuntilyoucleanit.
7.Intheoptionsbar,chooseCleanBrushfromtheCurrentBrushLoadpop-upmenu.Thepreviewchangestoindicatetransparency,meaningthebrushhasnopaintloaded.
Toremovethepaintloadfromabrush,youcanchooseCleanBrushintheoptionsbar.Toreplacethepaintloadinabrush,sampleadifferentcolor.
IfyouwantPhotoshoptocleanthebrushaftereachstroke,selecttheCleanBrushiconintheoptionsbar.Toloadthebrushwiththeforegroundcoloraftereachstroke,selecttheLoadBrushiconintheoptionsbar.Bydefault,bothoftheseoptionsareselected.
8.ChooseLoadBrushfromtheCurrentBrushLoadpop-upmenuintheoptionsbartoloadthebrushwithblue,thecurrentforegroundcolor.Paintblueinhalfofthenextcircle.
![Page 251: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
9.Sampletheyellowcolorfromtheyellowpainttube,andpaintoverthebluewithawetbrushtomixthetwocolors.
10.Fillthelastcirclewithyellowandredpaint,mixingthetwowithawetbrushtocreateanorangecolor.
11.HidetheCircleslayerintheLayerspaneltoremovetheoutlinesonthepalette.
12.ChooseFile>Save.
![Page 252: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
TooltipsfromthePhotoshopevangelist
JulieanneKostisanofficialAdobePhotoshopevangelist.
MixerBrushshortcuts
TherearenodefaultkeyboardshortcutsfortheMixerBrushtool,butyoucancreateyourown.
Tocreatecustomkeyboardshortcuts:
1.ChooseEdit>KeyboardShortcuts.
2.ChooseToolsfromtheShortcutsFormenu.
3.Scrolldowntothebottomofthelist.
4.Selectacommand,andthenenteracustomshortcut.Youcancreateshortcutsforthefollowingcommands:
•LoadMixerBrush
•CleanMixerBrush
•ToggleMixerBrushAuto-Load
•ToggleMixerBrushAuto-Clean
•ToggleMixerBrushSampleAll
CreatingacustombrushpresetPhotoshopincludesnumerousbrushpresets,whichareveryhandy.Butifyouneedtotweakabrushforyourproject,youmightfinditeasiertocreateyourownpreset.You’llcreateabrushpresettouseinthefollowingexercise.
1.IntheBrushpanel,selectthefollowingsettings:
•Size:36px
•Shape:RoundFan
•Bristles:35%
•Length:32%
•Thickness:2%
•Stiffness:75%
•Angle:0°
•Spacing:2%
![Page 253: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
Note
Duetoananomaly,numbersyouenterintheSize,Bristles,Thickness,andStiffnessfieldsmaynotappearinthecorrectorder.Toavoidtheissue,selectonlythedigits(notthepercentagesign)inthefieldbeforeenteringanewvalue.
2.ChooseNewBrushPresetfromtheBrushpanelmenu.
3.NamethebrushLandscape,andclickOK.
4.ClickBrushPresetsintheBrushpaneltoopentheBrushPresetspanel.
TheBrushPresetspaneldisplayssamplesofthestrokescreatedbydifferentbrushes.Ifyouknowwhichbrushyouwanttouse,itcanbeeasiertofindbyname.You’lllistthembynamenow,soyoucanfindyourpresetforthenextexercise.
![Page 254: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
5.ChooseLargeListfromtheBrushPresetspanelmenu.
6.Scrolltothebottomofthelist.Thepresetyoucreated,namedLandscape,isthelastpresetinthelist.
7.Closethe10Palette_Working.psdfile.
MixingcolorswithaphotographEarlier,youmixedcolorswithawhitebackgroundandwitheachother.Now,you’lluseaphotographasyourcanvas.You’lladdcolorsandmixthemwitheachotherandwiththebackgroundcolorstotransformaphotographofalandscapeintoawatercolor.
1.ChooseFile>Open.Double-clickthe10Landscape_Start.jpgfileintheLesson10foldertoopenit.
2.ChooseFile>SaveAs.Renamethefile10Landscape_Working.jpg,andclickSave.ClickOKintheJPEGOptionsdialogbox.
![Page 255: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
You’llpainttheskyfirst.Startbysettingupthecolorandselectingthebrush.
3.ClicktheForegroundcolorswatchintheToolspanel.Selectamedium-lightbluecolor(wechoseR=185,G=204,B=228),andthenclickOK.
4.SelecttheMixerBrushtool( ),ifitisn’talreadyselected.ChooseDryfromthepop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.ThenselecttheLandscapebrushfromtheBrushPresetspanel.
Presetsaresavedonyoursystem,sothey’reavailablewhenyouworkwithanyimage.
5.Paintoverthesky,movinginclosetothetrees.Becauseyou’reusingadrybrush,thepaintisn’tmixingwiththecolorsbeneathit.
6.Selectadarkerbluecolor(weusedR=103,G=151,B=212),andadddarkercoloratthetopofthesky,stillusingthedrybrush.
7.Selectalightbluecoloragain,andchooseVeryWet,HeavyMixfromthepop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.Usethisbrushtoscrubdiagonallyacrossthesky,blendingthetwocolorsinwiththebackgroundcolor.Paintinclosetothetrees,andsmoothouttheentiresky.
Whenyou’resatisfiedwiththesky,moveontothegrassandtrees.
![Page 256: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
8.Selectalightgreen(weusedR=92,G=157,B=13).ChooseDryfromthepop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.Thenpaintalongthetopsectionofthegrasstohighlightit.
9.Sampleadarkergreenfromthegrassitself.ChooseVeryWet,HeavyMixintheoptionsbar.Thenpaintusingdiagonalstrokestoblendthecolorsinthegrass.
Tip
RememberthatyoucanAlt-click(Windows)orOption-click(MacOS)tosampleacolorinsteadofusingtheEyedroppertool.Tosampleonlysolidcolorsusingthekeyboardshortcut,chooseLoadSolidColorsOnlyfromtheCurrentBrushLoadpop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.
10.Samplealightgreen,andthenuseadrybrushtohighlightthelighterareasofthetreesandthesmalltreeinthemiddleofthelandscape.Thenselectadarkgreen(weusedR=26,G=79,B=34),andchooseVeryWet,HeavyMixintheoptionsbar.Paintwiththewetbrushtomixtogetherthecolorsinthetrees.
Sofar,sogood.Thebackgroundtreesandthebrowngrassesareallthatremaintobepainted.
11.Selectabluercolorforthebackgroundtrees(weusedR=65,G=91,B=116).Paintwithadrybrushtoaddtheblueatthetop.ThenchooseWetintheoptionsbar,andpainttomixtheblueintothetrees.
![Page 257: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/257.jpg)
Tip
Fordifferenteffects,paintindifferentdirections.WiththeMixerBrushtool,youcangowhereveryourartisticinstinctsleadyou.
12.Sampleabrowncolorfromthetallgrasses,andthenselectVeryWet,HeavyMixintheoptionsbar.Paintalongthetopofthetallgrasswithup-and-downstrokesforthelookofafield.Acrossthebackarea,behindthesmallcentertree,paintbackandforthtocreatesmoothstrokes.
13.ChooseFile>Save,andclosethedocument.
Voilà!You’vecreatedamasterpiecewithyourpaintsandbrushes,andthere’snomesstocleanup.
![Page 258: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/258.jpg)
Brushvariations
Youcangobeyondthesettingsintheseprojectstoexplorenumerousvariationsinbrushtipsandsettings.Inparticular,youmaywanttoplaywithBrushPoseandShapeDynamicsoptions.
BrushPosesettingschangethetilt,rotation,andpressureofthebrush.IntheBrushpanel,selectBrushPosefromthelistontheleft.MovetheTiltXslidertotiltthebrushfromlefttoright.MovetheTiltYslidertotiltthebrushforwardandbackward.ChangetheRotationvaluetorotatethebristles.(Rotationismoreobviouswhenusingaflatfan-shapedbrush,forexample.)ChangethePressuresettingtodeterminehowmucheffectthebrushhasontheartwork.
ShapeDynamicssettingsaffectthesteadinessofthestroke.Movethesliderstotherighttoincreasethevariabilityinthestroke.
Ifyou’reusingasupportedstylusorWacomtablet,Photoshoprecognizestheangleandpressureofthepenyou’reusing,andappliesthemtothebrush.YoucanusethepentocontrolsuchthingsasSizeJitter.ChoosePenPressureorPenTiltfromtheControlmenuintheShapeDynamicssettingstodeterminehowthevaluechanges.
Therearemanymoreoptions—somesubtle,somenotsosubtle—tocreatevarietyinbrusheffects.Whichoptionsareavailabledependonthebrushtipshapeyou’veselected.Formoreinformationaboutalltheoptions,seePhotoshopHelp.
Paintinggallery
ThepaintingtoolsandbrushtipsinPhotoshopletyoucreateallkindsofpaintingeffects.
Erodiblebrushtipsgiveanaddedrealismtoyourart.ThefollowingpagesshowexamplesofartcreatedwiththebrushtipsandtoolsinPhotoshop.
![Page 261: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/261.jpg)
Image©VictoriaPavlov,pavlovphotography.com
Image©sholby,www.sholby.net
![Page 263: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/263.jpg)
Image©JohnDerry,www.pixelart.com
Image©LynetteKent,www.LynetteKent.com
Reviewquestions1.WhatdoestheMixerBrushdothatotherbrushesdon’t?
2.Howdoyouloadamixerbrush?
3.Howdoyoucleanabrush?
4.Howcanyoudisplaythenamesofbrushpresets?
5.WhatistheLiveTipBrushPreview,andhowcanyouhideit?
6.Whatisanerodibletip?
Reviewanswers1.TheMixerBrushmixesthecolorofthepaintbrushwithcolorsonthecanvas.
![Page 264: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/264.jpg)
2.Youcanloadamixerbrushbysamplingacolor,eitherbyusingtheEyedroppertoolorkeyboardshortcuts(Alt-clickorOption-click).Or,youcanchooseLoadBrushfromthepop-upmenuintheoptionsbartoloadthebrushwiththeforegroundcolor.
3.Tocleanabrush,chooseCleanBrushfromthepop-upmenuintheoptionsbar.
4.Todisplaybrushpresetsbyname,opentheBrushPresetspanel,andthenchooseLargeList(orSmallList)fromtheBrushPresetspanelmenu.
5.TheLiveTipBrushPreviewshowsyouthedirectionthebrushstrokesaremoving.It’savailableifOpenGLisenabled.TohideorshowtheLiveTipBrushPreview,clicktheToggleTheLiveTipBrushPreviewiconatthebottomoftheBrushpanelortheBrushPresetspanel.
6.Anerodibletiperodes,changingthickness,asyoupaintordraw.It’ssimilartothewayapencilorpasteltipchangesshapeasiterodes.
![Page 265: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/265.jpg)
11.EditingVideo
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•CreateavideotimelineinPhotoshop.
•AddmediatoavideogroupintheTimelinepanel.
•Addmotiontostillimages.
•Animatetypeandeffectsusingkeyframes.
•Addtransitionsbetweenvideoclips.
•Includeaudioinavideofile.
•Renderavideo.
Thislessonwilltakeabout90minutestocomplete.DownloadtheLesson11projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
PROJECT:FAMILYVIDEOFROMMOBILEPHONE
YoucaneditvideofilesinPhotoshopusingmanyofthesameeffectsyouusetoeditimagefiles.Youcancreateamoviefromvideofiles,stillimages,SmartObjects,audio
files,andtypelayers;applytransitions;andanimateeffectsusingkeyframes.
![Page 266: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/266.jpg)
GettingstartedInthislesson,you’lleditavideothatwasshotusingacameraphone.You’llcreateavideotimeline,importclips,addtransitionsandothervideoeffects,andrenderthefinalvideo.First,lookatthefinalprojecttoseewhatyou’llbecreating.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.
Note
IfBridgeisn’tinstalled,you’llbepromptedtoinstallitwhenyouchooseBrowseInBridge.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
4.InBridge,selecttheLessonsfolderintheFavoritespanel.Then,double-clicktheLesson11folderintheContentpanel.
5.Double-clickthe11End.mp4filetoopenitinQuickTimeorWindowsMediaPlayer.
6.ClickthePlaybuttontoviewthefinalvideo.
Theshortvideoisacompilationofclipsfromadayatthebeach.Itincludestransitions,layereffects,animatedtext,andamusicaltrack.
7.CloseQuickTimeorWindowsMediaPlayer,andreturntoBridge.
8.Double-clickthe11End.psdfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
![Page 267: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/267.jpg)
AbouttheTimelinepanelIfyou’veusedavideo-editingapplicationsuchasAdobePremiere®ProorAdobeAfterEffects®,theTimelinepanelisprobablyfamiliar.YouusetheTimelinepaneltoassembleandarrangevideoclips,images,andaudiofilesforamoviefile.Youcaneditthedurationofeachclip,applyfiltersandeffects,animateattributessuchaspositionandopacity,mutesound,addtransitions,andperformotherstandardvideo-editingtaskswithouteverleavingPhotoshop.
1.ChooseWindow>TimelinetoopentheTimelinepanel.
EachvideocliporimageincludedintheprojectisrepresentedinaboxintheTimelinepanelandasalayerintheLayerspanel.VideoclipshaveabluebackgroundintheTimelinepanel;imagefileshaveapurplebackground.AtthebottomoftheTimelinepanelistheaudiotrack.
A.PlaybuttonB.PlayheadC.AudiotrackD.ImagefileE.Videoclip
2.ClickPlayintheTimelinepaneltoviewthemovie.
Theplayheadmovesacrossthetimeruler,displayingeachframeofthemovie.
3.Pressthespacebartopauseplayback.
4.Dragtheplayheadtoanotherpointinthetimeruler.
Theplayhead’slocationdetermineswhatappearsinthedocumentwindow.
OntheleftsideoftheTimelinepanelareanimationkeyframecontrols.You’llusethesetoanimatethepositionandotherattributesofimageandvideofilesacrosstime.
Whenyouworkwithvideo,Photoshopdisplaysguidelinesacrossthedocumentwindow.Theguidelinesidentifytheareathatwouldbevisibleifyoubroadcastthevideo.
5.Whenyou’vefinishedexploringtheendfile,closeit,butleavePhotoshopopen.Don’tsaveanychangesyoumighthavemade.
![Page 268: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/268.jpg)
CreatinganewvideoprojectWorkingwithvideoisalittledifferentfromworkingwithstillimagesinPhotoshop.Youmayfinditeasiesttocreatetheprojectfirst,andthenimporttheassetsyou’llbeusing.You’llchoosethevideopresetforthisproject,andthenaddninevideoandimagefilestoincludeinyourmovie.
CreatinganewfilePhotoshopincludesseveralfilmandvideopresetsforyoutochoosefrom.You’llcreateanewfileandselectanappropriatepreset.
1.ChooseFile>New.
Note
ThevideointhislessonwasshotusinganAppleiPhone,sooneoftheHDVpresetsisappropriate.The720ppresetprovidesgoodqualitywithoutprovidingtoomuchdataforeasystreamingonline.
2.Namethefile11Start.psd.
3.ChooseFilm&VideofromtheDocumentTypemenu.
4.ChooseHDV/HDTV720p/29.97fromtheSizemenu.
5.Acceptthedefaultsettingsfortheotheroptions,andclickOK.
6.ChooseFile>SaveAs,andsavethefileintheLesson11folder.
![Page 269: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/269.jpg)
ImportingassetsPhotoshopprovidestoolsspecificallyforworkingwithvideo,suchastheTimelinepanel,whichmayalreadybeopenbecauseyoupreviewedtheendfile.Toensureyouhaveaccesstotheresourcesyouneed,you’llselecttheMotionworkspaceandorganizeyourpanels.Thenyou’llimportthevideoclips,images,andaudiofileyouneedtocreatethemovie.
1.ChooseWindow>Workspace>Motion.
2.PullthetopedgeoftheTimelinepanelupsothatthepaneloccupiesthebottomhalfoftheworkspace.
3.SelecttheZoomtool( ),andthenclickFitScreenintheoptionsbarsothatyoucanseetheentirecanvaswithinthetophalfofthescreen.
4.IntheTimelinepanel,clickCreateVideoTimeline.Photoshopcreatesanewvideotimeline,includingtwodefaulttracks:Layer0andAudioTrack.
5.ClicktheVideomenuintheLayer0track,andchooseAddMedia.
![Page 270: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/270.jpg)
6.NavigatetotheLesson11folder.
7.Shift-selectthevideoandphotoassetsnumbered1–6,andclickOpen.
Note
WhenyouusetheAddMediabuttonwithanunspecifiedcanvas,Photoshopdeterminestheprojectsizebasedonthesizeofthefirstvideofileitfinds—or,ifyou’reimportingonlyimages,basedontheimagesize.
Photoshopimportsallsixoftheassetsyouselectedontothesametrack,nownamedVideoGroup1,intheTimelinepanel.Itdisplaysstillimageswithapurplebackgroundandvideoclipswithabluebackground.IntheLayerspanel,theassetsappearasindividuallayerswithinthelayergroupnamedVideoGroup1.Youdon’tneedtheLayer0layer,soyou’lldeleteit.
8.SelectLayer0intheLayerspanel,andclicktheDeleteLayerbuttonatthebottomofthepanel.ClickYestoconfirmthedeletion.
![Page 271: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/271.jpg)
ChangingthedurationandsizeofclipsinthetimelineTheclipsareofverydifferentlengths,meaningthey’dplayfordifferentamountsoftime.Forthisvideo,youwantalltheclipstobethesamelength,soyou’llshortenthemallto3seconds.Thelengthofaclip(itsduration)ismeasuredinsecondsandframes:03:00is3seconds;02:25is2secondsand25frames.
1.DragtheControlTimelineMagnificationslidertotherightatthebottomoftheTimelinepaneltozoominonthetimeline.Youwanttobeabletoseeathumbnailofeachclipandenoughdetailinthetimerulerthatyoucanaccuratelychangethedurationofeachclip.
Note
You’reshorteningeachcliptothesamelengthhere,butyoucanhaveclipsofvaryinglengths,dependingonwhat’sappropriatefortheproject.
2.Dragtherightedgeofthefirstclip(1_Family)to03:00onthetimeruler.Photoshopdisplaystheendpointandthedurationasyoudragsothatyoucanfindtherightstoppingpoint.
3.Dragtherightedgeofthesecondclip(2_BoatRide)toadurationof03:00.
Shorteningavideoclipdoesn’tcompressit;itremovespartoftheclipfromthevideo.Inthiscase,youwanttousethefirstthreesecondsofeachclip.Ifyouwantedtouseadifferentportionofavideoclip,youwouldshortentheclipfromeachend.Asyoudragtheendpointofavideoclip,Photoshopdisplaysapreviewsoyoucanseewhichpartoftheclipisincluded.
4.Repeatstep3foreachoftheremainingclipssothateachhasadurationof3seconds.
![Page 272: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/272.jpg)
Tip
Toquicklychangethedurationofavideoclip,clickthearrowintheupperrightcorner,andthentypeanewDurationvalue.Thisoptionisn’tavailableforstillimages.
Theclipsarenowtherightduration,butsomeoftheimagesarethewrongsizeforthecanvas.You’llresizethefirstimagebeforecontinuing.
5.Selectthe1_FamilylayerintheLayerspanel.TheclipisalsoselectedintheTimelinepanel.
Tip
Thearrowontheleftsideofaclip(nexttotheclip’sthumbnail)revealstheattributesyoucananimateusingkeyframes.ThearrowontherightsideofaclipopenstheMotionpanel.
6.Clickthetriangleintheupperrightcornerofthe1_FamilyclipintheTimelinepaneltoopentheMotionpanel.
7.ChoosePan&Zoomfromthemenu,andmakesureResizeToFillCanvasisselected.ThenclickanemptyareaoftheTimelinepaneltoclosetheMotionpanel.
Theimageresizestofitthecanvas,whichiswhatyouwanted.However,youdon’tactuallywanttopanandzoom.You’llremovetheeffect.
8.OpentheMotionpanelfromthe1_Familyclipagain,andchooseNoMotionfromthemenu.ClickanemptyareaoftheTimelinepaneltoclosetheMotionpanel.
9.ChooseFile>Save.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
![Page 273: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/273.jpg)
AnimatingtextwithkeyframesKeyframesletyoucontrolanimation,effects,andotherchangesthatoccurovertime.Akeyframemarksthepointintimewhereyouspecifyavalue,suchasaposition,size,orstyle.Tocreateachangeovertime,youmusthaveatleasttwokeyframes:oneforthestateatthebeginningofthechangeandoneforthestateattheend.Photoshopinterpolatesthevaluesforthepositionsinbetweensothatthechangetakeseffectsmoothlyoverthespecifiedtime.You’llusekeyframestoanimateamovietitle(BeachDay)fromlefttorightovertheopeningimage.
1.ClicktheVideopop-upmenuintheVideoGroup1track,andchooseNewVideoGroup.PhotoshopaddsVideoGroup2totheTimelinepanel.
2.SelecttheHorizontalTypetool( ),andthenclickontheleftedgeoftheimage,abouthalfwaydownfromthetop.
Photoshopcreatesanewtypelayer,namedLayer1,intheVideoGroup2track.
3.Intheoptionsbar,selectasansseriffontsuchasMyriadPro,setthetypesizeto600pt,andselectwhiteforthetypecolor.
4.TypeBEACHDAY.
Thetextislargeenoughthatitdoesn’tallfitontheimage.That’sokay;you’llanimateittomoveacrosstheimage.
5.IntheLayerspanel,changetheopacityfortheBEACHDAYlayerto25%.
6.IntheTimelinepanel,dragtheendpointofthetypelayerto03:00sothatithasthe
![Page 274: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/274.jpg)
samedurationasthe1_Familylayer.
7.ClickthearrownexttothethumbnailintheBEACHDAYcliptodisplaytheclip’sattributes.
8.Makesuretheplayheadisatthebeginningofthetimeruler.
9.Clickthestopwatchicon( )nexttotheTransformpropertytosetaninitialkeyframeforthelayer.
Thekeyframeappearsasayellowdiamondinthetimeline.
10.SelecttheMovetool( ),anduseittodragthetypelayeroverthecanvassothatthetopofthelettersalignwiththelowerofthetwotopguidelines.Dragittotherightsothatonlytheleftedgeoftheletter“B”intheword“BEACH”isvisibleonthecanvas.Thekeyframeyousetensuresthatthetextwillbeinthispositionatthebeginningofthemovie.
11.Movetheplayheadtothelastframeofthefirstclip(02:29).
Tip
Photoshopdisplaystheplayhead’slocationinthelowerleftcorneroftheTimelinepanel.
12.PresstheShiftkeyasyoudragthetypelayertotheleftoverthecanvassothatonlytherightedgeofthe“Y”intheword“DAY”isvisible.PressingtheShiftkeyensuresthetyperemainslevelasyoumoveitacross.
Becauseyou’vechangedtheposition,Photoshopcreatesanewkeyframe.
![Page 275: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/275.jpg)
13.Movetheplayheadacrossthefirstthreesecondsofthetimerulertopreviewtheanimation.Thetitlemovesacrosstheimage.
14.Clickthetrianglenexttothethumbnailofthetextcliptoclosetheclip’sattributes,andthenchooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
CreatingeffectsOneofthebenefitsofworkingwithvideofilesinPhotoshopisthatyoucancreateeffectsusingadjustmentlayers,styles,andsimpletransformations.
AddingadjustmentlayerstovideoclipsYou’veusedadjustmentlayerswithstillimagesthroughoutthisbook.Theyworkjustaswellonvideoclips.Whenyouapplyanadjustmentlayerinavideogroup,PhotoshopappliesitonlytothelayerimmediatelybelowitintheLayerspanel.
1.Selectthe3_DogAtBeachlayerintheLayerspanel.
2.IntheTimelinepanel,movetheplayheadtothebeginningofthe3_DogAtBeachlayersoyoucanseetheeffectasyouapplyit.
3.IntheAdjustmentspanel,clicktheBlack&Whitebutton.
Note
IfyouhadimportedthevideofileusingthePlacecommand,sothatitwasnotinavideogroup,youwouldneedtocreateaclippinglayertolimittheadjustmentlayertoasinglelayer.
4.InthePropertiespanel,leavethedefaultpreset,andselectTint.Thedefaulttintcolorcreatesasepiaeffectthatworkswellforthisclip.Youcanexperimentwiththeslidersandthetintcolortomodifytheblack-and-whiteeffecttoyourtaste.
![Page 276: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/276.jpg)
5.Movetheplayheadacrossthe3_DogAtBeachclipintheTimelinepaneltopreviewtheeffect.
AnimatingazoomeffectEvensimpletransformationsbecomeinterestingeffectswhenyouanimatethem.You’lluseanimationtozoominonthe4_Dogsclip.
1.Movetheplayheadtothebeginningofthe4_DogsclipintheTimelinepanel(09:00).
2.Clickthearrowinthe4_DogscliptodisplaytheMotionpanel.
3.ChooseZoomfromthepop-upmenu,andchooseZoomInfromtheZoommenu.OntheZoomFromgrid,selecttheupperleftcornertozoominfromthatpoint.MakesureResizeToFillCanvasisselected,andthenclickanemptyareaoftheTimelinepaneltoclosetheMotionpanel.
4.Dragtheplayheadacrossthecliptopreviewtheeffect.
You’llenlargetheimageinthelastkeyframetomakethezoommoredramatic.
5.Clickthearrowontheleftsideofthe4_Dogscliptorevealtheattributesfortheclip.
Therearetwokeyframes,oneforthebeginningoftheZoomIneffect,andonefortheend.
6.ClicktherightarrownexttotheTransformattribute(underVideoGroup1ontheleftsideoftheTimelinepanel)tomovetheplayheadtothelastkeyframeifit’snot
![Page 277: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/277.jpg)
alreadythere,andchooseEdit>FreeTransform.Thenenter120%forWidthandHeightintheoptionsbar.PressEnterorReturntoconfirmthetransformation.
Tip
YoucanmovetothenextkeyframebyclickingtherightarrownexttotheattributeintheTimelinepanel.Clicktheleftarrowtomovetothepreviouskeyframe.
7.Dragtheplayheadacrossthe4_Dogsclipinthetimerulertopreviewtheanimationagain.
8.ChooseFile>Save.
AnimatinganimagetocreateamotioneffectYou’llanimateanothertransformationtocreatetheappearanceofmotion.Youwanttheimagetobeginwiththediver’slegsandendwithhishands.
1.Movetheplayheadtotheendofthe5_Jumpingclip(14:29),andselecttheclip.PressShiftwhileyoumovetheimagedowninthedocumentwindowsothatthehandsarenearthetopofthecanvas,puttingthediverinthefinalposition.
2.Displaytheattributesfortheclip,andclickthestopwatchiconforthePositionattributetoaddakeyframe.
3.Movetheplayheadtothebeginningoftheclip(12:00).PressShiftwhileyoumovetheimageupsothatthefeetarenearthebottomofthecanvas.
Photoshopaddsakeyframe.
![Page 278: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/278.jpg)
4.Movetheplayheadacrossthetimerulertopreviewtheanimation.
5.Closetheclip’sattributes.ThenchooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
Addingpan&zoomeffectsYoucaneasilyaddfeaturessimilartothepanandzoomeffectsusedindocumentaries.You’lladdthemtothesunsettobringthevideotoadramaticclose.
1.Movetheplayheadtothebeginningofthe6_Sunsetclip.
2.OpentheMotionpanelfortheclip.ChoosePan&Zoomfromthepop-upmenu,chooseZoomOutfromtheZoommenu,andmakesureResizeToFillCanvasisselected.ThenclickanemptyareaoftheTimelinepaneltoclosetheMotionpanel.
3.Movetheplayheadacrossthelastcliptopreviewtheeffects.
AddingtransitionsAtransitionmovesascenefromoneshottothenext.SimplydraganddroptoaddtransitionstoclipsinPhotoshop.
1.ClicktheGoToFirstFramebutton( )intheupperleftcorneroftheTimelinepaneltoreturntheplayheadtothebeginningofthetimeruler.
2.ClicktheTransitionbutton( )intheupperleftcorneroftheTimelinepanel.SelectCrossFade,andchangetheDurationvalueto.25s(foraquarterofasecond).
3.DragtheCrossFadetransitionbetweenthe1_Familyand2_BoatRideclips.
![Page 279: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/279.jpg)
Photoshopadjuststheendsoftheclipstoapplythetransitionandaddsasmallwhiteiconinthelowercornerofthesecondclip.
4.DragCrossFadetransitionsbetweeneachoftheotherclips.
5.DragaFadeWithBlacktransitionontotheendofthefinalclip.
6.Tomakethetransitionsmoother,extendtheFadeWithBlacktransitionbystretchingitsleftsidetoaboutone-thirdthetotallengthoftheclip.
7.ChooseFile>Save.
![Page 280: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/280.jpg)
AddingaudioYoucanaddaseparateaudiotracktoavideofileinPhotoshop.Infact,theTimelinepanelincludesanaudiotrackbydefault.You’lladdanMP3filetoplayasthesoundtrackforthisshortvideo.
1.ClickthenoteiconintheAudioTrackatthebottomoftheTimelinepanel,andchooseAddAudiofromthepop-upmenu.
Tip
Youcanalsoaddanaudiotrackbyclickingthe+signatthefarrightendofthetrackintheTimelinepanel.
2.Selectthebeachsong.mp3filefromtheLesson11folder,andclickOpen.
Theaudiofileisaddedtothetimeline,butit’smuchlongerthanthevideo.You’llusetheSplitAtPlayheadtooltoshortenit.
3.Movetheplayheadtotheendofthe6_Sunsetclip.Withtheaudiofilestillselected,clicktheSplitAtPlayheadtool.
Theaudiofileisclippedatthatpoint,becomingtwoaudioclips.
4.Selectthesecondaudiofilesegment,theonethatbeginsaftertheendofthe6_Sunsetclip.PresstheDeletekeyonyourkeyboardtodeletetheselectedclip.
Nowtheaudiofileisthesamelengthasthevideo.You’lladdafadesothatitendssmoothly.
5.ClickthesmallarrowattherightedgeoftheaudiocliptoopentheAudiopanel.Thenenter3secondsforFadeInand5secondsforFadeOut.
![Page 281: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/281.jpg)
6.Saveyourworksofar.
MutingunwantedaudioSofar,you’vepreviewedportionsofthevideobymovingtheplayheadacrossthetimeruler.Nowyou’llpreviewtheentirevideousingthePlaybuttonintheTimelinepanel,andthenmuteanyextraneousaudiofromthevideoclips.
1.ClickthePlaybutton( )intheupperleftcorneroftheTimelinepaneltopreviewthevideosofar.
Tip
Tocreateasmootherpreview,disabletheaudioplaybackbuttonintheTimelinepanelthefirsttimeyouplaythevideo.Withaudioplaybackdisabled,Photoshopcancreateamorecompletecache,resultinginamoreaccuratepreview.
It’slookinggood,butthereissomeunwantedbackgroundnoisefromthevideoclips.You’llmutethatextrasound.
2.Clickthesmalltriangleattherightendofthe2_BoatRideclip.
3.ClicktheAudiotabtoseeaudiooptions,andthenselectMuteAudio.ClickanemptyareaoftheTimelinepaneltoclosetheAudio/Videopanel.
4.Clickthesmalltriangleattherightendofthe3_DogAtBeachclip.
5.ClicktheAudiotabtoseeaudiooptions,andthenselectMuteAudio.ClickanemptyareaoftheTimelinepaneltoclosethepanel.
![Page 282: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/282.jpg)
RenderingvideoYou’rereadytorenderyourprojecttovideo.Photoshopprovidesseveralrenderingoptions.You’llselectoptionsappropriateforstreamingvideotoshareontheVimeowebsite.Forinformationaboutotherrenderingoptions,seePhotoshopHelp.
1.ChooseFile>Export>RenderVideo,orclicktheRenderVideobutton( )inthelowerleftcorneroftheTimelinepanel.
2.Namethefile11Final.mp4.
3.ClickSelectFolder,andthennavigatetotheLesson11folder,andclickOKorChoose.
4.FromthePresetmenu,chooseVimeoHD720p25.
5.ClickRender.
Photoshopdisplaysaprogressbarasitexportsthevideo.Dependingonyoursystem,therenderingprocessmaytakeseveralminutes.
Dependingonyoursystem,thismaytakeawhile.
6.Locatethe11Final.mp4fileintheLesson11folderinBridge.Double-clickittoviewthevideoyoumade.
![Page 283: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/283.jpg)
Reviewquestions1.Whatisakeyframe,andhowdoyoucreateone?
2.Howdoyouaddatransitionbetweenclips?
3.Howdoyourenderavideo?
Reviewanswers1.Akeyframemarksthepointintimewhereyouspecifyavalue,suchasaposition,size,orstyle.Tocreateachangeovertime,youmusthaveatleasttwokeyframes:oneforthestateatthebeginningofthechangeandoneforthestateattheend.Tocreateaninitialkeyframe,clickthestopwatchiconnexttotheattributeyouwanttoanimateforthelayer.Photoshopcreatesadditionalkeyframeseachtimeyouchangethevaluesofthatattribute.
2.Toaddatransition,clicktheTransitionbuttonintheupperleftcorneroftheTimelinepanel,andthendragatransitionontoaclip.
3.Torenderavideo,chooseFile>Export>RenderVideo,orclicktheRenderVideobuttoninthelowerleftcorneroftheTimelinepanel.Thenselectthevideosettingsthatareappropriateforyourintendedoutput.
![Page 284: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/284.jpg)
12.WorkingwithCameraRaw
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•OpenaproprietarycamerarawimageinAdobeCameraRaw.
•Adjusttoneandcolorinarawimage.
•SharpenanimageinCameraRaw.
•Synchronizesettingsformultipleimages.
•OpenaCameraRawimageasaSmartObjectinPhotoshop.
•ApplyCameraRawasafilterinPhotoshop.
Thislessonwilltakeaboutanhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson12projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 285: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/285.jpg)
PROJECT:ADVANCEDPHOTORETOUCHING
Rawimagesgiveyougreaterflexibility,especiallyinsettingcolorandtone.CameraRawletsyoutapintothatpotential.Itcanbeausefultoolevenwhenyou’restarting
withaJPEGorTIFFimage,orwhenyouapplyitasafilterinPhotoshop.
GettingstartedInthislesson,you’lleditseveraldigitalimagesusingPhotoshopandAdobeCameraRaw,whichcomeswithPhotoshop.You’lluseavarietyoftechniquestotouchupandimprovetheappearanceofdigitalphotographs.You’llstartbyviewingthebeforeandafterimagesinAdobeBridge.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See
![Page 286: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/286.jpg)
“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
Note
WeusedAdobeCameraRaw8.5,whichwasthecurrentversionatthetimeofpublication.AdobeupdatesCameraRawfrequently;ifyou’reusingalaterversion,someofthestepsinthislessonmaynotmatchwhatyousee.
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
Note
Ifyouhaven’tinstalledBridge,you’llbepromptedtodosowhenyouchooseBrowseInBridge.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
4.IntheFavoritespanelinBridge,clicktheLessonsfolder.Then,intheContentpanel,double-clicktheLesson12foldertoopenit.
5.Adjustthethumbnailslider,ifnecessary,sothatyoucanseethethumbnailpreviewsclearly.Thenlookatthe12A_Start.crwand12A_End.psdfiles.
TheoriginalphotographofaSpanish-stylechurchisacamerarawfile,soitdoesn’thavetheusual.psdor.jpgfileextensionyou’veworkedwithsofarinthisbook.ItwasshotwithaCanonDigitalRebelcameraandhastheCanonproprietary.crwfileextension.You’llprocessthisproprietarycamerarawimagetomakeitbrighter,sharper,andclearer,andthensaveitasaJPEGfileforthewebandasaPSDfilesothatyoucouldworkonitfurtherinPhotoshop.
6.Comparethe12B_Start.nefand12B_End.psdthumbnailpreviews.
![Page 287: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/287.jpg)
Thistime,thestartfilewastakenwithaNikoncamera,andtherawimagehasan.nefextension.You’llperformcolorcorrectionsandimageenhancementsinCameraRawandPhotoshoptoachievetheendresult.
AboutcamerarawfilesAcamerarawfilecontainsunprocessedpicturedatafromadigitalcamera’simagesensor.Manydigitalcamerascansaveimagesincamerarawformat.Theadvantageofcamerarawfilesisthattheyletthephotographer—ratherthanthecamera—interprettheimagedataandmakeadjustmentsandconversions.(Incontrast,shootingJPEGimageswithyourcameralocksthecamera’sprocessingintotheimage.)Becausethecameradoesn’tdoanyimageprocessingwhenyoushootacamerarawphoto,youcanuseAdobeCameraRawtosetthewhitebalance,tonalrange,contrast,colorsaturation,andsharpening.Thinkofcamerarawfilesasphotonegatives:Youcangobackandreprocessthefileanytimeyouliketoachievetheresultsyouwant.
Tocreatecamerarawfiles,setyourdigitalcameratosavefilesinitsown,possiblyproprietary,rawfileformat.Whenyoudownloadthefilefromyourcamera,ithasafileextensionsuchas.nef(fromNikon)or.crw(fromCanon).InBridgeorPhotoshop,youcanprocesscamerarawfilesfromamyriadofsupporteddigitalcamerasfromCanon,Kodak,Leica,Nikon,andothermakers—andevenprocessmultipleimagessimultaneously.YoucanthenexporttheproprietarycamerarawfilestoDNG,JPEG,TIFF,orPSDfileformat.
Note
ThePhotoshopRawformat(.rawextension)isafileformatfortransferringimagesbetweenapplicationsandcomputerplatforms.Don’tconfusePhotoshopRawwithcamerarawfileformats.
Youcanprocesscamerarawfilesobtainedfromsupportedcameras,butyoucanalsoopenTIFFandJPEGimagesinCameraRaw,whichincludessomeeditingfeaturesthataren’t
![Page 288: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/288.jpg)
inPhotoshop.However,youwon’thavethesameflexibilitywithwhitebalanceandothersettingsifyou’reusingaTIFForJPEGimage.AlthoughCameraRawcanopenandeditacamerarawimagefile,itcannotsaveanimageincamerarawformat.
ProcessingfilesinCameraRawWhenyoumakeadjustmentstoanimageinCameraRaw,suchasstraighteningorcroppingtheimage,PhotoshopandBridgepreservetheoriginalfiledata.Thisway,youcanedittheimageasyoudesire,exporttheeditedimage,andkeeptheoriginalintactforfutureuseorotheradjustments.
OpeningimagesinCameraRawYoucanopenCameraRawfromeitherBridgeorPhotoshop,andyoucanapplythesameeditstomultiplefilessimultaneously.Thisisespeciallyusefulifyou’reworkingwithimagesthatwereallshotinthesameenvironment,andwhichthereforeneedthesamelightingandotheradjustments.
CameraRawprovidesextensivecontrolsforadjustingwhitebalance,exposure,contrast,sharpness,tonecurves,andmuchmore.Inthisexercise,you’lleditoneimageandthenapplythesettingstosimilarimages.
1.InBridge,opentheLessons/Lesson12/Missionfolder,whichcontainsthreeshotsoftheSpanishchurchyoupreviewedearlier.
2.Shift-clicktoselectalloftheimages—Mission01.crw,Mission02.crw,andMission03.crw—andthenchooseFile>OpenInCameraRaw.
![Page 289: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/289.jpg)
A.FilmstripB.ToggleFilmstrip
C.ToolbarD.RGBvalues
E.ImageadjustmenttabsF.Histogram
G.CameraRawSettingsmenuH.Zoomlevels
I.ClicktodisplayworkflowoptionsJ.Multi-imagenavigationcontrols
K.Adjustmentsliders
TheCameraRawdialogboxdisplaysalargepreviewofthefirstimage,andafilmstripdowntheleftsidedisplaysallopenimages.Thehistogramintheupperrightcornershowsthetonalrangeoftheselectedimage;theworkflowoptionslinkbelowthepreviewwindowdisplaystheselectedimage’scolorspace,bitdepth,size,andresolution.Toolsalongthetopofthedialogboxletyouzoom,pan,straighten,andmakeotheradjustmentstotheimage.Tabbedpanelsontherightsideofthedialogboxgiveyoumorenuancedoptionsforadjustingtheimage:Youcancorrectthewhitebalance,adjustthetone,sharpentheimage,removenoise,adjustcolor,andmakeotherchanges.Youcanalsosave
![Page 290: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/290.jpg)
settingsasapreset,andthenapplythemlater.
ForthebestresultsusingCameraRaw,planyourworkflowtomovefromlefttorightandtoptobottom.Thatis,you’lloftenwanttousethetoolsacrossthetopfirst,andthenmovethroughthepanelsinorder,makingchangesasnecessary.
Youwillexplorethesecontrolsnowasyoueditthefirstimagefile.
3.Clickeachthumbnailinthefilmstriptopreviewalltheimagesbeforeyoubegin.Or,youcanclicktheForwardbuttonunderthemainpreviewwindowtocyclethroughthem.Whenyou’veseenallthree,selecttheMission01.crwimageagain.
![Page 291: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/291.jpg)
AdjustingwhitebalanceAnimage’swhitebalancereflectsthelightingconditionsunderwhichitwascaptured.Adigitalcamerarecordsthewhitebalanceatthetimeofexposure;thisisthevaluethatinitiallyappearsintheCameraRawdialogboximagepreview.
Whitebalancecomprisestwocomponents.Thefirstistemperature,whichismeasuredinkelvinsanddeterminesthelevelof“coolness”or“warmness”oftheimage—thatis,itscoolblue-greentonesorwarmyellow-redtones.Thesecondcomponentistint,whichcompensatesformagentaorgreencolorcastsintheimage.
Dependingonthesettingsyou’reusingonyourcameraandtheenvironmentinwhichyou’reshooting(forexample,ifthere’sglareorunevenlighting),youmaywanttoadjustthewhitebalancefortheimage.Ifyouplantomodifythewhitebalance,makethatthefirstthingyoudo,asitwillaffectallotherchangesintheimage.
1.IftheBasicpanelisn’talreadydisplayedontherightsideofthedialogbox,clicktheBasicbutton( )toopenit.
Bydefault,AsShotisselectedintheWhiteBalancemenu.CameraRawappliesthewhitebalancesettingsthatwereinyourcameraatthetimeofexposure.CameraRawincludesseveralWhiteBalancepresets,whichyoucanuseasastartingpointtoseedifferentlightingeffects.
2.ChooseCloudyfromtheWhiteBalancemenu.
CameraRawadjuststhetemperatureandtintforacloudyday.Sometimesapresetdoesthetrick.Inthiscase,though,there’sstillabluecasttotheimage.You’lladjustthewhitebalancemanually.
3.SelecttheWhiteBalancetool( )atthetopoftheCameraRawdialogbox.
Tosetanaccuratewhitebalance,selectanobjectthatshouldbewhiteorgray.CameraRawusesthatinformationtodeterminethecolorofthelightinwhichthescenewasshot,andthenadjustsforscenelightingautomatically.
4.Clickthewhitecloudsintheimage.Thelightingoftheimagechanges.
![Page 292: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/292.jpg)
5.Clickadifferentareaoftheclouds.Thelightingshifts.
YoucanusetheWhiteBalancetooltofindthebestlightingforthescenequicklyandeasily.Clickingdifferentareaschangesthelightingwithoutmakinganypermanentchangestothefile,soyoucanexperimentfreely.
6.Clickthecloudsdirectlytotheleftofthesteeple.Thisselectionremovesmostofthecolorcastsandresultsinrealisticlighting.
7.MovetheTintsliderto-22tointensifythegreens.
Tip
Toundothesettings,pressCtrl+Z(Windows)orCommand+Z(MacOS).
8.Toseethechangesyou’vemade,clickthepreviewmodebutton( )atthebottom
![Page 293: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/293.jpg)
ofthewindow,andchooseBefore/AfterLeft/Rightfromthepop-upmenu.
Tip
ToexpandCameraRawtofillthescreen,clicktheToggleFull-ScreenModebutton( )onthefarrightsideofthetoolbar,orpressF.
CameraRawdisplaystheBeforeimageontheleftandtheAfterimageontherightsoyoucanseethechangesyou’vemade.
9.ToseeonlytheAfterimageagain,chooseSingleViewfromthepreviewmodepop-upmenu.Ifyouprefer,youcanleavebothviewsvisiblesoyoucanseehowtheimagehaschangedasyoucontinuetoalterit.
![Page 294: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/294.jpg)
MakingtonaladjustmentsinCameraRawOtherslidersintheBasicpanelaffectexposure,brightness,contrast,andsaturationintheimage.ExceptforContrast,movingaslidertotherightlightenstheaffectedareasoftheimage,andmovingittotheleftdarkensthoseareas.Exposureessentiallydefinesthewhitepoint,orthelightestpointoftheimage,sothatCameraRawadjustseverythingelseaccordingly.Conversely,theBlacksslidersetstheblackpoint,orthedarkestpointintheimage.TheHighlightsandShadowsslidersincreasedetailinthehighlightsandtheshadows,respectively.
TheContrastslideradjuststhecontrast.Formorenuancedcontrastadjustments,youcanusetheClarityslider,whichaddsdepthtoanimagebyincreasinglocalcontrast,especiallyonthemidtones.
Tip
Forthebesteffect,increasetheClarityslideruntilyouseehalosneartheedgedetails,andthenreducethesettingslightly.
TheSaturationslideradjuststhesaturationofallcolorsintheimageequally.TheVibranceslider,ontheotherhand,hasagreatereffectonundersaturatedcolors.Youcanuseittobringlifetoabackgroundwithoutoversaturatinganyskintonesintheimage,forexample.
YoucanusetheAutooptiontoletCameraRawattempttocorrecttheimagetone,oryoucanselectyourownsettings.
1.ClickAutointheBasicpanel.
CameraRawincreasestheexposureandchangesseveralothersettings.Youcouldusethisasastartingpoint.However,inthisexercise,you’llreturntothedefaultsettingsandadjustthemyourself.
2.ClickDefaultintheBasicpanel.
![Page 295: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/295.jpg)
3.Changetheslidersasfollows:
•Exposure:+0.20
•Contrast:+18
•Highlights:+8
•Shadows:+63
•Whites:+12
•Blacks:-14
•Clarity:+3
•Vibrance:+4
•Saturation:+1
Thesesettingshelppumpupthemidtonesoftheimagesothatitlooksbolderandmoredimensionalwithoutbeingoversaturated.
![Page 296: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/296.jpg)
AbouttheCameraRawhistogram
ThehistogramintheupperrightcorneroftheCameraRawdialogboxsimultaneouslyshowsthered,green,andbluechannelsoftheselectedimage,andupdatesinteractivelyasyouadjustanysettings.Also,asyoumoveanytooloverthepreviewimage,theRGBvaluesfortheareaunderthecursorappearbelowthehistogram.
ApplyingsharpeningPhotoshopoffersseveralsharpeningfilters,butwhenyouneedtosharpenanentireimage,CameraRawprovidesthebestcontrol.ThesharpeningcontrolsareintheDetailpanel.Toseetheeffectofsharpeninginthepreviewpanel,youmustviewtheimageat100%orgreater.
1.Double-clicktheZoomtool( )ontheleftsideofthetoolbartozoominto100%.ThenselecttheHandtool( ),andpantheimagetoseethecrossatthetopofthemissiontower.
2.ClicktheDetailbutton( )toopentheDetailpanel.
TheAmountsliderdetermineshowmuchsharpeningCameraRawapplies.Typically,you’llwanttoexaggeratetheamountofsharpeningatfirst,andthenadjustitafteryou’vesettheothersliders.
3.MovetheAmountsliderto100.
TheRadiussliderdeterminesthepixelareaCameraRawanalyzesasitsharpenstheimage.Formostimages,you’llgetthebestresultsifyoukeeptheradiuslow,evenbelowonepixel.Alargerradiuscanbegintocauseanunnaturallook,almostlikeawatercolor.
![Page 297: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/297.jpg)
4.MovetheRadiussliderto0.9.
TheDetailsliderdetermineshowmuchdetailyou’llsee.Evenwhenthissliderissetto0,CameraRawperformssomesharpening.Typically,you’llwanttokeeptheDetailsettingrelativelylow.
5.MovetheDetailsliderto25,ifitisn’talreadythere.
TheMaskingsliderdetermineswhichpartsoftheimageCameraRawsharpens.WhentheMaskingvalueishigh,CameraRawsharpensonlythosepartsoftheimagethathavestrongedges.
6.MovetheMaskingsliderto61.
Afteryou’veadjustedtheRadius,Detail,andMaskingsliders,youcanlowertheAmountslidertofinalizethesharpening.
7.DecreasetheAmountsliderto70.
Tip
PressAlt(Windows)orOption(MacOS)asyoumovetheMaskingslidertoseewhatCameraRawwillsharpen.
Sharpeningtheimagegivesstrongerdefinitiontothedetailsandedges.TheMaskingsliderletsyoutargetthesharpeningeffecttothelinesintheimage,sothatartifactsdon’tappearinunfocusedorbackgroundareas.
Tip
Ifyouhavedifficultyseeingtheeffectsofsharpening,changethezoomlevelto100%.
WhenyoumakeadjustmentsinCameraRaw,theoriginalfiledataispreserved.YouradjustmentsettingsfortheimagearestoredeitherintheCameraRawdatabasefileorin“sidecar”XMPfilesthataccompanytheoriginalimagefileinthesamefolder.TheseXMPfilesretaintheadjustmentsyoumadeinCameraRawwhenyoumovetheimagefiletoastoragemediumoranothercomputer.
![Page 298: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/298.jpg)
SynchronizingsettingsacrossimagesAllthreeofthemissionimageswereshotatthesametimeunderthesamelightingconditions.Nowthatyou’vemadethefirstonelookstunning,youcanautomaticallyapplythesamesettingstotheothertwoimages.YoudothisusingtheSynchronizecommand.
1.IntheupperleftcorneroftheCameraRawdialogbox,clicktheFilmstripmenubutton,andchooseSelectAlltoselectalloftheimagesinthefilmstrip.
2.ClicktheFilmstripmenubuttonagain,andchooseSyncSettings.
TheSynchronizedialogboxappears,listingallthesettingsyoucanapplytotheimages.Bydefault,alloptionsexceptCrop,SpotRemoval,andLocalAdjustmentsareselected.Youcanacceptthedefaultforthisproject,eventhoughyoudidn’tchangeallthesettings.
3.ClickOKintheSynchronizedialogbox.
Whenyousynchronizethesettingsacrossalloftheselectedimages,thethumbnailsupdatetoreflectthechangesyoumade.Topreviewtheimages,clickeachthumbnailinthefilmstrip.
SavingCameraRawchangesYoucansaveyourchangesindifferentwaysfordifferentpurposes.First,you’llsavetheimageswithadjustmentsaslow-resolutionJPEGfilesthatyoucanshareontheweb.Then,you’llsaveoneimage,Mission01,asaPhotoshopfilethatyoucanopenasaSmartObjectinPhotoshop.WhenyouopenanimageasaSmartObjectinPhotoshop,youcanreturntoCameraRawatanytimetomakefurtheradjustments.
1.IntheCameraRawdialogbox,clicktheFilmstripmenubutton,andchooseSelectAlltoselectallthreeimages.
![Page 299: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/299.jpg)
2.ClickSaveImagesinthelowerleftcorner.
3.IntheSaveOptionsdialogbox,dothefollowing:
•ChooseSaveInSameLocationfromtheDestinationmenu.
•IntheFileNamingarea,leave“DocumentName”inthefirstbox.
•ChooseJPEGfromtheFormatmenu,andsettheQualityleveltoHigh(8–9).
•IntheImageSizingarea,selectResizeToFit,andthenchooseLongSidefromtheResizeToFitmenu.
•Enter640pixelstodesignatethedimensionofthelongside,whetherit’saportraitorlandscapeimage.(Thedimensionoftheshortsidewillautomaticallybeadjustedproportionally.)
•Type72pixels/inchfortheResolutionvalue.
Thesesettingswillsaveyourcorrectedimagesassmaller,downsampledJPEGfiles,whichyoucansharewithcolleaguesontheweb.They’llberesizedsothatmostviewerswon’tneedtoscrolltoseetheentireimagewhenitopens.YourfileswillbenamedMission01.jpg,Mission02.jpg,andMission03.jpg.
4.ClickSave.
![Page 300: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/300.jpg)
BridgereturnsyoutotheCameraRawdialogbox,andindicateshowmanyimageshavebeenprocesseduntilalltheimageshavebeensaved.TheCRWthumbnailsstillappearintheCameraRawdialogbox.InBridge,however,younowalsohaveJPEGversionsaswellastheoriginalCRWimagefiles,whichyoucancontinuetoeditorleaveforanothertime.
Now,you’llopenacopyoftheMission01imageinPhotoshop.
5.SelecttheMission01.crwimagethumbnailinthefilmstripintheCameraRawdialogbox.ThenpresstheShiftkey,andclickOpenObjectatthebottomofthedialogbox.
![Page 301: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/301.jpg)
TheOpenObjectbuttonopenstheimageasaSmartObjectinPhotoshop;youcandouble-clicktheSmartObjectthumbnailintheLayerspaneltoreturntoCameraRawtocontinuemakingadjustmentsatanytime.
Tip
TomaketheOpenObjectbuttonthedefault,clicktheworkflowoptionslink(inblue)belowthepreviewwindowintheCameraRawdialogbox,selectOpenInPhotoshopAsSmartObjects,andclickOK.
If,instead,youhadclickedOpenImage,theimagewouldopenasastandardPhotoshopimage.PressingtheShiftkeychangestheOpenImagebuttontotheOpenObjectbutton.
6.InPhotoshop,chooseFile>SaveAs.IntheSaveAsdialogbox,choosePhotoshopfortheformat,renamethefileMission_Final.psd,navigatetotheLesson12folder,andclickSave.ClickOKifthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogboxappears.Thenclosethefile.
![Page 302: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/302.jpg)
AboutsavingfilesinCameraRaw
Everycameramodelsavesrawimagesinauniqueformat,butAdobeCameraRawcanprocessmanyrawfileformats.CameraRawprocessestherawfileswithdefaultimagesettingsbasedonbuilt-incameraprofilesforsupportedcamerasandtheEXIFdata.
YoucansavetheproprietaryfilesinDNGformat(theformatsavedbyAdobeCameraRaw),JPEG,TIFF,andPSD.AlloftheseformatscanbeusedtosaveRGBandCMYKcontinuous-tone,bitmappedimages,andallofthemexceptDNGarealsoavailableinthePhotoshopSaveandSaveAsdialogboxes.
•TheDNG(AdobeDigitalNegative)formatcontainsrawimagedatafromadigitalcameraandmetadatathatdefineswhattheimagedatameans.DNGismeanttobeanindustry-widestandardformatforrawimagedata,helpingphotographersmanagethevarietyofproprietaryrawformatsandprovidingacompatiblearchivalformat.(YoucansavethisformatonlyfromtheCameraRawdialogbox.)
•TheJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)fileformatiscommonlyusedtodisplayphotographsandothercontinuous-toneRGBimagesontheweb.Higher-resolutionJPEGfilesmaybeusedforotherpurposes,includinghighqualityprinting.JPEGformatretainsallcolorinformationinanimage,butcompressesfilesizebyselectivelydiscardingdata.Thegreaterthecompression,thelowertheimagequality.
•TIFF(TaggedImageFileFormat)isusedtoexchangefilesbetweenapplicationsandcomputerplatforms.TIFFisaflexibleformatsupportedbyvirtuallyallpaint,image-editing,andpagelayoutapplications.Also,virtuallyalldesktopscannerscanproduceTIFFimages.
•PSDformatisthePhotoshopnativefileformat.BecauseofthetightintegrationbetweenAdobeproducts,otherAdobeapplicationssuchasAdobeIllustratorandAdobeInDesigncandirectlyimportPSDfilesandpreservemanyPhotoshopfeatures.
OnceyouopenafileinPhotoshop,youcansaveitinmanydifferentformats,includingLargeDocumentFormat(PSB),Cineon,PhotoshopRaw,orPNG.Nottobeconfusedwithcamerarawfileformats,thePhotoshopRawformat(RAW)isafileformatfortransferringimagesbetweenapplicationsandcomputerplatforms.
FormoreinformationaboutfileformatsinCameraRawandPhotoshop,seePhotoshopHelp.
ApplyingadvancedcolorcorrectionYou’lluseLevels,theHealingBrushtool,andotherPhotoshopfeaturestoenhancetheimageofthismodel.
![Page 303: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/303.jpg)
AdjustthewhitebalanceinCameraRawTheoriginalimageofthebridehasaslightcolorcast.You’llstartyourcolorcorrectionsinCameraRaw,settingthewhitebalanceandadjustingtheoveralltoneoftheimage.
1.InBridge,navigatetotheLesson12folder.Selectthe12B_Start.neffile,andchooseFile>OpenInCameraRaw.
Tip
InadditiontoopeningfilesinCameraRawwhenyoustarttheeditingprocess,youcanapplyCameraRawsettingsasafiltertoanimagelayerinPhotoshop.ChooseFilter>CameraRawFilter,adjustthesettings,andclickOK.
2.InCameraRaw,selecttheWhiteBalancetool( ),andthenclickawhiteareainthemodel’sdresstoadjustthetemperatureandremoveagreencolorcast.
3.AdjustotherslidersintheBasicpaneltobrightenandintensifytheimage:
•IncreaseExposureto0.30.
•IncreaseContrastto15.
•IncreaseClarityto+8.
![Page 304: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/304.jpg)
4.PresstheShiftkey,andclickOpenObject.
TheimageopensinPhotoshopasaSmartObject.
AdjustinglevelsThetonalrangeofanimagerepresentstheamountofcontrast,ordetail,intheimageandisdeterminedbytheimage’sdistributionofpixels,rangingfromthedarkestpixels(black)tothelightestpixels(white).You’lluseaLevelsadjustmentlayertofine-tunethetonalrangeinthisimage.
1.InPhotoshop,chooseFile>SaveAs.NamethefileModel_final.psd,andclickSave.ClickOKifyouseethePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
2.ClicktheLevelsbuttonintheAdjustmentspanel.
PhotoshopaddsaLevelsadjustmentlayertotheLayerspanel.TheLevelscontrolsanda
![Page 305: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/305.jpg)
histogramappearinthePropertiespanel.Thehistogramdisplaystherangeofdarkandlightvaluesintheimage.Theleft(black)trianglerepresentstheshadows;theright(white)trianglerepresentsthehighlights;andthemiddle(gray)trianglerepresentsthemidtones,orgamma.Unlessyou’reaimingforaspecialeffect,theidealhistogramhasitsblackpointatthebeginningofthedataanditswhitepointattheendofthedata,andthemiddleportionhasfairlyuniformpeaksandvalleys,representingadequatepixeldatainthemidtones.
3.ClicktheCalculateAMoreAccurateHistogrambutton( )ontheleftsideofthehistogram.Photoshopreplacesthehistogram.
Thereisasmallbumponthefarrightsideofthehistogram,representingthecurrentwhitepoint,butthebulkofthedataendsfurthertotheleft.Youwanttosetthewhitepointtomatchtheendofthatdata.
4.Dragtheright(white)triangletowardthelefttothepointwherethehistogramindicatesthelightestcolorsbegin.
Prophotoworkflow
Aphotographerformorethan25years,JayGrahambeganhiscareerdesigningandbuildingcustomhomes.Today,Grahamhasclientsintheadvertising,architectural,editorial,andtravelindustries.
SeeJayGraham’sportfolioonthewebatjaygraham.com.
Goodhabitsmakeallthedifference
Asensibleworkflowandgoodworkhabitswillkeepyouenthusedaboutdigitalphotography,helpyourimagesshine—andsaveyoufromthenightterrorsoflosingworkyouneverbackedup.Here’sanoutlineofthebasic
![Page 306: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/306.jpg)
workflowfordigitalimagesfromaprofessionalphotographerwithmorethan25years’experience.Tohelpyougetthemostfromtheimagesyoushoot,JayGrahamoffersguidelinesforsettingupyourcamera,creatingabasiccolorworkflow,selectingfileformats,organizingimages,andshowingoffyourwork.
GrahamusesAdobePhotoshopLightroom®toorganizethousandsofimages.
“Thebiggestcomplaintfrompeopleisthey’velosttheirimage.Whereisit?Whatdoesitlooklike?”saysGraham.“Sonamingisimportant.”
Startoutrightbysettingupyourcamerapreferences
Ifyourcamerahastheoption,it’sgenerallybesttoshootinitscamerarawfileformat,whichcapturesalltheimageinformationyouneed.Withonecamerarawphoto,saysGraham,“youcangofromdaylighttoanindoortungstenimagewithoutdegradation”whenit’sreproduced.IfitmakesmoresensetoshootinJPEGforyourproject,usefinecompressionandhighresolution.
Startwiththebestmaterial
Getallthedatawhenyoucapture—atfinecompressionandhighresolution.Youcan’tgobacklater.
Organizeyourfiles
Nameandcatalogueyourimagesassoonafterdownloadingthemaspossible.“Ifthecameranamesfiles,eventuallyitresetsandproducesmultiplefileswiththesamename,”saysGraham.UseAdobePhotoshopLightroomto
![Page 307: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/307.jpg)
rename,rank,andaddmetadatatothephotosyouplantokeep;cullthoseyoudon’t.
Grahamnameshisfilesbydate(andpossiblysubject).HewouldstoreaseriesofphotostakenDec.12,2013atStinsonBeachinafoldernamed“20131212_Stinson_01”;withinthefolder,henameseachimageincrementally,andeachimagehasauniquefilename.“Thatway,itlinesupontheharddriverealeasily,”hesays.FollowWindowsnamingconventionstokeepfilenamesusableonnon-Macintoshplatforms(32charactersmaximum;onlynumbers,letters,underscores,andhyphens).
ConvertrawimagestoDNG
ItmaybebesttoconvertallyourcamerarawimagestotheDNGformat.Unlikemanycameras’proprietaryrawformats,thespecificationsforthisformatarepubliclyavailablesothatsoftwaredevelopersanddevicemakerscanmoreeasilysupportit.
Keepamasterimage
SaveyourmasterinPSD,TIFF,orDNGformat,notJPEG.EachtimeaJPEGisre-editedandsaved,compressionisreapplied,andtheimagequalitydegrades.
Showofftoclientsandfriends
Whenyouprepareyourworkfordelivery,choosetheappropriatecolorfileforthedestination.Converttheimagetothatprofile,ratherthanassigningtheprofile.sRGBisgenerallybestforviewingelectronicallyorforprintingfrommostonlineprintingservices.Adobe1998orColormatcharethebestprofilestouseforRGBimagesdestinedfortraditionallyprintedmaterialssuchasbrochures.Adobe1998orProPhotoRGBarebestforprintingwithinkjetprinters.Use72dpiforelectronicviewingand180dpiorhigherforprinting.
Backupyourimages
You’vedevotedalotoftimeandefforttoyourimages:don’tlosethem.BecausethelifespanofCDsandDVDsisuncertain,it’sbesttobackuptoanexternalharddrive(ordrives!),ideallysettobackupautomatically.“Thequestionisnotifyour[internal]harddriveisgoingtocrash,”saysGraham,recitingacommonadage.“It’swhen.”
Asyoudrag,thethirdInputLevelsvalue(beneaththehistogramgraph)changes,andsodoestheimageitself.
5.Pullthemiddle(gray)trianglealittlebittotherighttoslightlydarkenthemidtones.Wemovedittoavalueof.90.
![Page 308: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/308.jpg)
EditingthesaturationinCameraRawTheLevelsadjustmentshelpedsignificantly,butourbridelooksalittlesunburned.You’lladjustthesaturationinCameraRawtoevenoutherskintone.
1.Double-clickthe12B_StartlayerthumbnailtoopentheSmartObjectinCameraRaw.
2.ClicktheHSL/Grayscalebutton( )todisplaythatpanel.
3.ClicktheSaturationtab.
4.Movethefollowingsliderstoreducetheamountofredintheskin:
•ReduceRedsto-2.
•ReduceOrangesto-10.
•ReduceMagentasto-3.
![Page 309: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/309.jpg)
5.ClickOKtoreturntoPhotoshop.
UsingthehealingbrushtoolstoremoveblemishesNowyou’rereadytogivethemodel’sfacesomefocusedattention.You’llusetheHealingBrushandSpotHealingBrushtoolstohealblemishes,smooththeskin,removeredveinsfromtheeyes,andevenhidethenosejewelry.
1.IntheLayerspanel,selectthe12B_Startlayer.Then,chooseDuplicateLayerfromtheLayerspanelmenu.
2.NamethenewlayerCorrections,andclickOK.
![Page 310: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/310.jpg)
Workingonaduplicatelayerpreservestheoriginalpixelssoyoucanmakechangeslater.Youcan’tmakechangesusingthehealingbrushtoolsonaSmartObject,sofirstyou’llrasterizethelayer.
3.ChooseLayer>SmartObjects>Rasterize.
4.Zoominonthemodel’sfacesothatyoucanseeitclearly.
5.SelecttheSpotHealingBrushtool( ).
6.Intheoptionsbar,selectthefollowingsettings:
•Brushsize:35px
•Mode:Normal
•Type:Content-Aware
7.WiththeSpotHealingBrushtool,brushoutthenosejewelry.Asingleclickmaybeenough.
Becauseyou’veselectedContent-Awareintheoptionsbar,theSpotHealingBrushtoolreplacesthenosestudwithskinthatissimilartothataroundit.
8.Paintoverfinelinesaroundtheeyesandmouth.Youcanalsobrushawayfrecklesandmolesonherface,neck,arms,andchest.Experimentwithsimplyclicking,usingveryshortstrokes,andcreatinglongerbrushstrokes.Youcanalsoexperimentwithdifferentsettings.Forexample,tosoftenthelinesaroundthemouth,weselectedProximityMatchintheoptionsbarandtheLightenblendingmode.Removeobtrusiveordistractinglinesandblemishes,butleaveenoughthatthefaceretainsitscharacter.
TheHealingBrushtoolmaybeabetteroptionforlargerblemishes.WiththeHealingBrushtool,youhavemorecontroloverthepixelsPhotoshopsamples.
![Page 311: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/311.jpg)
9.SelecttheHealingBrushtool( ),hiddenundertheSpotHealingBrushtool( ).Selectabrushwithasizeof45pixelsandahardnessof100%.
10.Alt-click(Windows)orOption-click(MacOS)anareaonhercheektocreatethesamplingsource.
11.Brushoverthelargemoleonhercheektoreplaceitwiththecoloryousampled.You’llsmoothoutthetexturelater.
12.UsetheHealingBrushtooltohealanylargerblemishesthatremain.
13.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
EnhancinganimageusingtheDodgeandSpongetoolsYou’llusetheSpongeandDodgetoolstobrightentheeyesandlips.
1.SelecttheSpongetool( ),hiddenundertheDodgetool( ).Intheoptionsbar,makesureVibranceisselected,andthenselectthefollowingsettings:
•Brushsize:35px
•Brushhardness:0%
•Mode:Saturate
•Flow:50%
2.MovetheSpongetoolovertheirisesintheeyestoincreasetheirsaturation.
3.Changethebrushsizeto70pxandtheflowto10%.ThenbrushtheSpongetooloverthelipstosaturatethem.
YoucanusetheSpongetooltodesaturatecolor,too.You’llreducetheredinthecorneroftheeye.
4.Changethebrushsizeto45px,andtheflowto50%.ThenchooseDesaturatefromtheModemenuintheoptionsbar.
![Page 312: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/312.jpg)
5.Brushoverthecorneroftheeyetoreducethered.
6.SelecttheDodgetool( ),hiddenbeneaththeSpongetool.
7.Intheoptionsbar,changethebrushsizeto60pxandtheExposureto10%.ChooseHighlightsfromtheRangemenu.
8.BrushtheDodgetoolovertheeyes—thewhitesandtheirises—tobrightenthem.
9.WiththeDodgetoolstillselected,selectShadowsfromtheRangemenuintheoptionsbar.
10.UsetheDodgetooltolightentheshadowareaabovetheeyesandtheareasaroundtheirisestobringoutthecolor.
AdjustingskintonesInPhotoshop,youcanselectacolorrangethattargetsskintonessothatit’seasiertoadjustthelevelsandcolortoneofskinwithoutaffectingtheentireimage.Theskintonecolorrangeselectsotherareasoftheimagewithasimilarcolor,butifyou’remakingslightadjustments,thisisusuallyacceptable.
1.ChooseSelect>ColorRange.
2.IntheColorRangedialogbox,chooseSkinTonesfromtheSelectmenu.
Thepreviewshowsthatmuchoftheimagehasbeenselected.
3.SelectDetectFaces.
Thepreviewintheselectionchanges.Nowtheface,hairhighlights,andlighterareasofthedressareselected.
4.DecreasetheFuzzinesssliderto10torefinetheselection.ThenclickOK.
![Page 313: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/313.jpg)
Theselectionappearsontheimageitselfasanimateddottedlines(sometimescalledmarchingants).You’llapplyaCurvesadjustmentlayertotheselectiontoreducetheoverallredintheskintoneoftheimage.
5.ClicktheCurvesiconintheAdjustmentspanel.
PhotoshopaddsaCurvesadjustmentlayerabovetheCorrectionslayer.
6.ChooseRedfromthecolorchannelmenuinthePropertiespanel.Thenclickinthemiddleofthegraph,andpullthecurvedownveryslightly.Theselectedareas
![Page 314: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/314.jpg)
becomelessred.Becarefulnottopullthecurvedowntoofar,oragreencastwillappear.Youcanseethedifferenceyou’vemadebyclickingtheToggleLayerVisibilitybutton.
BecauseyouselectedtheskintonesbeforeapplyingtheCurvesadjustmentlayer,theskincolorshiftsbutthebackgroundisunchanged.Theadjustmentaffectsslightlymoreoftheimagethantheskinitself,buttheeffectblendswellandissubtle.
ApplyingsurfaceblurYou’realmostdonewiththemodel.Asafinishingtouch,you’llapplytheSurfaceBlurfiltertogiveherasmoothappearance.
1.SelecttheCorrectionslayer,andchooseLayer>DuplicateLayer.NamethelayerSurfaceBlur,andclickOKintheDuplicateLayerdialogbox.
2.WiththeSurfaceBlurlayerselected,chooseFilter>Blur>SurfaceBlur.
3.IntheSurfaceBlurdialogbox,leavetheRadiusat5pixels,andmovetheThresholdto10levels.ThenclickOK.
![Page 315: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/315.jpg)
TheSurfaceBlurfilterhasleftthemodellookingalittleglassy.You’llreduceitseffectbyreducingtheopacityoftheblur.
4.WiththeSurfaceBlurlayerselected,changetheOpacityto40%intheLayerspanel.
Shelooksmorerealisticnow,butyoucantargetthesurfaceblurmorepreciselyusingtheErasertool.
5.SelecttheErasertool( ).Intheoptionsbar,selectabrushbetween10and50pixels,with10%hardness.Settheopacityto90%.
6.Brushovertheeyes,eyebrows,thedefininglinesofthenose,andthedetailinthedress.You’reerasingpartoftheblurredlayertoletthesharperlayerbelowshowthroughintheseareas.
![Page 316: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/316.jpg)
7.Zoomoutsoyoucanseetheentireimage.
8.Saveyourwork.
9.ChooseLayer>FlattenImagetoflattenthelayersandreducetheimagesize.
10.Savetheimageagain,andthencloseit.
You’vetakenadvantageoffeaturesinbothCameraRawandPhotoshoptohelpthisbridelookherbest.Asyou’veseen,youcanmovebetweenPhotoshopandCameraRawtoperformdifferenttasksasyouenhanceandimproveanimage.
AboutHDRandpanoramasinCameraRaw
WhenyouselectmorethanoneimageinCameraRaw,youcanchooseMergetoHDRorMergetoPanoramafromtheFilmstripmenu.HDR(highdynamicrange)requiresdarkerandlighterexposuresofthesamecomposition,whileapanoramarequiresmultipleexposuresthatmakeupalargerscene.PhotoshopalsohasHDRorpanoramafeatures,butthenewerprocessinCameraRawissimpler,providesapreview,canprocessinthebackground,andproducesaDNGfilethatyoucaneditinCameraRawwiththeflexibilityofarawformatimage.
Extracredit
![Page 317: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/317.jpg)
PaintingwithLight:UsingCameraRawasaFilter
InadditiontoopeningfilesinCameraRawtostarttheeditingprocess,youcanapplyCameraRawsettingsasafiltertoanyfileinPhotoshop.You’lluseCameraRawasafiltertomakeadjustmentstothisstill-lifeimage.First,you’llconverttheimagetoaSmartObjectsoyoucanuseCameraRawasaSmartFilter,applyingchangeswithoutaffectingtheoriginalfile.
1.InPhotoshop,chooseFile>Open.NavigatetotheLessons/Lesson12folder,anddouble-clicktheFruit.jpgfiletoopenit.
2.ChooseFilter>ConvertforSmartFilters.ClickOKintheinformationaldialogbox.
3.ChooseFilter>CameraRawFilter.TheimageopensinCameraRaw.
YouconvertedtheimagetoaSmartObjectsoyoucanapplyCameraRawasaSmartFilter.YoucanalsoapplyCameraRawasastandardfilter,butthenyoucan’treturntoadjustyoursettingsorhidetheadjustmentsinyourimagefile.
4.SelecttheAdjustmentBrushinthetoolbar.
WiththeAdjustmentBrushtoolinCameraRaw,youcanapplyExposure,Brightness,Clarity,andotheradjustmentstospecificareasofaphotobypaintingthemdirectlyontothoseareas.TheGraduatedFiltertoolissimilar,
![Page 318: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/318.jpg)
butitappliesthesametypesofadjustmentsgraduallyacrossaregionofthephotothatyoudefine.
5.IntheAdjustmentBrushpanel,changeExposureto+1.50.Then,atthebottomofthepanel,changeSizeto8andFeatherto85.
6.Brushthefruitwhereyouwanttoincreasetheexposure,whichrevealsmoreofthecolor.Continuebrushinguntilthefruitistoobright.
7.Onceyou’vebrushedallthefruit,reducetheExposuresettingintheAdjustmentBrushpanelsotheimagelooksmorerealistic.
8.ToseehowyourchangeshaveaffectedtheimageinCameraRaw,clicktheBefore/AfterViewsbuttonatthebottomoftheimagewindow,andchooseBefore/AfterLeft/Rightfromthepop-upmenu.
9.Whenyou’resatisfiedwiththechanges,clickOK.
Photoshopdisplaystheimage.IntheLayerspanel,theCameraRawfilterislistedbeneaththelayername.YoucantogglethevisibilityiconfortheCameraRawfiltertoseetheimagebeforeandaftertheadjustment.
Reviewquestions1.WhathappenstocamerarawimageswhenyouedittheminCameraRaw?
2.WhatistheadvantageoftheAdobeDigitalNegative(DNG)fileformat?
3.HowcanyouapplythesamesettingstomultipleimagesinCameraRaw?
4.HowcanyouapplyCameraRawasafilter?
![Page 319: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/319.jpg)
Reviewanswers1.Acamerarawfilecontainsunprocessedpicturedatafromadigitalcamera’simagesensor.Camerarawfilesgivephotographerscontroloverinterpretingtheimagedata,ratherthanlettingthecameramaketheadjustmentsandconversions.WhenyouedittheimageinCameraRaw,itpreservestheoriginalrawfiledata.Thisway,youcanedittheimageasyoudesire,exportit,andkeeptheoriginalintactforfutureuseorotheradjustments.
2.TheAdobeDigitalNegative(DNG)fileformatcontainstherawimagedatafromadigitalcameraaswellasmetadatathatdefineswhattheimagedatameans.DNGisanindustry-widestandardforcamerarawimagedatathathelpsphotographersmanageproprietarycamerarawfileformatsandprovidesacompatiblearchivalformat.
3.ToapplythesamesettingstomultipleimagesinCameraRaw,selecttheimagesinthefilmstrip,clicktheFilmstripmenubutton,andchooseSyncSettings.Thenselectthesettingsyouwanttoapply,andclickOK.
4.ToapplyCameraRawasafilter,chooseFilter>CameraRawFilterinPhotoshop.MakethechangesyouwanttomakeinCameraRaw,andthenclickOK.Ifyouwanttobeabletoeditthechangeslater,applyCameraRawasaSmartFilter.
![Page 320: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/320.jpg)
13.PreparingFilesfortheWeb
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Createandstylizeabuttonforawebsite.
•Uselayergroups.
•Optimizeimagesforthewebandmakegoodcompressionchoices.
•Recordanactiontoautomateaseriesofsteps.
•Playanactiontoaffectmultipleimages.
•SaveassetsusingAdobeGenerator.
•EvaluateassetsandrevisethemwithGenerator.
•DesignformultiplescreensizeswithmultipleartboardsandtestthemwithAdobePreviewCC.
Thislessonwilltakeaboutanhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson13projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 321: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/321.jpg)
PROJECT:MUSEUMWEBSITE
Often,youneedtocreateseparateimagesforbuttonsorotherobjectsinawebsite.AdobeGenerator,builtintoPhotoshop,makesiteasytosavelayers,layergroups,and
artboardsasseparateimagefiles.
GettingstartedInthislesson,youwillbuildbuttonsforthehomepageofaSpanishartmuseum’swebsite,andthengenerateappropriategraphicsfilesforeachbutton.You’lluselayergroupstoassemblethebuttons,andthencreateactionstoprepareasetofimagesforuseasasecondgroupofbuttons.First,you’llviewthefinalwebdesign.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridge.
![Page 322: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/322.jpg)
4.InBridge,clickLessonsintheFavoritespanel.Double-clicktheLesson13folderintheContentpanel.
Note
IfBridgeisn’tinstalled,you’llbepromptedtoinstallitwhenyouchooseBrowseInBridge.Formoreinformation,seepage3.
5.Viewthe13End.psdfileinBridge.
Thereareeightbuttonsatthebottomofthepage,arrangedintworows.You’lltransformimagesintobuttonsforthetoprow,anduseanactiontopreparethebuttonsforthesecondrow.
6.Double-clickthe13Start.psdthumbnailtoopenthefileinPhotoshop.ClickOKifyouseetheMissingProfiledialogbox.
7.ChooseFile>SaveAs,andrenamethefile13Working.psd.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
![Page 323: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/323.jpg)
UsinglayergroupstocreatebuttongraphicsLayergroupsmakeiteasiertoorganizeandworkwithlayersincompleximages,especiallywhentherearesetsoflayersthatworktogether.You’lluselayergroupstoassemblethelayersthatmakeupeachbutton,andthey’llcomeinhandywhenyousaveassetsusingAdobeGeneratorlater.
Fourimageshavebeenarrangedinthestartfiletoserveasthebasisforbuttons.You’lladdalabeltoeach,identifyingthegalleryitrepresents,andthenaddadropshadowandastroke.
CreatingthefirstbuttonYou’lldesignthefirstbutton,andthenduplicatelayersandeditthemtoquicklyapplythesametreatmenttotheotherthree.First,you’llchangetheunitsofmeasurementtopixels.
1.ChooseEdit>Preferences>Units&Rulers(Windows)orPhotoshopCC>Preferences>Units&Rulers(MacOS).IntheUnitsareaofthedialogbox,choosePixelsfromtheRulersmenu,andthenclickOK.
![Page 324: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/324.jpg)
2.ChooseView>Snaptoturnoffsnapping.(AcheckmarkappearsnexttoSnapwhenit’senabled.)
3.ChooseWindow>InfotoopentheInfopanel.
TheInfopaneldisplaysinformationdynamicallyasyoumovethepointerormakeselections.Whichinformationitdisplaysdependsonthetoolthatisselected.You’lluseittodeterminethepositionoftherulerguide(basedontheYcoordinate)andthesizeofanareayouselect(basedonthewidthandheight).It’salsoveryhandyforseeingtheRGBandCMYKvaluesofcolorsinanimage.
4.ChooseView>Rulers.ThendragarulerguidedownuntiltheYvaluereportedintheInfopanelis795pixels.
You’llusethisguidetodrawabandacrossthebottomoftheimageforthelabel.
5.Zoominonthefirstimage,theimageoftheman.ThenselectImage1intheLayerspanel.
You’llusethisimagetodesignthefirstbutton.
![Page 325: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/325.jpg)
6.ClicktheNewLayerbutton( )atthebottomoftheLayerspanel.ThenewlayerisnamedLayer13andappearsdirectlyabovetheImage1layer.Renameitband.
7.SelecttheRectangularMarqueetool( )intheToolspanel.Then,dragaselectionacrossthebottomoftheimage,asindicatedbytheguides.Theselectionshouldbe180pixelswideand32pixelshigh.
8.ChooseEdit>Fill.IntheFilldialogbox,chooseColorfromtheContentsmenu,andthen,intheColorPicker,selectadarkblue(R=25,G=72,B=121).ClickOKtoapplythefill.
Adarkbluebandappearsatthebottomoftheimage,whereyoumadeyourselection.You’lladdtexttoitnext.
9.ChooseSelect>Deselect.
10.SelecttheHorizontalTypetool,andselectthefollowingsettingsintheoptionsbar:
•FontFamily:MyriadPro
•FontStyle:Regular
•FontSize:18pt
•Anti-aliasing:Strong
•Alignment:Center
![Page 326: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/326.jpg)
•Color:White
11.Clickinthecenteroftheblueband,andtypeGALLERYONE.UsetheMovetooltoadjustthepositionofthetypelayerifnecessary.
Thelabelisinplace.Nowyou’lladdadropshadowandstroketoimprovetheappearanceofthebutton.
12.SelecttheImage1layerintheLayerspanel.Then,clicktheAddLayerStylebutton( )atthebottomoftheLayerspanel,andchooseDropShadow.
13.IntheLayerStyledialogbox,changethefollowingsettingsintheStructurearea:
•Opacity:27%
•Distance:9px
•Spread:19%
•Size:18px
![Page 327: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/327.jpg)
14.WiththeLayerStyledialogboxstillopen,selectStrokeontheleft,andapplythefollowingsettings:
•Size:1px
•Position:Inside
•Color:ClickthecolorswatchtoopentheColorPicker.Thenclickthebluebandtosampleitscolor,andclickOKtoselectit.
Note
BesuretoclickthewordStroke.Ifyouclickonlythecheckbox,Photoshopappliesthelayerstylewithitsdefaultsettings,butyouwon’tseetheoptions.
15.ClickOKtoapplybothlayerstyles.
![Page 328: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/328.jpg)
Thebuttonlooksgood.Nowyou’llassembleallofitslayersintoasinglegroup.
16.SelecttheGALLERYONE,band,andImage1layersintheLayerspanel,andchooseLayer>GroupLayers.
PhotoshopcreatesagroupnamedGroup1.
17.Double-clicktheGroup1layergroup,andrenameitGallery1.Thenexpandthegroup.Thelayersyouselectedareindented,indicatingthey’repartofthatgroup.
![Page 329: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/329.jpg)
18.ChooseFile>Save.
DuplicatingbuttonsYou’vedesignedtheinitialbutton.Youcouldgothroughallthosestepsagaintocreateeachoftheotherbuttons,butitwillbefastertoduplicatelayersorevenlayergroups,andtheneditthemasnecessary.
1.ClicktheCreateANewGroupbuttonatthebottomoftheLayerspanel.NamethegroupGallery2.
2.DragImage2intotheGallery2layergroup,andthenpressAltorOptionasyoudragtheEffectslineorthe symbolfromImage1toImage2.
ThedropshadowandstrokeyouappliedtoImage1areappliedtobothimagesnow.
3.Selectthebandlayer,andchooseDuplicateLayerfromtheLayerspanelmenu.Nameitband2,anddragitintotheGallery2layergroupabovetheImage2layer.
4.SelecttheMovetool,andthen,intheimagewindow,dragtheduplicatebandlayerfromthefirstimagetothesecondone.
Tip
YoucanalsoduplicatelayersbydraggingalayerdowntotheNewLayericonintheLayerspanel.
5.SelecttheGALLERYONElayer,andchooseDuplicateLayerfromtheLayers
![Page 330: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/330.jpg)
panelmenu.NametheduplicatelayerGALLERYTWO,anddragitintotheGallery2layergroupabovetheband2layer.
6.UsetheMovetooltodragtheduplicatetypefromthefirstimagetothebandonthesecondimage.ThenselecttheHorizontalTypetool,andchangethetypetoGALLERYTWO.
Tip
PresstheShiftkeyasyoumovethetypetodragitinastraightline.
Thesecondbuttonisdone.You’llcreatethethirdbuttonbyduplicatingtheentirelayergroupandmakingthenecessarychanges.
7.SelecttheGallery2layergroup,andchooseDuplicateGroupfromtheLayerspanelmenu.RenamethegroupGallery3.
8.DeletetheImage2layerintheGallery3layergroup,andthendragImage3intothegroup,belowtheband2layer.
9.PressAltorOptionasyoudragthelayereffectsfromtheImage2layer(intheGallery2group)ontotheImage3layertocopythem.
10.IntheGallery3group,renametheband2layerband3,andselectit.Then,intheimagewindow,dragthebluebandfromthesecondimagetothethirdimage.
11.RenamethetypelayerintheGallery3groupGALLERYTHREE.Thenselectthelayer,anddragtheduplicatetypefromthesecondimagetothebluebandonthethirdimage.Finally,selecttheHorizontalTypetool,andchangethetypetoGALLERYTHREE.
12.Repeatsteps1-6orsteps7-11tocopythedesignelementsforthefourthbutton.
13.Savethefile,andthencloseit.
![Page 331: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/331.jpg)
AutomatingamultisteptaskAnactionisasetofoneormorecommandsthatyourecordandthenplaybacktoapplytoasinglefileorabatchoffiles.Inthisexercise,you’llcreateanactiontoprepareasetofimagestoserveasbuttonsforadditionalgalleriesonthewebpageyou’redesigning.
Tip
Youcancreateconditionalactionsthatchangetheirbehaviorbasedoncriteriayoudefine.
RecordinganactionYou’llstartbyrecordinganactionthatresizesanimage,changesitscanvassize,andaddslayerstyles,sothattheadditionalbuttonsmatchtheonesyou’vealreadycreated.YouusetheActionspaneltorecord,play,edit,anddeleteindividualactions.YoualsousetheActionspaneltosaveandloadactionfiles.
TherearefourimagesintheButtonsfolderthatwillserveasthebasisfornewgallerybuttonsonyourwebsite.Theimagesarelarge,sothefirstthingyou’llneedtodoisresizethemtomatchtheexistingbuttons.You’llperformeachofthestepsontheGallery5.jpgfileasyourecordtheaction.You’llthenplaytheactiontomakethesamechangesontheotherimagesinthefolderautomatically.
1.ChooseFile>Open,andnavigatetotheLesson13/Buttonsfolder.Double-clicktheGallery5.jpgfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
2.ChooseWindow>ActionstoopentheActionspanel.ClosetheDefaultActionsfoldertokeeptheActionspaneltidy.
3.ClicktheCreateNewSetbutton( )atthebottomoftheActionspanel.IntheNewSetdialogbox,namethesetButtons.
Photoshopcomeswithseveralprerecordedactions,allintheDefaultActionsset.Youcanuseactionssetstoorganizeyouractionssothatit’seasiertofindtheoneyouwant.
4.ClicktheCreateNewActionbutton( )atthebottomoftheActionspanel.NametheactionResizingandStylingImages,andclickRecord.
![Page 332: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/332.jpg)
It’sagoodideatonameactionsinawaythatmakesitclearwhattheactionsdosoyoucanfindthemeasilylater.
Don’tletthefactthatyou’rerecordingrushyou.Takeallthetimeyouneedtodotheprocedureaccurately.Thespeedatwhichyouworkhasnoeffectontheamountoftimerequiredtoplayarecordedaction.
You’llstartbyresizingandsharpeningtheimage.
5.ChooseImage>ImageSize.ChoosePixelsfromtheUnitsmenufortheWidth,andthenchangetheWidthto180.Bydefault,theWidthandHeightvaluesarelinked.ConfirmthattheHeightchangesto180pixels,too.ThenclickOK.
6.ChooseFilter>Sharpen>SmartSharpen,applythefollowingsettings,andclickOK:
•Amount:100%
•Radius:1px
![Page 333: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/333.jpg)
Youneedtomakesomeadditionalchangestotheimagethatyoucan’tmakeaslongastheBackgroundlayerislocked.You’llconvertittoaregularlayer.
7.Double-clicktheBackgroundlayernameintheLayerspanel.IntheNewLayerdialogbox,namethelayerButton,andclickOK.
WhenyourenameaBackgroundlayer,you’reconvertingittoaregularlayer,soPhotoshopdisplaystheNewLayerdialogbox.ButthenewlayerreplacestheBackgroundlayer;Photoshopdoesn’taddalayertotheimage.
Nowthatyou’veconvertedtheBackgroundlayer,youcanchangethecanvassizeandaddlayerstyles.
8.ChooseImage>CanvasSize,anddothefollowing:
•Makesurethecanvasismeasuredinpixels.
•ChangetheWidthto220pixelsandtheHeightto220pixels.
•Clickthecentersquareintheanchorareatoensurethecanvasisextendedevenlyonallsides.
•ClickOK.
![Page 334: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/334.jpg)
9.ChooseLayer>LayerStyle>DropShadow.
10.IntheLayerStyledialogbox,applythefollowingsettings:
•Opacity:27%
•Angle:120°
•Distance:9px
•Spread:19%
•Size:18px
![Page 335: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/335.jpg)
11.WiththeLayerStyledialogboxstillopen,selectStrokeontheleft,andapplythefollowingsettings:
•Size:1px
•Position:Inside
•Color:ClickthecolorswatchtoopentheColorPicker.Thenclickthebluebandtosampleitscolor,andclickOKtoselectit.
Note
BesuretoclickthewordStroke.Ifyouclickonlythecheckbox,Photoshopappliesthelayerstylewithitsdefaultsettings,butyouwon’tseetheoptions.
12.ClickOKtoapplybothlayerstyles.
13.ChooseFile>SaveAs,choosePhotoshopfortheFormat,andclickSave.Thenclosethefile.
14.ClicktheStopRecordingbuttonatthebottomoftheActionspanel.
Theactionyoujustrecorded(ResizingandStylingImages)isnowsavedintheButtonssetintheActionspanel.Clickthearrowstoexpanddifferentsetsofsteps.Youcanexamineeachrecordedstepandthespecificselectionsyoumade.
Batch-playinganactionApplyingactionsisatimesavingprocessforperformingroutinetasksonfiles,butyoucanstreamlineyourworkevenfurtherbyapplyingactionstomultiplefilesatonce.You’llapplytheactionyou’vecreatedtothethreeremainingimages.
1.ChooseFile>Open,andnavigatetotheLesson13/Buttonsfolder.Shift-selecttheGallery6.jpg,Gallery7.jpg,andGallery8.jpgfiles,andclickOpen.
2.ChooseFile>Automate>Batch.
3.IntheBatchdialogbox,dothefollowing:
•ConfirmthatButtonsischosenintheSetmenuandResizingandStylingImages
![Page 336: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/336.jpg)
—theactionyoujustcreated—ischosenintheActionmenu.
•ChooseOpenedFilesfromtheSourcemenu.
•MakesureNoneischosenfortheDestination.
•ClickOK.
Photoshopplaystheaction,applyingitsstepstoallthefilesthatareopen.Youcanalsoapplyanactiontoanentirefolderofimageswithoutopeningthem.
Becauseyousavedthefileandcloseditwhileyouwererecordingtheaction,PhotoshopsaveseachoftheimagesasaPSDfileinitsoriginalfolder,andthenclosesthefile.
PlacingfilesinPhotoshopThefouradditionalbuttonimagesarereadytobeplacedintothedesign.Youprobablynoticedthateachalreadyhasabluebandwithitsgallerynameincludedintheimage,soyoudon’tneedtoperformthosesteps.They’rereadytogo.
1.ChooseFile>Open,navigatetotheLesson13folder,anddouble-clickthe13Working.psdfiletoopenitinPhotoshop.
2.IntheLayerspanel,selectalayergroupnameorthelogolayer.Newlayersareaddedabovetheselectedlayer;don’taddthemtotheGallery4layergroup.
3.ChooseFile>PlaceEmbedded.
You’llplacethesefilesasembeddedSmartObjects.Becausethey’reembedded,theentireimageisincludedinthePhotoshopfile.
4.InthePlaceEmbeddeddialogbox,navigatetotheLesson13/Buttonsfolder,anddouble-clicktheGallery5.psdfile.
PhotoshopplacestheGallery5.psdfileinthecenterofthe13Working.psdfile.Butthat’snotwhereyouwantittogo.You’llmoveit.
5.DragtheimageintopositionbelowtheGalleryOnebutton.Usetheguidestoplacetheimage.Whenit’sinposition,pressEnterorReturntocommitthechange.
![Page 337: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/337.jpg)
6.Repeatsteps2–4toplacetheGallery6.psd,Gallery7.psd,andGallery8.psdfilessothattheylineupbelowtheGalleryTwo,GalleryThree,andGalleryFourbuttons.
7.ChooseFile>Savetosaveyourworksofar.
SavingassetswithAdobeGeneratorWhenyou’repreparingfilesforawebsite,oftenyouneedtocreateseparateimagefilesforbuttonsandothercontent.WithAdobeGenerator,youcaneasilygenerateaJPEG,PNG,orGIFimagefromthecontentsofalayerorlayergroupinaPhotoshopfilesimplybyrenamingthelayerorlayergroup.Youcanappendtheappropriatefileextensiontosaveanimagewithdefaultsettings,butyoucanalsospecifyqualityandsizeparametersfortheimage,alldeterminedbyhowyounameit.
![Page 338: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/338.jpg)
RenaminglayersandlayergroupsYou’llgenerateassetsfromthe13Working.psdfileforawebsite.Initially,you’llsaveonlyoneofthebuttons,soyoucanpreviewthegeneratedimageandseeifitmeetsyourneeds.
1.ChooseFile>Generate>ImageAssets.
Onceyou’veenabledGenerator,itcontinuestobeenabledforthecurrentdocumentuntilyoudisableitagain.It’sadocument-specificsetting,whichmeansitcanbeenabledforonePSDfileyou’reworkinginbutnotforanother.
2.IntheLayerspanel,double-clicktheGallery1layergroupname,andrenameitgallery1.jpg5.
TheJPGextensionspecifiesthattheresultingassetshouldbeaJPEGfile.The5specifiesaqualityof50%.(Seethesidebar“Specifyingqualityandsizeparametersingeneratedassets”formoreinformation.)
Note
Yourlayersmaybeinadifferentorder,dependingonhowyoucopiedthegalleryfoldersandplacedthegalleryfiles.Anylayerorderisfine.
3.RenametheNewWinglayernew-wing.gif.
Whenyou’renaminglayersandlayergroupstogenerateassets,it’sagoodideatousenamesthatdon’tincludespacesorspecialcharacters.
4.RenametheLogolayerlogo.jpg5.
Youwon’tseeanychangesinthePhotoshopfileitselfwhenyougenerateassets.ButAdobeGeneratorhassavedtherenamedlayerorlayergroupinthespecifiedformattoasubfolderalongsidethesourcePSDfile.Inthiscase,theassetsyou’vegeneratedhavebeensavedtotheLesson13/13Working-assetsfolder.
Ifyougenerateanassetfromalayergroup,thegroupisflattenedtoproducetheresultingimage.
![Page 339: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/339.jpg)
EvaluatingandrevisinggeneratedassetsLookattheassetsthatweregenerated,toensuretheymeetyourneeds.YoucanquicklyevaluatethemusingBridge.
1.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
2.NavigatetotheLesson13/13Working-assetsfolder.
Therearethreeimagesinthefolder:gallery1.jpg,logo.jpg,andnew-wing.gif.Eachoftheimagesissurroundedbyawhiteborder.That’sfineforthebuttonsandthelogo,becausethey’reonawhitebackgroundonthesite.ButtheNewWingartworkoverlapsanotherimage,sothewhiteborderwon’twork.Additionally,theimagesallappearpixelated.Thefilesizesarecurrentlyverysmall,sothere’sroomtoincreasethefileresolutions.You’llreturntoPhotoshopandgeneratetheassetsagain,usingdifferentsettings.
First,you’llincreasethequalityofthegallerybuttonandlogofilesfrom50%to100%.
3.InPhotoshop,renamethegallery1.jpg5layergroupgallery1.jpg10.Thenrenamethelogo.jpg5layerlogo.jpg10.
Next,you’lltryadifferentformatfortheNewWingimage.GIFimagesaresavedwithawhiteborder,butPNGfileshaveasemitransparentbackgroundandshadows.
4.Renamethenew-wing.giflayernew-wing.png.
![Page 340: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/340.jpg)
5.ReturntoBridge.
Theimageslookbetter.Theirfilessizesaremuchlarger,butthey’restillreasonableforuseontheweb.Thesesettingsshouldwork.
6.ReturntoPhotoshop,andrenameeachofthegallerylayergroupsandthelayersforgalleries5-8,appending.jpg10toeachonetogeneratetherestofthebuttons.
Generatingassetsisassimpleasrenaminglayersandlayergroups,buttherenamingprocesscanstillbetediousifyouhavealargenumberoflayerstorename.Toreducepossiblefrustration,testyoursettingsonasinglelayerorlayergroupfirst,beforerenamingthemall.
GeneratingmultipleimagesizesandformatsfromthesamelayerIfyou’repreparingimagesforprint,youknowhowpeoplewillviewthem,andyoucanbesurethatonesizeandformatwillworkwell.However,thewebisaverydifferentenvironment.Peopleviewwebsitesonavarietyofdevices,fromcellphonestodesktopcomputers,andwebmastersconstructtheirsitesindifferentways.Youoftenneedtoprovidethesameimageinmultiplesizesandformats,sothattheappropriateoneisavailableforanyparticularviewingenvironment.
YoucanuseAdobeGeneratortocreatemultipleversionsofasingleassetbyaddingimagefilenamestothelayerorlayergroupname.YouneedonlyseparatethemwithacommaforGeneratortorecognizethatyouwanttogeneratemultipleassets.
Forthisproject,you’llgeneratemultipleversionsofthelogosothatitcanbeusedonvarioussitesthatpromotethemuseum.
1.ExpandtheLayerspaneltomakeitwidersothatyoucanseealonglayername.
2.Renamethelogo.jpg10layerwiththefollowingname:300%logo.jpg8,100%logo.gif,50%logo.png24.
Photoshopgeneratesalogo.jpgfilethatisan80%qualityJPEGimagescaledto300%,alogo.giffilethatisaGIFimagescaledto100%,andalogo.pngfilethatisa24-bitPNGimagescaledto50%.
Thefirstimageisalargerversionofthelogothatwillworkforafull-pagewebbanner.BecausetheoriginallogolayerisaSmartObject,itcanberesizedto300%withoutlosingresolution.
![Page 341: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/341.jpg)
PreviewingimagesinabrowserAwebbrowserdisplaysallimagefilesat72dpi.Youcancomparethelogoassetsyougeneratedtoseehowtheyhavebeenscaled.
1.Openawebbrowser.
2.ChooseFile>OpenFile,andthennavigatetotheLesson13/13Working-assetsfolder.
3.Double-clickthelogo.jpgfiletoopenit.
Thelogoisthreetimesitsoriginalsize,butkeptthesameresolution.
4.Openthelogo.pngfile.
It’shalfthesizeitwasinthePhotoshopfile.
You’vesuccessfullygeneratedtheimagesyouneedtobuildthewebsite.
5.ReturntoPhotoshop.ChooseFile>Generate>ImageAssets.
Theassetsyougeneratedareunaffected,butGeneratorisdisabled.
6.Savethefile,andthencloseit.
![Page 342: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/342.jpg)
Specifyingqualityandsizeparametersingeneratedassets
Whenyourenamealayerorlayergroupwithjusttheappendedfileextension(.jpg,.png,or.gif),Generatorusesdefaultsettingstocreatetheassets.JPEGfilesaregeneratedat90%quality,PNGassetsaregeneratedas32-bitimages,andGIFassetsincludebasicalphatransparency.
Togenerateassetswithdifferentparameters,addmoreinformationtothename.
Specifyingthequalityofanasset
•TospecifythequalityofaJPEGasset,addanumberfrom1to10orapercentagefrom1to100%asasuffix.(Forexample,.jpg6and.jpg60%bothcreateJPEGfilesat60%quality.)
•TospecifywhetheraPNGfileisan8-bit,24-bit,or32-bitfile,addthenumberasasuffix.(Gallery1.png32generatesa32-bitPNGfile.)
•QualityparametersarenotavailableforGIFimages.
Specifyingtheimagesize
Tospecifytheoutputimagesize,addaprefix,followedbyaspace,beforetheassetname.Youcanspecifyapercentageoranabsolutesize.Thedefaultunitispixels;specifyotherunits—in,cm,ormm—inthename.Youcanmixunitsaswell.ThesamenamingmethodappliesforJPEG,PNG,andGIFimages.
IfyourassetisnamedGallery1,forexample,youcouldusethefollowingprefixes:
•200%Gallery1.jpgscalestheimageto200%.
•300×200Gallery1.pngscalestheimageto300×200pixels.
•10in×200mmGallery1.gifscalestheimageto10inchesby200millimeters.
Extracredit
Designingformobiledeviceswithartboards
Creatinguserinterfacesandwebsitesformobiledevicesjustgoteasier,withartboards.Youcanuseartboardstocreatevariationsofadesigninasingledocument,asmanyAdobeIllustratorCCusersalreadyknow.InPhotoshop,artboardsareaspecialtypeoflayergroup,soyouworkwithartboardsintheLayerspanel.We’llcopythislesson’sendfileandformatitforthescreensizeofaniPhone6Plus.
1.Open13End.psd,andsaveitwithanewname.
2.ChooseSelect>AllLayers.
![Page 343: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/343.jpg)
3.ChooseLayer>New>ArtboardFromLayers,nameitMuseoArteComputer,andclickOK.Thiswebsitedesignisforacomputer.
4.WiththeMuseoArteComputerartboardselectedintheLayerspanel,chooseLayer>DuplicateArtboard.NameitMuseoArteiPhone6Plus,andclickOK.
5.WiththenewartboardstillselectedintheLayerspanel,choosetheArtboardtool,hiddenundertheMovetool,andthenShift-dragtheartboardtotherighttomoveitawayfromtheoriginalartboard.
6.MakesuretheArtboardtoolisactive,andthenintheoptionsbarchooseiPhone6Plus(1242,2208)fromtheSizemenu.
7.IntheLayerspanel,expandtheMuseoArteiPhone6Plusartboard,andShift-clickthefirstandlastlayersinjustthatartboardtoselectallofitslayers.ChooseEdit>FreeTransform,Shift-dragthebottomrighthandletosizethewidthofthedesignforthatartboard,andthenpressEnterorReturn.
TestingartboarddesignswithAdobePreviewCC
Nowwe’lluseAdobePreviewCCtoseehowthenewdesignlooksonarealdevice.MakesureyourdeviceiseitherconnectedtoyourcomputerwithaUSBcableorconnectedtothesamewirelessnetworkasthecomputerrunningPhotoshop.
1.ChooseWindow>DevicePreview.Ifyoudon’talreadyhaveAdobePreviewCCinstalledonyourdevice,clicktheGettheApplinkandinstallit.
2.Onyourdevice,opentheAdobePreviewCCapp.Ifnecessary,signintoyourCreativeCloudaccountintheapp.
3.ThePhotoshopdocumentshouldappearautomaticallyinPreviewCCon
![Page 344: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/344.jpg)
yourdevice.Chooseanartboardtopreviewbychoosingitfromthemenuatthetopoftheapp.Ifyoudon’tseethemenu,tapthedevice’sscreen.
4.InPhotoshop,editthelayersintheartboardyou’repreviewing.Forexample,hideormovealayer.You’llseethatyourchangesappearquicklyonthedevice.
Reviewquestions1.Whatisalayergroup?
2.Whatisanaction?Howdoyoucreateone?
3.HowcanyougenerateassetsfromlayersandlayergroupsinPhotoshop?
Reviewanswers1.Alayergroupisagroupoflayers.Layergroupsmakeiteasiertoorganizeandworkwithlayersincompleximages,especiallywhentherearesetsoflayersthatworktogether.
2.Anactionisasetofoneormorecommandsthatyourecordandthenplaybacktoapplytoasinglefileorabatchoffiles.Tocreateone,clicktheCreateNewActionbuttonintheActionspanel,nametheaction,andclickRecord.Thenperformthetasksyouwanttoincludeinyouraction.Whenyou’vefinished,clicktheStopRecordingbuttonatthebottomoftheActionspanel.
3.UseAdobeGeneratortogenerateassetsfromlayersandlayergroupsinPhotoshop.First,enableGeneratorforyourdocumentbychoosingFile>Generate>ImageAssets.Thenrenamelayersorlayergroupstoappendfileformatextensions(.jpg,.png,or.gif),aswellassizeandqualityparameters.
![Page 345: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/345.jpg)
14.ProducingandPrintingConsistentColor
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•DefineRGB,grayscale,andCMYKcolorspacesfordisplaying,editing,andprintingimages.
•PrepareanimageforprintingonaPostScriptCMYKprinter.
•Proofanimageforprinting.
•SaveanimageasaCMYKEPSfile.
•Createandprintafour-colorseparation.
•Understandhowimagesarepreparedforprintingonpresses.
Thislessonwilltakelessthananhourtocomplete.DownloadtheLesson14projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 346: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/346.jpg)
PROJECT:TRAVELPOSTER
Toproduceconsistentcolor,youdefinethecolorspaceinwhichtoeditanddisplayRGBimages,andthecolorspaceinwhichtoedit,display,andprintCMYKimages.
Thishelpsensureaclosematchbetweenonscreenandprintedcolors.
PreparingfilesforprintingAfteryou’veeditedanimagetogettheeffectyouwant,youprobablywanttoshareorpublishitinsomeway.Ideally,you’vebeeneditingwiththefinaloutputinmind,andyou’vemanagedfileresolution,colors,filesize,andotheraspectsoftheimageaccordingly.Butasyoupreparetooutputthefile,youhaveanotheropportunitytomakesureyourimagewilllookitsbest.
![Page 347: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/347.jpg)
Note
OneexerciseinthislessonrequiresthatyourcomputerbeconnectedtoaPostScriptcolorprinter.Ifitisn’t,youcandomost,butnotall,oftheexercises.
Ifyouplantoprinttheimage—whetheryou’llprintittoyourowninkjetprinterorsendittoaserviceproviderforprofessionalprinting—youshouldperformthefollowingtasksforthebestresults.(Manyofthesetasksaredescribedingreaterdetaillaterinthislesson.)
•Determinethefinaldestination.Whetheryou’reprintingthefileyourselforsendingitaway,identifywhetheritwillbeprintedtoaPostScriptprinter,aninkjetprinter,anoffsetpress,orsomeotherdevice.Ifyou’reworkingwithaserviceprovider,askwhatformattheyprefer;often,theyrequestaPDFfile.
•Verifythattheimageresolutionisappropriate.Forprofessionalprinting,theresolutionshouldbe300dpiwhentheimagesizematchestheintendedoutputsize.Foraninkjetprinter,youmaygetthebestresultswitha300-dpiimage,butyoumightalsogetgoodresultswithalowerresolution;ifyouowntheprinter,youcanexperimentwithsettingstofindwhatworksbest.Generally,300dpiisasaferesolutionformostprintedoutput.
•Doa“zoomtest:”Takeacloselookattheimage.Zoomintocheckandcorrectsharpness,colorcorrection,noise,andotherissuesthatcanaffectthefinalprintedimagequality.
•Allowforbleedsifyou’resendinganimageforprofessionalprinting:Ifanycolorrunstotheedgeoftheimage,extendthecanvasby1/4inchonallsidestoensurethatthecolorisproperlyprintedevenifthetrimlineisnotexact.Yourserviceprovidercanhelpyoudeterminewhetheryouhavebleedsandhowtoprepareyourfiletoensureitprintscorrectly.
•Unlessyou’reprintingtoaninkjetprinter,convertthefiletoCMYK.Note:Somehigh-qualityprintersareinkjets;askyourserviceproviderwhatcolorspaceyourimageshouldbesavedin.
•Flattenthefiletoreduceitssizeforfastertransferandprintingspeeds.Makesureyoukeepanunflattenedcopyoftheoriginalsoyoucanmakechangesorreusethecontentlater,ifnecessary.PhotoshoppromptsyoutomergelayerswhenyouconverttoCMYK.
•Soft-prooftheimagetoensurethecolorswillprintasyouexpectthemto.
GettingstartedYou’llpreparean11″×17″travelposterforprofessionalprinting.ThePhotoshopfileisquitelarge,becauseitcontainsseverallayersandhasaresolutionof300dpi,whichisnecessaryforqualityprinting.
First,startPhotoshop,andrestoreitsdefaultpreferences.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)or
![Page 348: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/348.jpg)
Command+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>Open,navigatetotheLesson14folder,anddouble-clickthe14Start.psdfile.Becausethefileislarge,itmayopenslowly,dependingonyoursystem.
4.ChooseFile>SaveAs,navigatetotheLesson14folder,andsavethefileas14Working.psd.
Performinga“zoomtest”Whenyou’vefinishededitingyourimage,takeafewminutestomakesureeverythingisappropriateforyouroutputdeviceandthatyouhaven’toverlookedanypotentiallyproblematicdetails.Startwiththeimageresolution.
1.ChooseImage>ImageSize.
2.Verifythatthewidthandheightarethefinaloutputsize,andthattheresolutionisappropriate.Formostprinting,300dpiproducesgoodresults.
Thisimagehasawidthof11″andaheightof17″,whichisthefinalsizeoftheposter.Itsresolutionis300dpi.Thesizeandresolutionareappropriate.
3.ClickOKtoclosethedialogbox.
![Page 349: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/349.jpg)
Next,you’lllookcloselyattheimageandcorrectanyproblems.Whenyouprepareyourownimagesforprinting,zoominandscrolltoviewtheentireimageclosely.
4.SelecttheZoomtoolintheToolspanel,andzoominonthephotosinthelowerthirdoftheposter.
Thephotooftouristsisflatandalittlemuddy-looking.
5.SelecttheTouristslayerintheLayerspanel,andthenclicktheCurvesiconintheAdjustmentspaneltoaddaCurvesadjustmentlayer.
6.ClicktheClipToLayerbutton( )atthebottomofthePropertiespaneltocreateaclippingmask.
![Page 350: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/350.jpg)
TheclippingmaskensuresthattheadjustmentlayeraffectsonlythelayerdirectlybelowitintheLayerspanel.
7.InthePropertiespanel,selecttheWhitePointeyedroppertool,andthenclickthelightareaofthebuildingbehindthetouriststobrightenandcorrectthecolorintheimage.
Theimageoftouristslooksbetter.Buttheimageofthestatueappearsflatandlackscontrast.You’llfixthatwithaLevelsadjustmentlayer.
8.SelecttheStatuelayerintheLayerspanel,andthenclicktheLevelsiconintheAdjustmentspaneltoaddaLevelsadjustmentlayer.
![Page 351: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/351.jpg)
9.ClicktheClipToLayerbuttonatthebottomofthePropertiespaneltocreateaclippingmask,sothattheadjustmentlayeraffectsonlytheStatuelayer.
10.InthePropertiespanel,clicktheCalculateAMoreAccurateHistogramicontorefreshthehistogramdisplay.
Cachedhistogramdatadisplaysmorequickly,butisoftenlessaccurate.It’sagoodideatorefreshthehistogrambeforeyoumakeeditsbasedoninformationinit.
11.Movethesliderstopunchuptheimage.Weusedthevalues31,1.6,235.
![Page 352: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/352.jpg)
12.Savethefile.
RGBmodel
Alargepercentageofthevisiblespectrumcanberepresentedbymixingred,green,andblue(RGB)coloredlightinvariousproportionsandintensities.Wherethecolorsoverlap,theycreatecyan,magenta,yellow,andwhite.
BecausetheRGBcolorscombinetocreatewhite,theyarealsocalledadditivecolors.Addingallcolorstogethercreateswhite—thatis,alllightistransmittedbacktotheeye.Additivecolorsareusedforlighting,video,andmonitors.Yourmonitor,forexample,createscolorbyemittinglightthroughred,green,andbluephosphors.
CMYKmodel
TheCMYKmodelisbasedonthelight-absorbingqualityofinkprintedonpaper.Aswhitelightstrikestranslucentinks,partofthespectrumisabsorbed,whileotherpartsarereflectedbacktoyoureyes.
Intheory,purecyan(C),magenta(M),andyellow(Y)pigmentsshouldcombinetoabsorballcolorandproduceblack.Forthisreason,thesecolorsarecalledsubtractivecolors.Butbecauseallprintinginkscontainsomeimpurities,thesethreeinksactuallyproduceamuddybrown,andmustbecombinedwithblack(K)inktoproduceatrueblack.(KisusedinsteadofBtoavoidconfusionwithblue.)Combiningtheseinkstoreproducecoloriscalledfour-colorprocessprinting.
Identifyingout-of-gamutcolorsColorsonamonitoraredisplayedusingcombinationsofred,green,andbluelight(calledRGB),whileprintedcolorsaretypicallycreatedusingacombinationoffourinkcolors—cyan,magenta,yellow,andblack(calledCMYK).Thesefourinksarecalledprocesscolorsbecausetheyarethestandardinksusedinthefour-colorprintingprocess.
MostscannedphotographscontainRGBcolorswithintheCMYKgamut,sochangingthemtoCMYKmodeconvertsallthecolorswithrelativelylittlesubstitution.Imagesthatarecreatedoraltereddigitally,however,oftencontainRGBcolorsthatareoutsidethe
![Page 353: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/353.jpg)
CMYKgamut—forexample,neon-coloredlogosandlights.
BeforeyouconvertanimagefromRGBtoCMYK,youcanpreviewtheCMYKcolorvalueswhilestillinRGBmode.
1.ChooseView>GamutWarningtoseeout-of-gamutcolors.Photoshopbuildsacolor-conversiontable,anddisplaysaneutralgrayintheimagewindowwherethecolorsareoutofgamut.
Becausethegraycanbehardtospotintheimage,you’llconvertittoamorevisiblecolor.
2.ChooseEdit>Preferences>Transparency&Gamut(Windows)orPhotoshopCC>Preferences>Transparency&Gamut(MacOS).
3.ClickthecolorsampleintheGamutWarningareaatthebottomofthedialogbox.Selectavividcolor,suchaspurpleorbrightgreen,andclickOK.
4.ClickOKtoclosethePreferencesdialogbox.
Thebrightnewcoloryouchoseappearsinsteadoftheneutralgrayasthegamutwarningcolor.
5.ChooseView>GamutWarningtoturnoffthepreviewofout-of-gamutcolors.
Photoshopwillautomaticallycorrecttheseout-of-gamutcolorswhenyousavethefileinPhotoshopEPSformatlaterinthislesson.PhotoshopEPSformatchangestheRGBimagetoCMYK,adjustingtheRGBcolorsasneededtobringthemintotheCMYKcolorgamut.
AdjustinganimageThenextstepinpreparinganimageforoutputistomakeanynecessarycolorandtonaladjustments.Inthisexercise,you’lladdsometonalandcoloradjustmentstocorrectanoff-colorscanoftheoriginalposter.
Sothatyoucancomparetheimagebeforeandaftermakingcorrections,you’llstartbymakingacopy.
1.ChooseImage>Duplicate,andclickOKtoduplicatetheimage.
2.ChooseWindow>Arrange>2UpVerticalsoyoucancomparetheimagesasyouwork.
![Page 354: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/354.jpg)
You’lladjustthehueandsaturationoftheimagetomoveallcolorsintogamut.
3.Select14Working.psd(theoriginalimage)tomakeitactive,andthenselecttheVisitParislayerintheLayerspanel.
4.ChooseSelect>ColorRange.
5.IntheColorRangedialogbox,chooseOutOfGamutfromtheSelectmenu,andthenclickOK.
Theareasthatweremarkedasoutofgamutearlierarenowselected,soyoucanmakechangesthataffectonlythoseareas.
6.ChooseView>Extrastohidetheselectionwhileyouworkwithit.
Theselectionbordercanbedistracting.Whenyouhideextras,younolongerseetheselection,butit’sstillineffect.
7.ClicktheHue/SaturationbuttonintheAdjustmentspaneltocreateaHue/Saturationadjustmentlayer.(ChooseWindow>Adjustmentsifthepanelisn’topen.)TheHue/Saturationadjustmentlayerincludesalayermask,createdfromyourselection.
8.InthePropertiespanel,dothefollowing:
![Page 355: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/355.jpg)
•LeavetheHuesettingatthedefaultvalue.
•DragtheSaturationslideruntiltheintensityofthecolorslooksmorerealistic(weused-14).
•DragtheLightnesstothelefttodarken(weused-2).
9.ChooseView>GamutWarning.Youhaveremovedmostoftheout-of-gamutcolorsfromtheimage.ChooseView>GamutWarningagaintodeselectit.
10.Closetheduplicateimagefilewithoutsavingit.
ConvertinganimagetoCMYKIt’sgenerallyagoodideatoworkinRGBmodeaslongaspossible.Convertingbetweenmodescausescolorvaluestoberounded—andthereforelessaccurateifyouconvertmultipletimes.Onceyou’vemadeanylast-minutecorrections,you’rereadytoconverttheimagetoCMYK.Ifyouthinkyoumaywanttooutputtheimagetoaninkjetprinterordistributeitdigitallylater,saveacopyinRGBmodebeforeconvertingtoCMYKmode.
1.ClicktheChannelstabtobringtheChannelspaneltothefront.
TheimageiscurrentlyinRGBmode,sotherearethreechannelslisted:red,green,andblue.TheRGBchannelisnotactuallyachannel,butacompositeofallthree.
2.ChooseImage>Mode>CMYKColor.
3.ClickMergeinthemessagethatwarnsyouthatyoumightlosesomeadjustmentlayers.
AdjustmentlayersarelostwhenyouconvertthecolormodefromRGBtoCMYK.Mergingthelayersensurestheadjustmentsyoumadearepreserved.
4.ClickOKinthemessageaboutthecolorprofileusedintheconversion.
![Page 356: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/356.jpg)
You’lllearnmoreaboutcolorprofileswhenyouworkwithcolormanagement.
TheChannelspanelnowdisplaysfourchannels:cyan,magenta,yellow,andblack.Additionally,itliststheCMYKcomposite.Thelayersweremergedduringconversion,sothereisonlyonelayerintheLayerspanel.
AboutcolormanagementBecausetheRGBandCMYKcolormodelsusedifferentmethodstodisplaycolors,eachreproducesadifferentgamut,orrange,ofcolors.Forexample,RGBuseslighttoproducecolor,soitsgamutincludesneoncolors,suchasthoseyou’dseeinaneonsign.Incontrast,printinginksexcelatreproducingcertaincolorsthatcanlieoutsidetheRGBgamut,suchassomepastelsandpureblack.
ButnotallRGBandCMYKgamutsarealike.Eachmonitorandprintermodeldiffers,andsoeachdisplaysaslightlydifferentgamut.Forexample,onebrandofmonitormayproduceslightlybrighterbluesthananother.Thecolorspaceforadeviceisdefinedbythegamutitcanreproduce.
ThecolormanagementsysteminPhotoshopusesInternationalColorConsortium(ICC)-compliantcolorprofilestoconvertcolorsfromonecolorspaceintoanother.Acolorprofileisadescriptionofadevice’scolorspace,suchastheCMYKcolorspaceofaparticularprinter.Youspecifywhichprofilestousetoaccuratelyproofandprintyourimages.Onceyou’veselectedtheprofiles,Photoshopcanembedthemintoyourimagefiles,sothatPhotoshopandotherapplicationscanaccuratelymanagecolorfortheimage.
Forinformationonembeddingcolorprofiles,seePhotoshopHelp.
Beforeyoubeginworkingwithcolormanagement,youshouldcalibrateyourmonitor.Ifyourmonitordoesn’tdisplaycolorsaccurately,coloradjustmentsyoumakebasedonthe
![Page 357: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/357.jpg)
imageyouseeonyourmonitormaynotbeaccurate.Forinformationaboutcalibratingyourmonitor,seePhotoshopHelp.
Specifyingcolor-managementsettingsInordertoaccuratelypreviewyourcolorsonscreen,youneedtosetupcolormanagementinPhotoshop.Mostofthecolor-managementcontrolsyouneedareintheColorSettingsdialogbox.
Bydefault,PhotoshopissetupforRGBaspartofadigitalworkflow.Ifyouarepreparingartworkforprintproduction,however,you’llwanttochangethesettingstobemoreappropriateforimagesthatwillbeprintedonpaperratherthandisplayedonascreen.
You’llcreatecustomizedcolorsettings.
1.ChooseEdit>ColorSettingstoopentheColorSettingsdialogbox.
Thebottomofthedialogboxinteractivelydescribeseachoption.
2.Movethepointerovereachpartofthedialogbox,includingthenamesofareas(suchasWorkingSpaces),themenunames,andthemenuoptions.Asyoumovethepointer,Photoshopdisplaysinformationabouteachitem.Whenyou’vefinished,returntheoptionstotheirdefaults.
Now,you’llchooseasetofoptionsdesignedforaprintworkflow,ratherthananonlineworkflow.
3.ChooseNorthAmericaPrepress2fromtheSettingsmenu.Theworkingspacesandcolor-managementpolicyoptionschangeforaprepressworkflow.ThenclickOK.
![Page 358: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/358.jpg)
ProofinganimageYou’llselectaproofprofilesothatyoucanviewacloseonscreenrepresentationofwhatanimagewilllooklikewhenprinted.Anaccurateproofprofileletsyouproofonthescreen(soft-proof)forprintedoutput.
Aproofprofile(alsocalledaproofsetup)defineshowthedocumentisgoingtobeprinted,andadjuststheonscreenappearanceaccordingly.Photoshopprovidesavarietyofsettingsthatcanhelpyouproofimagesfordifferentuses,includingprintanddisplayontheweb.Forthislesson,you’llcreateacustomproofsetup.Youcanthensavethesettingsforuseonotherimagesthatwillbeoutputthesameway.
1.ChooseView>ProofSetup>Custom.TheCustomizeProofConditiondialogboxopens.MakesurePreviewisselected.
2.FromtheDeviceToSimulatemenu,chooseaprofilethatrepresentsthefinaloutputdevice,suchasthatfortheprinteryou’llusetoprinttheimage.Ifyoudon’thaveaspecificprinter,theprofileWorkingCMYK–U.S.WebCoated(SWOP)v2,thecurrentdefault,isgenerallyagoodchoice.
3.Ifyou’vechosenadifferentprofile,makesurePreserveNumbersisnotselected.
ThePreserveCMYKNumbersoptionsimulateshowcolorswillappearifthey’renotconvertedtotheoutputdevicecolorspace.
4.MakesureRelativeColorimetricisselectedfortheRenderingIntent.
Arenderingintentdetermineshowthecolorisconvertedfromonecolorspacetoanother.RelativeColorimetric,whichpreservescolorrelationshipswithoutsacrificingcoloraccuracy,isthestandardrenderingintentforprintinginNorthAmericaandEurope.
5.Ifit’savailablefortheprofileyouchose,selectSimulateBlackInk.Thendeselectit,andselectSimulatePaperColor;noticethatselectingthisoptionautomaticallyselectsSimulateBlackInk.
![Page 359: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/359.jpg)
Tip
Todisplaythedocumentwithandwithouttheproofsettings,toggleView>ProofColors.
Noticethattheimageappearstolosecontrast.PaperColorsimulatesthedingywhiteofrealpaper,accordingtotheproofprofile.BlackInksimulatesthedarkgraythatactuallyprintstomostprinters,insteadofsolidblack.Notallprofilessupporttheseoptions.
6.TogglethePreviewoptiontoseethedifferencebetweentheimageasitisdisplayedonscreenandasitwillprint,basedontheprofileyouselected.ThenclickOK.
SavingtheimageasaCMYKEPSfileManyprofessionalprintersrequestthatPhotoshopimagesbesubmittedinEPSformat.You’llsavethisimageasanEPSfileinCMYKmode.
1.ChooseFile>SaveAs.
2.IntheSaveAsdialogbox,dothefollowing,andthenclickSave:
•ChoosePhotoshopEPSfromtheFormatmenu.
•UnderColor,selectUseProofSetup.Don’tworryaboutthewarningicon;you’llsaveacopy.
•Acceptthefilename14Working.eps.
![Page 360: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/360.jpg)
3.ClickOKintheEPSOptionsdialogboxthatappears.
4.Saveandthenclosethe14Working.psdfile.
5.ChooseFile>Open,navigatetotheLessons/Lesson14folder,anddouble-clickthe14Working.epsfile.
Printingtoadesktopinkjet
Manyconsumer-levelinkjetprintersdoagoodjobprintingphotographsandotherimagefiles.Theprecisesettingsavailablevaryfromprintertoprinter,butwhenyou’reprintingimagesfromPhotoshoptoadesktopinkjetprinter,you’llgetthebestresultsifyoudothefollowing:
•Makesuretheappropriateprinterdriverisinstalled,andthatyou’veselectedit.
•Usetheappropriatepaperforyourintendeduse.Specialphotographicandcoatedpapersareagoodchoicewhenyou’reprintingphotosforframing.
•Selectthecorrectpapersourceintheprintersettings.Theprinterlaysinkdifferentlyondifferenttypesofpaper.Ifyou’reusingphotographicpaper,makesureyou’veselecteditintheprintersettings.
•Selecttheimagequalityintheprintersettings.Forframedprints,youprobablywanttoprintthehighestquality.Ifyou’reprintingaprooftogetasenseofthecolor,youmaywanttoselectalowerqualityforspeedierprintingandtouselessink.
PrintingaCMYKimagefromPhotoshopIfyou’reprintinganimagedirectlyfromPhotoshop,usethefollowingguidelinesforbestresults:
•Printacolorcomposite,oftencalledacolorcomp,toproofyourimage.Acolor
![Page 361: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/361.jpg)
compositeisasingleprintthatcombinesthered,green,andbluechannelsofanRGBimage(orthecyan,magenta,yellow,andblackchannelsofaCMYKimage).Thisindicateswhatthefinalprintedimagewilllooklike.
•Settheparametersforthehalftonescreen.
•Printseparationstomakesuretheimageseparatescorrectly.
•Printtofilmorplate.
Whenyouprintcolorseparations,Photoshopprintsaseparatesheet,orplate,foreachink.ForaCMYKimage,itprintsfourplates,oneforeachprocesscolor.Inthisexercise,you’llprintcolorseparations.
1.Withthe14Working.epsimageopenfromthepreviousexercise,chooseFile>Print.
Bydefault,Photoshopprintsanydocumentasacompositeimage.Toprintthisfileasseparations,youneedtoexplicitlyinstructPhotoshopinthePrintdialogbox.
2.InthePhotoshopPrintSettingsdialogbox,dothefollowing:
•IntheColorManagementarea,chooseSeparationsfromtheColorHandlingmenu.
•ClickPrint.
ThislessonhasprovidedanintroductiontoprintingandproducingconsistentcolorfromPhotoshop.Ifyou’reprintingonadesktopprinter,youcanexperimentwithdifferentsettingstofindthebestcolorandprintsettingsforyoursystem.Ifyou’repreparingimagesforprofessionalprinting,consultwithyourprintserviceprovidertodeterminethebestsettingstouse.Formoreinformationaboutcolormanagement,printingoptions,and
![Page 362: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/362.jpg)
colorseparations,seePhotoshopHelp.
ExtraCredit
SharingyourworkonBehance
IntegratedintoCreativeCloud,Behanceistheleadingonlineplatformforshowcasinganddiscoveringcreativework.PhotoshopmakesiteasytouploadandpostfilestoyourownportfolioonBehance.Makesureyou’vesignedupforaBehanceaccounttodothefollowingsteps.
1.Openthe14Working.epsfileinPhotoshop,ifitisn’talreadyopen.
2.ChooseFile>ShareOnBehance.
TheShareOnBehancedialogboxopens.
3.Youmayneedtosignin;ifyou’realreadysignedin,you’llseeapreviewofyourworkingfile.Ifyoudon’thaveaBehanceportfolio,youcansignupforfreewithyourCreativeCloudsubscription.
4.IntheUploadAWorkInProgresswindow,typeVisitParisforthetitle.
5.Typeparis,travel,eiffeltower,collageforthetags.
6.ChoosePrivatefromtheVisibleTomenuifyouwanttocontrolwhoseestheimage.ChooseEveryoneifyouwantittobepubliclyavailable.
7.ClickContinue.
Thedialogboxdisplaysalinktoyourartwork.Youcansharethelinkon
![Page 363: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/363.jpg)
socialmediaorpasteitintoemailorablogpost.YoucanalsoclickViewAndShareOnBehancetosynctosocialnetworkssuchasTwitter,Facebook,andLinkedIn.
8.ClickClose.
Closethefilewithoutsaving.YourworkofartisavailabletobeadmiredonBehance.
Withcutting-edgeandtraditionaldesignersalikesharingtheirwork,Behanceisagreatsourceofinspiration.Youcanbrowseaswideornarrowagroupofworksasyoulike,withfiltersforpopularimages,fieldsofinterest,andcountriesoforigin.Oryoucanenteryourownsearchterm.Andwhenyoufindcontributorsyoulike,youcanfollowthemtokeepupwiththeirlatestwork.
![Page 364: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/364.jpg)
Reviewquestions1.Whatstepsshouldyoufollowtoreproducecoloraccurately?
2.Whatisagamut?
3.Whatisacolorprofile?
4.Whatarecolorseparations?
Reviewanswers1.Toreproducecoloraccurately,firstcalibrateyourmonitor,andthenusetheColorSettingsdialogboxtospecifywhichcolorspacestouse.Forexample,youcanspecifywhichRGBcolorspacetouseforonlineimages,andwhichCMYKcolorspacetouseforimagesthatwillbeprinted.Youcanthenprooftheimage,checkforout-of-gamutcolors,adjustcolorsasneeded,and—forprintedimages—createcolorseparations.
2.Agamutistherangeofcolorsthatcanbereproducedbyacolormodelordevice.Forexample,theRGBandCMYKcolormodelshavedifferentgamuts,asdoanytwoRGBscanners.
3.Acolorprofileisadescriptionofadevice’scolorspace,suchastheCMYKcolorspaceofaparticularprinter.ApplicationssuchasPhotoshopcaninterpretcolorprofilesinanimagetomaintainconsistentcoloracrossdifferentapplications,platforms,anddevices.
4.Colorseparationsareseparateplatesforeachinkusedinadocument.Often,you’llprintcolorseparationsforthecyan,magenta,yellow,andblack(CMYK)inks.
![Page 365: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/365.jpg)
15.Printing3DFiles
Lessonoverview
Inthislesson,you’lllearnhowtodothefollowing:
•Createasimple3Dobjectusingameshpreset.
•Use3DtoolsinPhotoshop.
•Manipulate3Dobjects.
•Adjustthecameraview.
•Prepare3Dfilesforprinting.
•Exportafileforremoteprinting.
Thislessonwilltakeabout30minutestocomplete.DownloadtheLesson15projectfilesfromtheLesson&UpdateFilestabonyourAccountpageatwww.peachpit.com,ifyouhaven’talreadydoneso.Asyouworkonthislesson,you’llpreservethestartfiles.Ifyouneedtorestorethestartfiles,downloadthemfromyourAccountpage.
![Page 366: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/366.jpg)
PROJECT:3DLUGGAGETAG
Youcanprint3DobjectsdirectlyfromPhotoshop.Ifyouhavea3Dprinteronsite,youcanprintlocally.Otherwise,youcanexportyourfileforprintingbyanonlinevendor.
GettingstartedThislessonexplores3Dfeatures,whichareavailableonlyifyourvideocardhasatleast512MBofdedicatedVRAMandsupportsOpenGL2.0,andifOpenGL2.0isenabledonyourcomputer.Tolearnaboutyourvideocard,chooseEdit>Preferences>Performance(Windows)orPhotoshopCC>Preferences>Performance(MacOS).InformationaboutyourvideocardisintheGraphicsProcessorSettingsareaofthedialogbox.
Note
FeaturescoveredinthislessonrequireMacOS10.7orlater,orWindows7orlater,andatleast512MBVRAM.FormorecompletePhotoshopsystemrequirements,visithttps://helpx.adobe.com/photoshop/system-requirements.html.
Inthislesson,you’llcreateathree-dimensionalluggagetag.First,you’llviewthefinishedtag.
1.StartPhotoshop,andthenimmediatelyholddownCtrl+Alt+Shift(Windows)orCommand+Option+Shift(MacOS)torestorethedefaultpreferences.(See“Restoringdefaultpreferences”onpage4.)
![Page 367: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/367.jpg)
2.Whenprompted,clickYestodeletetheAdobePhotoshopSettingsfile.
3.ChooseFile>BrowseInBridgetoopenAdobeBridge.
4.InBridge,clickLessonsintheFavoritespanel.Double-clicktheLesson15folderintheContentpanel.
5.Viewthe15End.psdfileinBridge.
The15End.psdfilecontainsa3Drenderingofaluggagetag.Inthislesson,you’llcombineelementstocreatetheluggagetag,andthenprepareitforprinting.Ifyouwantto,youcanprintitlocallytoa3Dprinterorexportittoanonlinevendorforprinting.(You’llseeestimatedcostsbeforeplacingtheorder.)
Beforeyoucreatetheluggagetag,you’llplaywiththe3Dtoolstobecomefamiliarwiththe3Denvironment.
6.ReturntoPhotoshop.
Understandingthe3DenvironmentTheadvantagetoworkingwith3Dobjectsis,obviously,thatyoucanworkwiththeminthreedimensions.Youcanalsoreturntoa3Dlayeratanytimetochangelighting,color,material,orpositionwithouthavingtore-createalotoftheart.Photoshopincludesseveralbasictoolsthatmakeiteasytorotate,resize,andposition3Dobjects.The3Dtoolsintheoptionsbarmanipulatetheobjectitself.TheCamerawidgetinthelowerleftcorneroftheapplicationwindowmanipulatesthecamerasoyoucanviewa3Dscenefromdifferentangles.
Youcanusethe3Dtoolswhenevera3DlayerisselectedintheLayerspanel.A3Dlayerbehaveslikeanyotherlayer—youcanapplylayerstyles,maskit,andsoon.However,a3Dlayercanbequitecomplex.
Unlikearegularlayer,a3Dlayercontainsoneormoremeshes.Ameshdefinesthe3Dobject.Forexample,inthefollowingexercise,themeshistheconeshape.Eachmesh,inturn,includesoneormorematerials—theappearanceofapartorallofthemesh.Eachmaterialincludesoneormoremaps,whicharethecomponentsoftheappearance.Thereareninetypicalmaps,andtherecanbeonlyoneofeachkind;however,youcanalsousecustommaps.Eachmapcontainsonetexture—theimagethatdefineswhatthemapsandmaterialslooklike.Thetexturemaybeasimplebitmapgraphicorasetoflayers.The
![Page 368: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/368.jpg)
sametexturemightbeusedbymanydifferentmapsandmaterials.
Inadditiontomeshes,a3Dlayeralsoincludesoneormorelights,whichaffecttheappearanceof3Dobjectsandremaininafixedpositionasyouspinormovetheobject.A3Dlayeralsoincludescameras,whicharesavedviewswiththeobjectsinaparticularposition.Theshadercreatesthefinalappearancebasedonthematerials,objectproperties,andrenderer.
Thatmayallsoundcomplicated,butthemostimportantthingtorememberisthatthe3Dtoolsintheoptionsbarmoveanobjectin3DspaceandtheCamerawidgetmovesthecamerasthatviewtheobject.
You’llstartbycreatingasimple3Dobjectfromaplaincoloredlayer.
1.InPhotoshop,chooseFile>New.ClickOKtoacceptthedefaultvalues.
2.ChooseSelect>Alltoselecttheentirebackgroundlayer.
3.ChooseEdit>Fill.IntheFilldialogbox,chooseColorfromtheContentsmenu,andthenselectavividbluecolorintheColorPicker.ClickOKtoclosetheColorPicker,andclickOKagaintoclosetheFilldialogbox.
4.ChooseSelect>Deselect.
5.Choose3D>NewMeshFromLayer>MeshPreset>Cone.Ifyouseeamessageaskingwhetheryouwanttoswitchtothe3Dworkspace,clickYes.
![Page 369: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/369.jpg)
Tip
IfyouseeanEmbeddedProfileMIsmatchmessage,clickOK.
Yourbluelayerbecomesabluecone.Photoshopdisplaysagrid,aSecondaryViewwindow,aCamerawidget,andother3Dresources.Nowthatyouhavea3Dobject,youcanusethe3Dtools.
6.IntheToolspanel,selecttheMovetool( ).
Allthe3DcapabilitiesareembeddedintotheMovetool,whichrecognizeswhena3Dlayerisselectedandenablesthe3Dtools.
7.SelectthePanthe3DCameratool( )inthe3DModeareaoftheoptionsbar.
8.Clicktheedgeofthecone,orjustoutsideit,anddragtomoveitfromsidetosideorupanddown.Returntheconetothecenter.(Ifyouclicktheconeitself,Photoshoprecognizesthe3DAxiswidget,andswitchestothetoolthatcorrespondswiththeactiveareaofthewidget,whichyou’lllearnaboutshortly.)
![Page 370: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/370.jpg)
9.SelecttheOrbitthe3DCameratool( )intheoptionsbar,andthenclickanddragtheconetorotatetheview.Experimentwiththeothertoolstoseehowtheyaffecttheviewoftheobject.
10.WiththeMovetool,clicktheconetoselectit.
Whenyouselecta3Dobject,Photoshopdisplaysthecolorful3DAxiswidget,withgreen,red,andbluerepresentingdifferentaxes.Redrepresentsthexaxis,greenrepresentstheyaxis,andbluerepresentsthezaxis.(Hint:ThinkofRGBcolortoremembertheorder.)
Tip
Asyoumovetheobject,the3DAxiswidgetshifts,too.Forexample,thexandyaxisarrowsmaybeavailable,whilethezaxisispointingdirectlyintothescene.Theyellowcenterboxmayalsobeobscuredbyanaxis.
Ifyouhoverthemouseoverthecenterboxuntilitturnsyellow,youcanclicktheboxanddragtoscaletheobjectuniformly.Clickanarrowtomovetheobjectalongthataxis;clickthecurvedhandlejustbeforethearrowtorotateonthataxis;clickthesmallerhandletoscalealongthataxis.
11.Rotate,scale,andmovetheconeusingthewidget.
12.Right-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS)theCamerawidgetinthelowerleftcorneroftheapplicationwindow(ithastwoaxesvisible),andchooseTop.
OptionsintheCameramenudeterminetheanglefromwhichyouseetheobject.Thecameraanglechanges,buttheobjectitselfdoesnot.Don’tbefooledbyitsrelationshiptothebackground;thebackgroundisnot3D,soitremainsinplacewhenPhotoshopmovesthecameraforthe3Dobject.
![Page 371: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/371.jpg)
13.Chooseothercameraviewstoseehowtheyaffecttheperspective.
14.Whenyou’redoneexperimenting,closethefile.Youcansaveyourcreationifyouwantto,orclosewithoutsaving.
Positioning3DelementsNowthatyou’vegottenafeelforthe3Dtools,you’llusethemtopositionthetextonaluggagetag.
1.ChooseFile>Open,navigatetotheLesson15folder,anddouble-clickthe15Start.psdfile.
Tip
IfyouseeanEmbeddedProfileMIsmatchmessage,clickOK.
Thefilecontainstwo3Delements:thetextandthetagitself.Currently,thetextisinanawkwardposition,overlappingthetag.You’llstartbycenteringit.
2.MakesuretheMovetoolisselectedintheToolspanel.
3.Clickthefrontofthe“VisitParis”texttoactivatethe3DAxiswidget.
4.HoverthecursoroverthetipofthegreenarrowuntiltheMoveOnYAxistooltipappears.
5.Clickthetipofthegreenarrow,anddragthetypedownuntilit’scenteredverticallyontheredtag.
6.Clickthetipoftheredarrow,anddragthetypetotherightsothatit’shorizontallycenteredontheredtag.
![Page 372: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/372.jpg)
Yourtagisreadytoprint!
7.ChooseFile>SaveAs.NavigatetotheLesson15folder,andsavethefileas15Working.psd.ClickOKinthePhotoshopFormatOptionsdialogbox.
Printinga3DfileWhenyouthinkofprinting,youusuallythinkofproducingaflatpageoftwo-dimensionaltextandimages.Theymaybehigh-quality,amazingimages,butyoucan’tseethemfromdifferentangles,andwhatyouholdinyourhandremainsapieceofpaperorotherrelativelysimplemedia.
3Dprintersopenupawholenewworldofprintingopportunities.Insteadofprintinganimageofathing,youcanprintthethingitself.Thepossibilitiesareendless,includingmedicaluses,prototyping,andcreativeenterprisessuchasmakingjewelryandone-of-a-kindsouvenirs.
3Dprinterswereoncetheprovinceofwell-fundedlabs,buthaverecentlybecomemuchmoreaccessible.Inmanycities,youcanuseoneata“maker”ordo-it-yourself(DIY)space,asharedworkshopareawhere,forafee,youcanusemanyadvancedresources.Ifyoudon’thavea3Dprinteryourselforeasyaccesstoone,youcanalsosendyour3Dcreationstoonlinevendorswhowillprintthemusingthematerialyouspecifyandmailthemtoyou.
Youcancreate3DobjectsinPhotoshop—orimport3Dobjectsthathavebeencreatedelsewhere—andprintthemdirectlyfromPhotoshop.
Specifying3DprintsettingsYoudon’tusethestandardPrintdialogboxtoprint3DobjectsfromPhotoshop.Andbeforeyouprint,youneedtomakesurethesettingsareappropriate.
1.Choose3D>3DPrintSettings.
ThePropertiespaneldisplaysthe3Dprintsettings,andtheimagewindowshowsapreviewofyour3Dobject.Thepreviewshowsyouhowitwilllookwhenprinted,basedontheprinteryouselect.
2.ChooseShapewaysfromthePrintTomenuinthePropertiespanel.
![Page 373: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/373.jpg)
Shapewaysisanonlinevendorthatprints3Dobjectsandmailsthemtoyouforafee.Thereareotheronlinevendors,butShapewaysiseasiesttousebecauseyoucanchooseitsprintersdirectlywithinPhotoshop.Ifyouuseanothervendor,askthemforinstructionsforprintingfromPhotoshop.
Ifyouowna3Dprinter,chooseLocalfromthePrintTomenu,andthenchooseyourprinterfromthePrintermenu.Ifyourprinterisn’tlistedinthemenu,chooseGetLatestPrintersfromthePrintTomenu,andthendownloadtheprofilesforallsupportedprinters.
3.ChoosePlastic-AlumidefromthePrintermenu.Plasticalumideisaplasticthatsimulatesmetal.
WhenyouchooseShapewaysfromthePrintTomenu,thePrintermenulistsdozensofmaterialoptions.Thematerialyouselectaffectstheappearanceandcostoftheobjectyouprint.
Tip
YoucanlearnmoreaboutthematerialsavailablethroughShapeways,andcomparecostsofvariousoptions,byvisitinghttp://www.shapeways.com/materials.
Thepreviewofthe3Dobjectchangesintheimagewindowtoreflectthechoicesyou’vemade.WhenyouchoosePlastic-Alumide,thepreviewshowsasilver-graytagwithextrudedtext.
4.MakesureInchesisselectedinthePrinterUnitsmenutospecifyhowprintervolumeshouldbemeasured.
3Dprintershavedifferentcapacities,andit’simportanttoconsiderwhetheryourobjectwillfitwithintheprinter’svolume.ThePrinterUnitsvaluesaredimmed,becauseyoucan’tchangethem;theydescribethevolumefortheprinteryou’vechosen.TheSceneVolumevaluesreflectthesizeofyour3Dscene(inthiscase,asingleobject).IftheShow
![Page 374: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/374.jpg)
checkboxisselected,thepreviewshowsacubeoutlinetorepresenttheprintervolumethatthescenelieswithin.
Ifthescenevolumeislargerthantheprintervolume,clickScaleToPrintVolumeinthePropertiespaneltoreduceitssizesothatyourprintercanprintit.Inthiscase,thescenevolumeiscomfortablysmallerthantheprintervolume.
5.ChooseMediumfromtheDetailLevelmenu.Thisoptiondetermineshowdetailedthepreviewimageis.
TheSurfaceDetailoptionspreservebumpmapsandothertextureandopacitysettingswhenyouprint.Youcanleavethoseoptionsselected,thoughtherearenobumpmapsoropacitysettingsinthisobject.
You’rereadytoprint.
Exportinga3DobjectPrintinga3Dobjectisalittlemorecomplicatedthanprintingatwo-dimensionalimage.It’snotthatmuchmorechallengingforthepersondoingtheprinting,butPhotoshophastodoalotofbehind-the-scenescalculations.
3Dprintersbuildobjectsfromthebottom.Ifyou’reprintingacube,forexample,oranotherobjectwithasignificantbase,theprintercancreateitwithoutfurthersupport.However,many3Dobjectsareirregularlyshaped,andthebottomoftheobjectmayactuallybeasetofdisconnectedsurfaces.Forexample,thinkofamodelofananimal.Thebottomoftheanimaliscomposedofthefourseparatefeet.Inordertoprintsuchanobject,theprinterrequiresasupportstructure.Thatstructuretypicallyincludesaraft,whichprovidesabasetoprintfrom,andscaffolding,whichsupportsportionsoftheobjectsotheydon’tcollapsewhiletherestoftheobjectisbeingprinted.
Whenyouchoose3DPrint,Photoshoppreparestheobjectforprinting,andcalculatesanynecessaryraftandscaffoldingaswell.
1.Choose3D>3DPrint,orclicktheStartPrinticonatthebottomofthePropertiespanel.
Photoshopdisplaysaprogressbarasitpreparestheprintjob.
2.ClickOKinthedialogboxthatinformsyouthattheestimatedpricemaydifferfromthefinalpurchaseprice.
3.InthePhotoshop3DPrintSettingsdialogbox,reviewtheestimatedpriceandprintsize.
![Page 375: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/375.jpg)
ClickoptionsinthePreviewareaofthedialogboxtoseethesize,shadows,raft,scaffolding,andotheraspectsofthejob.Thisobjectrequiresnoraftorscaffolding,sothoseoptionsaredimmed.
Usethe3Dtoolsatthetopofthedialogboxtoseeyourobjectfromdifferentangles.
Printingpricesvarydramaticallydependingonthematerialyouchoose.YoucanclickCancel,chooseadifferentprinter,andthenletPhotoshopcalculatethepriceagain.You’vemadenocommitmentsatthispointintheprocess.
4.ClickExport.
5.ClickSaveintheSavedialogbox.
Photoshopsavesthe3Dprintfileinformationinthe15Working.psdfile.
6.Whenyou’repromptedtouploadyourfiletotheShapewayssiteforprinting,clickYestocontinuetothesite,orclickNotostoptheprocess.
7.IfyoucontinuetotheShapewayssite,signinifyouhaveanaccount,orcreateoneifyoudon’t.(Creatinganaccountisfree.)
8.OntheShapewayswebsite,clickUpload.Whenprompted,selectthefileyoujustsavedandclickChoose.ItwillbeintheLesson15folder,called15Working.stl.zip.ThenclickUpload.
![Page 376: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/376.jpg)
Note
Youarenotcommittedtoapurchaseuntilyoucheckoutandpayfortheobject.
Shapewaysuploadsandunzipsthefile.Itdisplaystheobjectandlistspossiblematerialsandtheirprices.
9.ClickAddToCartnexttothematerialyouwanttoprint,andthenfollowtheonscreeninstructionstoplaceyourorder.Theprintedobjectwillbeshippedtoyou.
![Page 377: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/377.jpg)
Reviewquestions1.Howdoesa3DlayerdifferfromotherlayersinPhotoshop?
2.Howcanyouchangethecameraview?
3.Whichcolorrepresentseachaxisonthe3DAxiswidget?
4.Howdoyouprinta3Dobject?
Reviewanswers1.A3Dlayerbehaveslikeanyotherlayer—youcanapplylayerstyles,maskit,andsoon.However,unlikearegularlayer,a3Dlayeralsocontainsoneormoremeshes,whichdefine3Dobjects.Youcanworkwithmeshesandthematerials,maps,andtexturestheycontain.Youcanalsoadjustthelightingfora3Dlayer.
2.Tochangethecameraview,youcanmovetheCamerawidget,orright-click(Windows)orControl-click(MacOS)thewidgettochooseacameraviewpreset.
3.Inthe3DAxiswidget,theredarrowrepresentstheXaxis;thegreenarrowrepresentstheYaxis,andthebluearrowrepresentstheZaxis.
4.Toprinta3DobjectfromPhotoshop,firstchoose3D>3DPrintSettings,andsetupyourprinteroptions.Thenchoose3D>3DPrint,orclicktheStartPrinticonatthebottomofthePropertiespanel.
![Page 378: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/378.jpg)
Appendix:Toolspaneloverview
PhotoshopCCToolspanel
![Page 379: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/379.jpg)
TheMovetoolmovesselections,layers,andguides.
Themarqueetoolsmakerectangular,elliptical,singlerow,andsinglecolumnselections.
Thelassotoolsmakefreehand,polygonal(straightedged),andmagnetic(snap-to)selections.
TheQuickSelectiontoolletsyouquickly“paint”aselectionusinganadjustableroundbrushtip.
![Page 380: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/380.jpg)
TheMagicWandtoolselectssimilarlycoloredareas.
Thecroptoolstrim,straighten,andchangetheperspectiveofimages.
TheEyedroppertoolsamplescolorsinanimage.
The3DMaterialEyedroppertoolloadsselectedmaterialfroma3Dobject.
TheColorSamplertoolsamplesuptofourareasoftheimage.
![Page 381: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/381.jpg)
TheRulertoolmeasuresdistances,locations,andangles.
TheNotetoolmakesnotesthatcanbeattachedtoanimage.
TheCounttoolcountsobjectsinanimage.
TheSlicetoolcreatesslices.
TheSliceSelecttoolselectsslices.
![Page 382: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/382.jpg)
TheSpotHealingBrushtoolquicklyremovesblemishesandimperfectionsfromphotographswithauniformbackground.
TheHealingBrushtoolpaintswithasampleorpatterntorepairimperfectionsinanimage.
ThePatchtoolrepairsimperfectionsinaselectedareaofanimageusingasampleorpattern.
TheContent-AwareMovetoolrecomposesandblendspixelstoaccommodateamovedobject.
![Page 383: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/383.jpg)
TheRedEyetoolremovesredeyeinflashphotoswithoneclick.
TheBrushtoolpaintsbrushstrokes.
ThePenciltoolpaintshard-edgedstrokes.
TheColorReplacementtoolsubstitutesonecolorforanother.
TheMixerBrushtoolblendsasampledcolorwithanexistingcolor.
![Page 384: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/384.jpg)
TheCloneStamptoolpaintswithasampleofanimage.
ThePatternStamptoolpaintswithapartofanimageasapattern.
TheHistoryBrushtoolpaintsacopyoftheselectedstateorsnapshotintothecurrentimagewindow.
TheArtHistoryBrushtoolpaintsstylizedstrokesthatsimulatethelookofdifferentpaintstyles,usingaselectedstateorsnapshot.
![Page 385: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/385.jpg)
TheErasertoolerasespixelsandrestorespartsofanimagetoapreviouslysavedstate.
TheBackgroundErasertoolerasesareastotransparencybydragging.
TheMagicErasertoolerasessolid-coloredareastotransparencywithasingleclick.
TheGradienttoolcreatesstraight-line,radial,angle,reflected,anddiamondblendsbetweencolors.
![Page 386: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/386.jpg)
ThePaintBuckettoolfillssimilarlycoloredareaswiththeforegroundcolor.
The3DMaterialDroptooldropsthematerialloadedinthe3DMaterialEyedroppertoolontothetargetedareaofa3Dobject.
TheBlurtoolblurshardedgesinanimage.
TheSharpentoolsharpenssoftedgesinanimage.
TheSmudgetoolsmudgesdatainanimage.
![Page 387: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/387.jpg)
TheDodgetoollightensareasinanimage.
TheBurntooldarkensareasinanimage.
TheSpongetoolchangesthecolorsaturationofanarea.
Thepentoolsdrawandmodifysmooth-edgedpaths.
Thetypetoolscreatetypeonanimage.
![Page 388: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/388.jpg)
Thetypemasktoolscreateaselectionintheshapeoftype.
Thepathselectiontoolsmakeshapeorsegmentselectionsshowinganchorpoints,directionlines,anddirectionpoints.
TheshapetoolsandLinetooldrawshapesandlinesinanormallayerorshapelayer.
TheCustomShapetoolmakescustomizedshapesselectedfromacustomshapelist.
![Page 389: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/389.jpg)
TheHandtoolmovesanimagewithinitswindow.
TheRotateViewtoolnondestructivelyrotatesthecanvas.
TheZoomtoolmagnifiesandreducestheviewofanimage.
![Page 390: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/390.jpg)
Appendix:Keyboardshortcuts
MosttoolsandcommandsinPhotoshopcanbeaccessedthroughkeyboardshortcuts.Asyougrowmorecomfortablewiththesoftware,learningshortcutsfortoolsandcommandsyouusemostoftencansaveyoutime.
ToolsEachgroupoftoolsintheToolspanelsharesashortcut.PressShift+theletterkeyrepeatedlytocyclethroughhiddentools.
ApplicationmenusTheseshortcutsareforWindows.ForMacOS,substituteCommandforCtrlandOptionforAlt.
![Page 391: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/391.jpg)
![Page 392: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/392.jpg)
Index
Symbols3DAxiswidget351
3Dfeatures348–359
3Dlayers349
3Dprintsettings353
3Dscenes
positioningelementsin352
printing353
3Dtools349
Aactions
batch-playing314
playing314
recording309–314
stoppingrecording313
actionssets310
Actionspanel309
AddAudiooption259
AddLayerMaskbutton139
AddMediabutton250
AddNoisefilter219
AdjustmentBrushtool(CameraRaw)297
adjustmentlayers97–98
Black&White50,255
Brightness/Contrast217
ChannelMixer217
Curves17,110–111,293
defined17
Exposure218
Hue/Saturation97,153
![Page 393: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/393.jpg)
Levels119,152,154,284
usinginvideo254
AdobeBridge
addingfavorites37
Favoritespanel37
installing3
openingfilesinCameraRawfrom268
openingfilesinPhotoshopfrom36
AdobeBrushCC197
AdobeCameraRaw
adjustingwhitebalancein270
AdjustmentBrushtool297
Basicpanel274
Detailpanel276
openingimagesin268
OpenObjectbutton281
savingfilesin282
synchronizingsettingsacrossimages277
usingasafilter297–298
version266
workflow270
workspace269
AdobeColorCC197
AdobeGenerator316–320
creatingmultipleassetsperlayer319
parameters321
AdobeIllustrator
importingSmartObjectsfrom194
importingtextfrom194–195
AdobePhotoshopCC
installing3
newfeatures2
![Page 394: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/394.jpg)
resettingthedefaultpreferencesfor10
starting3,10
workarea10–31
AdobePhotoshopCCClassroominaBook(2015release)1
accessinglessonfiles3
prerequisites2
AdobePhotoshopLightroom286–287
AdobePreviewCC322
AdobeShapeCC197
AdobeStock78
Alignedoption48
aligninglayers103
alphachannels138,148
about140,151
anchorpoints185,188
animating
position256
text252
anti-aliasing62
applicationframe,inMacOS11
ApplyLayerCompbox102
arrowkeys
nudgingselectionswith59–60
usingtheShiftkeywith59
artboards322
assets
importingforvideo249
resizingforvideo252
audio
addingtoavideotimeline259
fading260
muting260–261
![Page 395: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/395.jpg)
shorteningclips259
Audiotrack259
Auto-AlignLayers103,125
AutoEnhanceoption56
automatingtasks309–316
axes,3D351
Bbackgroundlayer74
convertingtoaregularlayer76,312
erasing79
overview76
barreldistortion,correcting120
Basicpanel(inCameraRaw)274
batch-playingactions314
Behance343
Bevel&Embosseffect195
bitmapimages
overview10,182
vectorgraphicsvs.182–183
blackandwhite,convertingcolorimagesinPhotoshop50
blackpoint274
Black&Whiteadjustmentlayer50,255
blemishes,removing44
BlendImagesTogetheroption117
blendingcolorswithaphotograph236
blendingmodes
achievingdifferenteffectswith93
applyingtolayers84
Color212
Luminosity222
Multiply84
Overlay84
![Page 396: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/396.jpg)
overview82
BloattoolintheLiquifyfilter211
BlurEffectspanel115
BlurGallery112–115
blurs
causedbycameramotion,removing134
FieldBlur114
IrisBlur112–113,216
PathBlur114
restoringnoise115
SpinBlur114
surfaceblur294
Tilt-Shift114
borders
adding79,99
discarding39
Bridge.SeeAdobeBridge
brighteninganimage110–111,119
Brightness/Contrastadjustmentlayer217
bristletips226
BrowseInBridgecommand36
brushes
loadingwithcolor233
presets234
settings227
ShapeDynamicsoptions239
Brushpanel227
BrushPosesettings239
BrushPresetspanel235
Brushtool20
settingoptions145
buttons
![Page 397: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/397.jpg)
creatinginPhotoshop303–309
duplicating308
Ccalibration,monitor337
cameralensflaws,correcting120–122
CameraRaw.SeeAdobeCameraRaw
camerarawimages
camerassupportedbyAdobeCameraRaw267
creating267
fileformatsforsaving282
histogram276
opening268–269
overview267
proprietary266
cameraraw
saving279–280
sharpening276
whitebalanceandexposureadjustment270–271
CameraShakeReductionfilter134
cameras,in3Dlayers349
changingtheangleof351
cameraviews351
Camerawidget351
CanvasSize312
centerpoint,selectingfrom66
channelmasks140
ChannelMixeradjustmentlayer217
channels
adjustingindividual150–152
alphachannels148,151
loadingasselections153
overview138,148
![Page 398: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/398.jpg)
Channelspanel138
Characterpanel88
checkerboardtransparencyindicator79
chromaticaberration120
ClassroominaBook1
CleanBrushAfterEveryStrokeicon232
cleanbrush(MixerBrushtool)232
clippingmasks
about140,159
creating162–164
indicator164
inplacedvideoassets255
shortcut163
closedpaths183,185
closingaPhotoshopfile12
Cloudsfilter86
CMYKcolormode,convertingto332
CMYKcolormodel332
defined336
gamut336
collaborating,withlibraries197
color
additive332
adjustingoverall40
changingforeground18
convertingtoblackandwhite50
defaultforegroundandbackground216
defaulttext162
managedworkflow337–338
mixingwiththeMixerBrush231
out-of-gamut332
previewingCMYKvaluesinRGBmode332
![Page 399: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/399.jpg)
sampling18,227
selectingby54
selectingusingtheSwatchespanel24–25
softeningedgetransitions62
Colorblendingmode212
colorcasts,removing40
colorcomp341
colormanagement337–338
ColorOverlay195
Colorpanel28
colorprofiles337
ColorRange,SkinTonesoption292
colorsettings
restoring5
saving5
ColorSettingsdialogbox337–338
colorspace337
deviceprofile337
combiningimages
inapanorama116–119
withdifferentperspectives130–134
commands,keyboardshortcutsfor365
CommitAnyCurrentEditsbutton99
CommitTransformbutton195
Content-AwareFill
withpanoramas116
Content-AwareMovetool126,128
Content-AwarePatchtool45
Contentpanel,inBridge37
contextmenus19
withtype166,169
ContrastsliderinCameraRaw274
![Page 400: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/400.jpg)
ControlTimelineMagnificationslider251
ConvertforSmartFilters297
convertingimagestoblackandwhite50
copying
andanti-aliasing62
atsameresolution69
commands69
images101,333
images,andcentering77
layers77–79
selections68,69
settingsinCameraRaw277
CopyMergedcommand69
cornerpoints185
creases,repairing44
CreateVideoTimeline249
croppingimages38–39,69–70
croppingshield38
Croptool38
CrossFadetransition258
curvedpaths185
Curvesadjustmentlayer17–18,110,293
customizingtheuserinterface30
cutouts194–195
DDefaultForegroundAndBackgroundColors216
defaults,resetting4,10
DeleteCroppedPixelsoption38
depthoffield,adding123
deselectingselections57
DetailpanelinCameraRaw276
DifferenceCloudsfilter216
![Page 401: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/401.jpg)
DirectSelectiontool185
discretionaryligatures173
displaying
documentsize101
layers78
multipledocuments77
distortions,correcting130
DNGfileformat282
dockingpanels27
documentsize,displaying101
Dodgetool291–292
draggingimagefilestoaddlayers87
DragThe3DObjecttool350
DropShadowlayerstyle306,312
dropshadows91–92,94
duplicating
areasofascene126
images334
layers308
durationofvideoclips,changing251
Dust&Scratchesfilter49
Eediting
shapes194
SmartFilters210
text167
EditInQuickMaskModebutton145
EllipticalMarqueetool54,222
centeringselection66
circularselectionswith58
EPSfileformat340
EraseRefinementstool144
![Page 402: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/402.jpg)
Erasertool103
erodibletip230
exporting
3Dobjectsforprinting355
imagefilesfromlayers316
video261
Exposureadjustmentlayer218
Eyedroppertool18,227
eyeicon,intheLayerspanel75
FFadeWithBlacktransitions258
fadingaudio260
Favoritespanel,inBridge37
Feathercommand62
feathering62
FieldBlur114
fileformats
fromCameraRaw282
transferringimagesbetweenapplicationsandplatforms282
type173
filesize
flattenedvs.unflattened101
reducing101
files,saving18,101–104
fills
color349
foregroundcolor100
gradient90
film.Seevideo
filters
addingcloudswith86
AddNoise219
![Page 403: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/403.jpg)
CameraRawFilter297
CameraShakeReduction134
DifferenceClouds216
Dust&Scratches49
LightingEffects220
Liquify206–207
SmartSharpen49,311
FitOnScreencommand67
FlattenImagecommand41
flatteningimages101
focus,adjusting123
fonts
alternates173
changingintheoptionsbar23
OpenType173
previewingincontext161
selecting160
Foregroundcolorswatch24,86
four-colorprinting332
fractions173
FreeformPentool183
freehandselections63–64
FreeTransform198,204,206
Ggamut336
colorsoutsideof332–333
GamutWarning333–334
Generator.SeeAdobeGenerator
GeometricDistortionCorrectionoption117
GradientPicker90
gradients,listingbyname90
Gradienttool90
![Page 404: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/404.jpg)
guides
adding159
ruler304
guides
SmartGuides198
HHandtool65
HDR,inAdobeCameraRaw296
HealingBrushtool44,289
Help,Photoshop6
hiding
layers78
selectionedges60
high-resolutionimages35
histogram
inLevelsadjustmentlayer41,285
histogram,inCameraRaw276
Historypanel215–221
HorizontalTypetool22,88,160,161
hue,adjustingforprinting333
Hue/Saturationadjustmentlayers17,146,153
IIllustrator.SeeAdobeIllustrator
images
centeringandcopying162
copying101
determiningscanresolution35
duplicating333
fittingonscreen65
flattening101–103
resolution35–36
![Page 405: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/405.jpg)
sharpening276
sizeandresolution35–36
ImageSizecommand69
imagewindow12,14,14–15
fittingimageto67
scrolling16
importing
embeddedSmartObjects315
multiplefilesfromBridge203
InDesign.SeeAdobeInDesign
Infopanel303
inkjetprinters341
InnerShadowlayerstyle164
interface.Seeuserinterface
Invertcommand152
IrisBlur112–114,216
JJPEGfileformat
camerarawimagesand267
imagedegradationand287
Kkeyboardshortcuts
comprehensivelist364–365
customizing234
duplicating68
Movetool59
keyframes
appearanceof253
movingtothenextorprevious256
usingtoanimatetext252
L
![Page 406: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/406.jpg)
Lassotools54,63–64
layercomps102
layereffects
adding91
updating99
layergroups303
layermasks140
layers
about74
adding86–87
aligning103
Background76
blendingmodes82–83
convertingBackgroundtoregular312
convertingtobackground76
copying77–79
copyingandcentering77,81
copyingandmerging69
duplicating82,308
effects89–92,91–94
erasing79–81
flattening101,102
generatingimagesfrom316
generatingmultipleassetsfrom319
hidingandshowing75,78,79
linking84–86
locking75
mergingvisible101
namingimageassetsin317
opacity82
overview74
painting211
![Page 407: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/407.jpg)
rearranging80–82
removingpixelsfrom79–81
renaming77
resizing84–86
rotating84
showing79
thumbnails,hidingandresizing75
transforming84
transparency82–83
type88
Layerspanel
overview75–76
QuickMaskmodeindicator145
layerstyles
addingtotype164
applying89–92,91–94
Bevel&Emboss195
ColorOverlay195
DropShadow91,94,306,312
multipleinstancesofeffect96
overview89,91
Satin95
Stroke94,306
learningresourcesforAdobePhotoshopCC6
lengthofvideoclips,changing251
LensCorrectionfilter120–122
lessonfiles,accessing3
Levelsadjustmentlayers40–41,119,152,154,284
libraries,collaboratingwithCreativeCloud197
ligatures,discretionary173
lighteninganimage110–111,119
LightingEffectsfilter220
![Page 408: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/408.jpg)
Lightroom.SeeAdobePhotoshopLightroom
lights,in3Dlayers349
lineargradients86–88
Liquifyfilter206–207
LiveTipBrushPreview229
LoadFilesIntoPhotoshopLayerscommand203
loading
brusheswithcolor233
channelsasselections153
low-resolutionimages35
upscaling221
Luminosityblendingmode222
MMacOS,differencesinworkarea11
MagicWandtool54
combiningwithothertools60–61
MagneticLassotool54,65–66
magnification13–14.SeealsoZoomtool
magnifyingglass.SeeZoomtool
marqueetools54
masks
colorvaluesforediting138
creating139–142
inverting146
overview138
refining141
terminology140
materials,in3Dlayers349
MergeVisiblecommand102
merging
images103,123
imageswithdifferentperspectives130–134
![Page 409: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/409.jpg)
layers101
multiplePhotoshopfiles203
meshes,in3Dlayers349
mistakes,correcting25–31
MixerBrushtool
about226
cleaningthebrush232
mixingcolors231
withaphotograph236
mobiledevices
designingwithartboards322
testingdesignswithAdobePreviewCC322
usingwithlibraries197
monitor
calibration337
resolution35–36
motionblurs115
Motiondialogbox252,255
Motionworkspace249
Movetool26
movingselections57
scissorsicon67
moving
3Dobjects351
objectsinanimage126
panels27
selections56–57
Multiplyblendingmode84
mutingaudio260–261
Nnavigating
usingScrubbyZoom15
![Page 410: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/410.jpg)
usingtheNavigatorpanel16
withtheZoomtool13–14
Navigatorpanel16
noise,reducing49
nondestructivefilters206
Notespanel171
Oopacity,changing82–83
openingimagesinCameraRaw268
OpenObjectbutton(inCameraRaw)281
openpaths183,185
OpenTypefileformat158,173
optionsbar19
comparedtopanels29–30
overview22–23
settingtypeoptionsin23
organizingphotos286–287
out-of-gamutcolor332–333
outputresolution,determining36
Overlayblendingmode84
Ppainting
layers211
wetnessoptions228
withanerodibletip230
withtheMixerBrushtool224–239
panandzoomeffects,addingtovideo257–258
paneldock27
panels
Brushpanel227
comparedtooptionsbar29
![Page 411: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/411.jpg)
docking27
expandingandcollapsing28–29
movingtoanothergroup27
overview26–27
resizing28
undocking27
workingwith24–26
panningwiththeNavigatorpanel16
panorama116–119
gettingthebestresults118
inAdobeCameraRaw296
Pan&Zoomoption252,257
PaperColoroption339
paper,simulatingwhite339
Paragraphpanel28
paragraphtype160
PasteIntocommand69,222
pasting
andanti-aliasing62
atsameresolution69
commands69
Patchtool45
PathBlur114
paths183–184
addingtypeto165–166
closing185
drawingcurved185
drawingstraight185
guidelinesfordrawing188
saving185,192
pathsegments185
Pathspanel185,186
![Page 412: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/412.jpg)
vectormask194
PDF.SeePhotoshopPDF
Penciltool183
Pentool
asselectiontool184
drawingpaths184–188
keyboardshortcut183
overview183–184,185
settingoptions186–187
PerspectiveWarp130
photocorrection
resolutionandsize35–36
retouchingstrategy34
Photomerge116–117
bestpractices118
photorestoration,manual42–43
PhotoshopEPSfileformat333
PhotoshopPDF,savingas177
PhotoshopRawfileformat267
pincushiondistortion120
pixelmask140
pixels
defined10,35,182
imageandmonitor35–36
PlaceLinked195
placingembeddedSmartObjects315
planes,PerspectiveWarp131
playhead,intheTimelinepanel254
plug-ins10
pointtype160
distorting169–170
paragraphsvs.170
![Page 413: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/413.jpg)
PolygonalLassotool21,54
Polygontool194
position,animatinginvideo256
PostScriptfonts158,173
preferences
gamut-warningcolor333
restoringdefaults4,10
Units&Rulers303
PreserveDetails(Enlargement)option221
PreserveNumbersoption338
presets
brush234
filmandvideo248
previewing
brushtips229
fontsincontext161
imagesinabrowser320
Printdialogbox342
printers,inkjet341
printing325–345
3Dfiles353
CMYKmodeland336–337
guidelines341
identifyingout-of-gamutcolor332–333
preparingimagesfor326
proofingimagesonscreen338–341
resolution36
savingimageasseparations340
printinginks,simulating339
processcolors34,332
ProofColorscommand339
proofingimages338–341
![Page 414: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/414.jpg)
PSDformat282
camerarawimagesand267
PuckertoolintheLiquifyfilter211
PuppetWarp146
QQuickMaskmode145
quickmasks138,145
paintingcolor146
QuickSelectiontool54,55–56,139
Rrasterimages,overview182
recordingactions309–314
rectangles,rounded174
RectangularMarqueetool19,54,61,304
redeye,correcting108–110
RedEyetool109–110
RefineEdge62,149
RefineMaskdialogbox141
RefineRadiustool142
renderingvideo261
repositioningselections58
ResizeToFillCanvasoption252
resizing
layers84
panels28
videoassets252
resizingtheimagecanvas312
resolution35–36
retouching/repairing
overview34
removingblemishes44–45
![Page 415: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/415.jpg)
settingcorrectresolution35–36
withtheHealingBrushtool289
withtheSpotHealingBrushtool44,289–291
RGBcolormode,convertingtoCMYK332
RGBcolormodel332,332–334
about332
gamut336
right-clickmenus19
RollThe3DObjecttool351
rotating
3Dobjects351
selections64
RoundedRectangletool174–175
rulerguides159,304
rulers160
Ssamplingcolors18,227
Satinlayerstyle95
saturation,adjustinginPhotoshop291–292
Saturationslider(inCameraRaw)274
saving
asPhotoshopPDF177
imagesasseparations340
scaling162
3Dobjects351
imagesup221
scanresolution35
scrubbing23
ScrubbyZoom15
selecting
alayerinamultilayerfile57
fromcenterpoint66–67
![Page 416: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/416.jpg)
high-contrastedges65–66
inverseselection61–62
layers79
overview54
skintones292
text99
selections
bycolor54
circular66
copying69
duplicating68
elliptical57–65
featheringexisting62
freehand54
geometric54
hidingedgesof60
inverting16
moving56–57,59,67–68,68
rotating64–65
showingedges60
softening62
subtractingfrom61
selectiontools54–55
separations
printing342–344
savingimageas340
sepiaeffect,creating255
shaders,in3Dlayers349
shadows,creating148
ShapeDynamicsoptions,forbrushes239
shapelayers194–195
shapes,custom192–195
![Page 417: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/417.jpg)
Shapewaysonline3Dprintvendor354
sharpeningimages
inCameraRaw276–277
inPhotoshop49–50
shortcutmenus19
shortcuts.Seekeyboardshortcuts
shorteningvideoclips251
Show/HideVisibilitycolumn79
ShowTransformControlsoption195
sidecarXMPfiles277
SingleColumnMarqueetool54
SingleRowMarqueetool54
skewinganobject150
skintones,selecting292
SmartFilter112
SmartFilters206–209
editing210
SmartGuides198
SmartObjects
automaticupdateonediting194
convertinglayersto206
embedded315
layerthumbnail195
linked195,197
overview194
SmartFiltersand206
SmartSharpenfilter49,311
smoothpoints185
snapping303
soft-proofing338–341
spellchecking166
SpinBlur114
![Page 418: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/418.jpg)
SplitatPlayheadbutton259
Spongetool291–292
SpotHealingBrushtool44–45,289–291
stackingorder,changing80–82
Standardmode145
startingPhotoshop10
statusbar14
stickynotes171
StopRecordingbutton313
stopwatchiconintheTimelinepanel253
straighteninganimage38
strobeeffect115
Strokelayerstyle94,306
SubtractFromSelectionbutton61
SurfaceBlurfilter294
swashes173
Swatchespanel24–25,25
swatches,selecting24
synchronizingsettingsinCameraRaw277
Ttemperature,image271
text.Seealsotype
adding160
animating252
creating22,88–89
defaultcolor162
moving89
selecting99
textures,in3Dlayers349
thumbnails
layer75
SmartObject195
![Page 419: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/419.jpg)
TIFF(TaggedImageFileFormat)
camerarawimagesand267
overview282
Tilt-ShiftBlur114
timeline,creating249
Timelinepanel
changingthemagnification251
overview247
returningtothefirstframe258
tints
defined271
inBlack&Whiteadjustmentlayers255
ToleranceoptionfortheMagicWandtool60
tone,adjusting40–41
tools
Brushtool20
Content-AwareMove126,128
Croptool38
EllipticalMarquee222
Eyedropper18,227
HealingBrushtool44
HorizontalTypetool22
keyboardshortcutsfor183,364
Lassotool63
MagicWandtool60
MagneticLassotool63,65
Movetool26
Patchtool45
PolygonalLasso21
PolygonalLassotool63
QuickSelectiontool55,139
RectangularMarquee304
![Page 420: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/420.jpg)
RectangularMarqueetool19
RoundedRectangletool174–175
selectinghidden21–22
selection54–55
SpotHealingBrushtool44
using12–18
Toolspanel
comparedtootherpanels29–30
double-columnview13
selectingandusingtoolsfrom13–19
tooltips,displaying14
tracks,inatimeline249
trainingresources6
transformations,free-form84–85
transforming
layers84–86
SmartObjects195
transitions
addingtovideo258
changingthelengthof259
transparency
adjusting82–83
indicating79
TransparencyAndGamutdialogbox333
trimminganimage39
TrueTypefonts173
tutorialsforlearningPhotoshop6
type.Seealsotext
aligning160
clippingmask159,162–164
creating160–161
glyphs172
![Page 421: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/421.jpg)
onapath165–166
overview158
resizing158
resolution-independent158
settingoptions160
swashes173
tricks166
truefractions173
vertical175–176
warping169–170
typefaces.Seefonts
formats158
selecting160
typelayers88
creatingnew166
selectingcontents166
Typetool22–23
Uundockingpanels27
Undocommand25
undoingactions25–26
withtheHistorypanel215–221
Units&Rulerspreferences303
upscalingimages221
userinterface
AdobeCameraRaw269
changingsettingsfor30
learning10–12
Vvectorgraphics
bitmapimagesvs.182
![Page 422: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/422.jpg)
defined10
overview182
vectormasks140
VerticalTypetool175
video
addingaudioto259
addingpanandzoomeffects257–258
addingtransitions258–259
exporting261
groups250
importingassetsfor249
overview248
rendering261
resizingassetsfor252
usingadjustmentlayersin254
vignetting120
WWacomtablets226,239
warping
imageswiththeLiquifyfilter206
perspective132
type169–170
webbrowser,previewingimagesin320
wetnessoptions,inpainting228
whitebalance,adjusting270–271
WhiteBalancetool(inCameraRaw)271–273
whitepoint274
widgets,3D351
Windows,differencesinworkarea11
workarea10–31
workflows
color-managed337–338
![Page 423: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/423.jpg)
forretouchingimages34
organizingfiles286–287
prepress338
WorkPath
overview185
workspaces
default11
Motion249
Xxaxis351
XMPfiles277
Yyaxis351
Zzaxis351
zooming
intotheTimelinepanel251
out59
Zoomoptioninvideo255
zoomtest,beforeprinting328
Zoomtool13–14
shortcuts143
usingScrubbyZoom15
![Page 424: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/424.jpg)
ProductionNotes
AdobePhotoshopCCClassroominaBook(2015release)wascreatedelectronicallyusingAdobeInDesignCC.ArtwasproducedusingAdobeInDesign,AdobeIllustrator,andAdobePhotoshop.TheMyriadProandWarnockProOpenTypefamiliesoftypefaceswereusedthroughoutthisbook.ForinformationaboutOpenTypeandAdobefonts,visitwww.adobe.com/type/opentype/.
Referencestocompanynamesinthelessonsarefordemonstrationpurposesonlyandarenotintendedtorefertoanyactualorganizationorperson.
ImagesPhotographicimagesandillustrationsareintendedforusewiththetutorials.
Lesson4pineappleandflowerphotography©ImageSource,www.imagesource.com
Lesson6and7modelphotography©ImageSource,www.imagesource.com
TeamcreditsThefollowingindividualscontributedtothedevelopmentofAdobePhotoshopCCClassroominaBook(2015release):
ProjectManager:LaurenDonohue
Writer:ConradChavez
IllustratorandCompositor:JeffBrown
CopyeditorandProofreader:WendyKatz
Indexer:ConradChavez
TechnicalReviewer:JeffBrown
Keystroker:MeganAhearn
Coverdesign:EddieYuen
Interiordesign:MimiHeft
ArtDirector:AndrewFaulkner
Designers:JeffBrownandLaurenDonohue
AdobePressExecutiveEditor:VictorGavenda
AdobePressProjectEditor:ConnieJeung-Mills
AdobePressProductionEditor:TraceyCroom
ContributorsJayGrahambeganhiscareerdesigningandbuildingcustomhomes.Hehasbeenaprofessionalphotographerformorethan25years,withclientsintheadvertising,architectural,editorial,andtravelindustries.Hecontributedthe“ProPhotoWorkflow”
![Page 425: Adobe photoshop cc classroom in a book 2015](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022051100/579076ee1a28ab6874bb6846/html5/thumbnails/425.jpg)
tipsinLesson5.www.jaygraham.com
LisaFarrerisaphotographerbasedinMarinCounty,CA.ShecontributedphotographyforLesson5.www.lisafarrerphoto.com
GawainWeaverhasconservedandrestoredoriginalworksbyartistsrangingfromEadwardMuybridgetoManRay,andfromAnselAdamstoCindySherman.Hecontributedto“RealWorldPhotoRestoration”inLesson2.www.gawainweaver.com
SpecialThanksWeofferoursincerethankstoChristineYarrow,DanielPresedo,PeteFalco,StephenNielson,RussellBrown,andZoranaGeefortheirsupportandhelpwiththisproject.Wecouldn’thavedoneitwithoutyou!